Systems Utilities seagull co za

Document Sample
Systems Utilities seagull co za Powered By Docstoc
					USER GUIDE
COPYRIGHT RESERVE

The Copyright in this manual vests exclusively with The Titan Trust. All rights are reserved.
No part of the manual may be modified, added to, reproduced, transmitted, transcribed,
stored in a retrievable system or translated into any language in any form or by any means,
electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise, in whole or in
part, without the prior consent of The Titan Trust. Any unauthorised use of this manual, in
whole or in part, will result in legal action being taken against such user.


DISCLAIMER

The Titan Trust hereby disclaims any and all guarantees and warranties on this manual or
on the documentation relating to or backing up this manual (“the documentation”), and
specifically disclaims any implied warranties of the merchantability or fitness of this manual
or the documentation for any particular purpose. This manual and documentation are sold
on an “as is” basis; any user of this manual or the documentation uses it entirely at his own
risk.
The Titan Trust reserves the right to revise the publication and to make changes from time
to time in this manual and the documentation.
The Trademark in the name “Titan” is registered in the name of The Titan Trust. Any
unauthorised use of the name “Titan” will result in legal action being taken against
such user.


OTHER TRADEMARKS

-    ACUCOBOL is a registered trademark of ACUCORP Inc.
-    Other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their
     holders.
                                                                                                                              CONTENTS
                                                                         THE SYSTEMS UTILITIES SYSTEM

1.     GETTING STARTED ................................................................................... 1
     1.1.         HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ................................................................................ 1
     1.2.         THE TITAN SYSTEM PROFILE .............................................................................. 2
     1.3.         THE SYSTEMS UTILITIES MODULE OVERVIEW ................................................. 6
     1.4.         SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................... 9
     1.5.         CONCEPTS AND FUNCTIONS ............................................................................ 15
       1.5.1.     USING MENUS ...................................................................................................... 15
       1.5.2.     SYSTEM MENU RESTRICTIONS ......................................................................... 16
       1.5.3.     USING FUNCTION KEYS...................................................................................... 17
       1.5.4.     USING CURSOR KEYS......................................................................................... 18
       1.5.5.     EDITING LARGE FIELDS IN UNIX ....................................................................... 18
       1.5.6.     SPECIAL KEYS...................................................................................................... 19
       1.5.7.     DATA FIELDS ........................................................................................................ 26
       1.5.8.     PRE-LOADED FIELDS .......................................................................................... 27
       1.5.9.     COMPANY/BRANCH OPTIONS............................................................................ 28
       1.5.10. INTERNATIONAL DATE........................................................................................ 28
       1.5.11. SCREEN NUMBERS ............................................................................................. 28
       1.5.12. SCANNING ............................................................................................................ 29
       1.5.13. STATUS MESSAGES ............................................................................................ 31
       1.5.14. ERROR MESSAGES ............................................................................................. 31
       1.5.15. ELECTRONIC MAIL............................................................................................... 32
       1.5.16. PRINTING OPTIONS............................................................................................. 34
       1.5.17. CALCULATOR ....................................................................................................... 35
       1.5.18. AUTO-CALL FACILITY .......................................................................................... 35
       1.5.19. COPY AND PASTE................................................................................................ 35
       1.5.20. MULTI-LANGUAGE FEATURE ............................................................................. 36
       1.5.21. USER DEFINABLE MENU BAR IN WINDOWS .................................................... 36
     1.6.         LOADING THE SYSTEM ....................................................................................... 37
       1.6.1.     LOADING ON MS-DOS SYSTEMS ....................................................................... 38
       1.6.2.     LOADING ON UNIX SYSTEMS ............................................................................. 41
       1.6.3.     INSTALLING TITAN ON WINDOWS..................................................................... 45
     1.7.         INSTALLING THE SYSTEMS UTILITIES MODULE ............................................. 46
       1.7.1.     THE MAIN MENU .................................................................................................. 47
       1.7.2.     THE UTILITIES SYSTEM MENU ........................................................................... 48


2.     SET-UP AND RUN .................................................................................... 49
     2.1.         THE SET-UP SEQUENCE .................................................................................... 49
     2.2.         BACKUP ................................................................................................................ 51
       2.2.1.     BACKUP DISKS/TAPES ........................................................................................ 52
       2.2.2.     BACKUP - MS-DOS SYSTEMS............................................................................. 54
       2.2.3.     RESTORING FROM BACKUP - MS-DOS SYSTEMS .......................................... 54


                                                                                                                                               iii
       2.2.4.    BACKUP - UNIX SYSTEMS .................................................................................. 56
       2.2.5.    RESTORING - UNIX SYSTEMS............................................................................ 56
     2.3.        CREATE SYSTEM FILES - SU00.......................................................................... 57
     2.4.        THE SYSTEM PARAMETER FILE - SU01 ............................................................ 64
     2.5.        OPERATING SYSTEM UTILITIES - SU90 ............................................................ 81


3.     ON-LINE HELP MODULE ......................................................................... 82
     3.1.        THE ON-LINE HELP MODULE MENU .................................................................. 82
     3.2.        LOAD SUPPLIED HELP (ASCII) - SU10 ............................................................... 83
     3.3.        COPY SUPPLIED OR USER HELP - SU11 .......................................................... 85
     3.4.        USER HELP LINK MAINTENANCE - SU12 .......................................................... 91
     3.5.        DELETE SUPPLIED OR USER HELP - SU13 ...................................................... 92
     3.6.        RENAME HELP VARIABLE NAMES - SU14 ......................................................... 96


4.     MAINTENANCE MODULE ........................................................................ 97
     4.1.        THE MAINTENANCE MODULE MENU ................................................................. 97
     4.2.        INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE - SU30 ............................................................. 98
     4.3.        DESCRIPTIONS FILE MAINTENANCE - SU31 .................................................. 123
     4.4.        NUMBERS FILE MAINTENANCE - SU32 ........................................................... 165
     4.5.        NARRATIVE FILE MAINTENANCE - SU33 ........................................................ 168
     4.6.        CAPTURE USER DEFINED SCANS - SU34....................................................... 169
       4.6.1.    SELECTING A SCAN .......................................................................................... 169
       4.6.2.    CREATING NEW SCANS.................................................................................... 172
       4.6.3.    COPYING SCANS ............................................................................................... 179
       4.6.4.    AMENDING SCANS ............................................................................................ 179
       4.6.5.    DELETING SCANS .............................................................................................. 179
       4.6.6.    TITAN SCANS WHICH MAY BE USER DEFINED.............................................. 179
     4.7.        CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE - SU35 .................................................. 180
       4.7.1.    ENTERING FORM TYPES .................................................................................. 181
       4.7.2.    UPDATING FORM TYPES .................................................................................. 193
       4.7.3.    DELETING FORM TYPES ................................................................................... 193
     4.8.        CUSTOMISED TERMINOLOGY – SU351 .......................................................... 194
     4.9.        CURRENCY FILE MAINTENANCE - SU36 ......................................................... 196
     4.10.       SYSTEM FORMULA MAINTENANCE - SU37 .................................................... 198
       4.10.1. SETTING UP THE FORMULA............................................................................. 200
       4.10.2. ALTERING AN EXISTING FORMULA................................................................. 202
       4.10.3. DELETING AN EXISTING FORMULA................................................................. 202
     4.11.       SYSTEM PASSWORD MAINTENANCE - SU38 ................................................. 203
     4.12.       MAXIMUM RANGEBATCH PROCESSING - SU39 ............................................ 216




iv
5.     MISCELLANEOUS MODULE.................................................................. 226
     5.1.        THE MISCELLANEOUS MODULE MENU .......................................................... 226
     5.2.        MEMORY/SPEED OPTIMISATION - SU40 ......................................................... 227
     5.3.        REFERENCE FILE MAINTENANCE - SU41 ....................................................... 230
     5.4.        COMMON CATEGORY INPUT/MAINTENANCE - SU42 .................................... 233
     5.5.        CUSTOMIZED FILE LAYOUT MAINTENANCE - SU44 ...................................... 235
     5.6.        GENERAL CROSS REFERENCE MAINTENANCE - SU45 ............................... 237


6.     ENQUIRY MODULE ................................................................................ 238
     6.1.        THE ENQUIRY & SCAN MODULE MENU .......................................................... 238
     6.2.        COMPANY FILE ENQUIRY - SU50 ..................................................................... 239
     6.3.        DESCRIPTIONS FILE SCAN - SU51 .................................................................. 240
     6.4.        NUMBERS FILE SCAN - SU52 ........................................................................... 241
     6.5.        OBJECT VERSION NUMBER MAINTENANCE - SU53...................................... 242
     6.6.        RUN USER-DEFINED SCANS – SU54 ............................................................... 248
     6.7.        GENERAL CROSS REFERENCE ENQUIRY - SU55 ......................................... 249
     6.8.        SYSTEM PASSWORD ENQUIRY - SU58........................................................... 250


7.     PRINT MODULE....................................................................................... 251
     7.1.        THE PRINT MODULE MENU .............................................................................. 251
     7.2.        DESCRIPTION FILE PRINT - SU71 .................................................................... 252


8.     REPORT MANAGEMENT ........................................................................ 254
     8.1.        THE REPORT MANAGEMENT AND LOGGING SYSTEM MENU ..................... 254
     8.2.        THE REPORT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM - SU60 ............................................... 255
       8.2.1.    DISPLAYING A REPORT ON A SCREEN .......................................................... 256
       8.2.2.    CHANGING THE REPORT STATUS .................................................................. 258
       8.2.3.    DELETING A SINGLE REPORT ......................................................................... 259
       8.2.4.    PRINTING A SINGLE REPORT .......................................................................... 260
       8.2.5.    PLACING A REPORT RANGE ON HOLD ........................................................... 266
       8.2.6.    RELEASING A RANGE OF REPORTS FROM HOLD ........................................ 268
       8.2.7.    PRINTING A RANGE OF REPORTS .................................................................. 269
       8.2.8.    DELETING A RANGE OF REPORTS ................................................................. 272
       8.2.9.    DISPLAYING A RANGE OF REPORTS ON A SCREEN .................................... 274
     8.3.        MANAGEMENT REPORT MAINTENANCE - SU61 ............................................ 276
     8.4.        LOGGING MAINTENANCE - SU62 ..................................................................... 278


APPENDIX A .................................................................................................. 280
     A1. INSTALLATION REGISTRATION FORM ...................................................................... 280




                                                                                                                            v
APPENDIX B .................................................................................................. 281
     B1. DATA FILE UTILITIES ................................................................................................... 281


INDEX ............................................................................................................. 287




vi
                                                          1. GETTING STARTED

1.1.   HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Each chapter in this manual leads logically through the important steps to install and
maintain your system.
Chapter 1 - Getting Started, describes the hard/software requirements and special features
of the TITAN systems.
Chapter 2 - Set-up and Run will take you through the sequential steps required to run the
program effectively. As each program has a System Parameter File Program (SU00, AP00
etc.) and usually a Period End Module (SU9, AP9 etc.) these are combined in this chapter to
ensure all the set-up data is understood.
The following chapters are the same for most systems. They start with the Input Module,
then the Maintenance Module which helps you set up and maintain your file requirements.
Then the Enquiry Module which helps you search for data in your files. After that specific
modules such as Report Management, Interface to Other Systems, will follow. The last
chapter deals with the printing of reports.
If there are specific examples required these are entered in the Appendix. The Index
provides a reference to the actual screen prompts as well as key words.




SU - Getting Started                              JULY 2006                        1-1
1.2.   THE TITAN SYSTEM PROFILE
The system incorporates state-of-the-art transaction processing techniques to optimise high
volume general accounting, distribution and manufacturing functions.
The system has features designed to simplify business account requirements, while still
providing a powerful management information tool.

SYSTEM FEATURES

A MULTI-USER SYSTEM
This is a true multi-user system supporting multiple terminals and printers. Data and record
locking techniques prevent two or more people from trying to update the same element of
data simultaneously. This is essential for safe and successful multi-user operation.

MULTIPLE OPERATING SYSTEMS
A further example of system's flexibility is in the range of operating systems that may be
used. It operates under most of the popular operating systems and computers, taking
maximum advantage of the features these operating systems offer.
A single software solution satisfies, for example, the needs of both the head office using a
mainframe or super-mini, a branch office on a smaller multi-user system, and at a depot on
a single-user PC.

TERMINAL & PRINTER FLEXIBILITY
A set of utilities enables most terminals and printers to be connected to the system. These
utilities allow existing terminals and printers to be used on a new computer system or to add
new devices to an existing system, leading to a lowering in overall hardware investment.

SYSTEM INTEGRATION
Each module may be used independently or may be integrated into a comprehensive
Accounting, Distribution and Manufacturing System.

MULTIPLE COMPANIES, BRANCHES AND WAREHOUSES
All modules accommodate multiple companies and, if required, multiple branches within
these companies. Each of these branches may hold stock in multiple warehouses. These
features allow the effective processing of data for many companies on one system.

ON DEMAND DATA PROCESSING
In addition to operating interactively via on-line workstations, you may do tasks on demand.
They may be undertaken as circumstances necessitate. This is the freedom and operational
flexibility that an effective software solution provides.




1-2                              JULY 2006            Systems Utilities - User Guide
PASSWORDS FOR DATA SECURITY
To protect information from unauthorised access, the system uses various levels of
passwords for each computer user. The use of passwords is designed to make information
secure and available only to those people who have the authority to access it.
Whenever a password is entered into the computer, the system makes a note (or log) of the
user, password, date and time. This results in complete control over data.

MULTIPLE PATHS INTO OPTIMISED DATA
The system automatically keeps data in an ordered state giving you immediate access to
information.

AUDIT TRAILS
Audit trails provide a complete transaction log of what has occurred in the system. In
addition, the system stamps each transaction with a unique audit number as a double
check.
Audit trails are designed to show exactly which transactions have been entered and
processed by the system so that it is possible to back track and analyse earlier transactions.
Audit trails also act as a deterrent against unauthorised use and manipulation of data. They
are a prerequisite for computer based auditing purposes.

MANAGEMENT INFORMATION PROFILING
Management may select the required depth of information analysis. For example, sales can
be analysed, at branch level, product group level or as an individual element.
This feature helps focus on those key elements of information that are important, while still
accumulating the remainder of the information in larger groupings.

SYSTEM MENUS
Menus are used as a guide to the available functions and to select options. Losing track
requires one keystroke to return to the previous menu.
As users become more proficient the menus can be bypassed allowing for fast movement
from module to module. The menus remain available for new users and for training
purposes.

SYSTEM PROMPTS
Extensive prompts are provided which guide you through each function, and also indicate
when the system is processing data.
You are provided with extensive documentation in the form of on-line help screens and
comprehensive well presented manuals.




SU - Getting Started                              JULY 2006                         1-3
SCANNING
The powerful scanning feature enables any element of masterfile data to be found without
knowing the number or looking up a masterfile listing. Merely by pressing one key, you can
scan through a file in various sequences until the data is located.

EXCEPTION-BASED REPORTING AND PREVIEWING
The system has an excellent exception based reporting and previewing facility which
provides you with accurate and concise reports. It is often unnecessary to print this data and
therefore a screen for pre-viewing reports is provided.
Certain reports that must be printed are safe-guarded and cannot be previewed or deleted
by unauthorised users.

SOFT SCREENS
The data input screens are highly flexible and allow you to move freely in any sequence
required.

PRE-LOADED DATA FIELDS
To reduce the amount of data to be entered, fields are pre-loaded with the most frequently
used information for example, if company 01 and branch 01 are the main company and
branch combination, then 01/01 will be pre-loaded. This facility reduces the amount of
repetitive data to be entered and hence improves productivity.

SYSTEM BACK-UP
A mechanism is provided to ensure that all data is securely backed up.
Back-up is an area where chances cannot be taken and is, therefore, obligatory. The system
double checks to ensure that this function is being done regularly.

TRANSACTION LOGGING
There is a feature which allows transaction logging to a log file which, if used allows you to
log all transactions, and in case of a system failure to use these and update your latest
backup with the details, thus making recapture unnecessary.

REPORT WRITER AND APPLICATION BUILDER
There are modules to cater for special enquiries, reports and ad-hoc user systems. The
Report Writer gives you access to all the data files with security provided down to field level.
Output may be to a variety of mediums including ASCII output for spread sheets, word
processing or into attached data bases.
The Application Builder enables users to build their own and ad-hoc programs and reports to
run against a user defined set of data structures.




1-4                               JULY 2006            Systems Utilities - User Guide
GROWTH POTENTIAL
Expense, inconvenience and lost time is often encountered when upgrading or changing to
a new computer system. This often entails changing existing software or converting files to
run on the new system.
This is catered for this with the facility to upgrade the software merely by installing the
upgraded system and transferring the data across to the new computer system. As the
system appears and operates identically on all modules, minimal retraining required.

INTERFACES
The system is designed to operate in conjunction with other computer and software
products. Interfaces are offered to office automation tools (word processing, spreadsheets),
point of sale systems, mainframe data transfer, Bar Code printing and input, price change
input data, budget input and output, and remote invoicing.

TOTALITY
This is a total business system. There are shortcomings in most environments - normally in
at least one of the following areas; data security, printer spooling, report writing, forms
handling, job control or peripheral connectivity.
These weaknesses are addressed by including an extensive set of utilities as a standard
within the system - thereby giving the option as to the best environment to use.




SU - Getting Started                               JULY 2006                         1-5
1.3.   THE SYSTEMS UTILITIES MODULE OVERVIEW
The Utilities System forms an integral part of all other Titan systems providing them with a
common set of Utilities. For example:
   Install the user's company name and systems purchased.
   Set up and maintain the company and branch structure and data.
   Set up the data files for the system.
   Create and maintain description file data which will define various codes and descriptions
    appearing on the screen and in reports, for example Sales representative's numbers,
    names, commission rates, product groups, area codes etc.
   Maintain the numbers file which supplies various sequential numbers to the systems, for
    example audit numbers, next invoice number etc.
   Report management facilities that enable the reports to be viewed on the screen or to
    print reports with a wide range of options.
   Set up and maintain passwords and access permissions within the systems.
   Provide system backup facilities to disk and tape.
   Configure the screens, keyboards, printers and operating system functions within the
    system.
   Provision to create and run jobs.
   Track and report on system logging.
   Create and maintain user defined forms.
   Set up of currency details.
   Set up of user defined formulae.


Each of the modules contain a number of programs as the following table shows.




1-6                               JULY 2006              Systems Utilities - User Guide
MODULE REVIEW
The system consists of the following functional modules.

SYSTEM SET-UP MODULE
Use this module to create data files and to set up overall printer and terminal parameters.
   System file set-up.
   Terminal and printer set-up.

ON-LINE HELP MODULE
The on-line help feature is a valuable aid to operators which may optionally be available at
all times. It includes the following.
   Load supplied help (ASCII).
   Copy supplied or user help.
   User help link maintenance
   Delete supplied or user help.
   Rename help variable names.

MAINTENANCE MODULE
The following maintenance programs are available in the Systems Utilities module.
   Installation maintenance.
   Descriptions file maintenance.
   Numbers file maintenance.
   General narrative file maintenance.
   Customised form maintenance.
   Currency file maintenance.
   Formula maintenance.
   System password maintenance.
   Job processing.
   Memory/speed optimisation.




SU - Getting Started                              JULY 2006                        1-7
ENQUIRY MODULE
These programs provide methods of scanning into key system files.
   Company file enquiry.
   Descriptions file scan.
   Numbers file scan.
   Object version enquiry.

REPORT MANAGEMENT AND LOGGING MODULE
All reports may, if required, be routed to this system thus enabling them to be viewed on the
screen or to be printed in various ways. The decision to log information such as system
errors and user access depends on the user. The module contains multi-option report
management and maintenance programs.
   Report management system.
   Report management maintenance.
   Logging Maintenance.

PRINT MODULE
You may produce a printout of the following.
   Descriptions file print.

OPERATING SYSTEM INTERFACE MODULE
This module has a program which performs up to 15 user defined system commands.
   Operating system interface.




1-8                               JULY 2006          Systems Utilities - User Guide
1.4.   SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
Ensure that there is sufficient disk space before loading the system. If installing a
demonstration system, for example all the systems with demonstration data files, a minimum
of 100Mb is required. A complete system without data files requires 30Mb. The following
tables show the minimum hardware and software configurations required.
To run Titan Release 10, you require ACUCOBOL version 5 or higher.


                                       MS - DOS
 COMPUTER MEMORY               4 MB
 DISK DRIVES/TAPE              1 x flexible disk drive
 STREAMER                      1 x 100MB Hard disk drive
 SCREEN                        Monochrome or colour
                               24 lines by 80 characters
 KEYBOARD                      Standard keyboard with cursor control keys and 10
                               function keys.
 PRINTER                       Parallel or serial port
                               Printer width = 132 characters minimum (220 characters
                               for optimum use of the General Ledger Module)
 OPERATING SYSTEM              MS-DOS release 5.0 or later, using the ANSI.SYS device
                               driver.
                               Also WINDOWS 3.1, WINDOWS NT, WINDOWS 95,
                               WINDOWS 98 and OS/2
 LOCAL AREA NETWORKS           The system functions effectively on all NETBIOS
 (LANS)                        standard LANS, provided all workstations have a
                               minimum of 2MB of memory. We recommend that the
                               file server be dedicated and that sufficient memory (not
                               less that *MB for 5 Titan users) is allocated for a Novell
                               system. The minimum requirement would be a 486 type
                               PC.
 MOUSE CONTROL                 ACUCOBOL 2.3 or higher




SU - Getting Started                           JULY 2006                        1-9
                                    UNIX
 COMPUTER MEMORY    UNIX systems are normally supplied with a minimum of 1MB
                    (1024K) by the manufacturer. This is the minimum
                    recommended to run the operating system. It is recommended
                    that an additional 1MB be added for each additional user on the
                    system, where a user is defined as a 'serial port'.
 DISK DRIVES/TAPE   1 x flexible disk drive or
 STREAMER           1 x streaming tape drive.
                    1 x Hard disk drive (minimum 80MB).
 VDU's              Baud rates of either 9600 or above.
                    Monochrome or colour.
                    24 lines by 80 characters.
                    132 mode of optimum viewing of reports.
 KEYBOARD           Standard keyboard with cursor control keys and a minimum of
                    10 function keys.
 PRINTER            1 x parallel or serial printer depending on the type of printer port
                    available.
                    Printer width = 132 characters minimum (220 characters for
                    optimal use of the General Ledger Module).
 OPERATING SYSTEM   Most versions of UNIX, including SCO UNIX and XENIX, AIX,
                    SCO Open Server, HP-UX, Solaris, Digital..
 ACUCOBOL           TITAN Release 8.0 uses Acucobol 4.0
                    TITAN Release 10 uses Acucobol 5 or higher




1 - 10                     JULY 2006          Systems Utilities - User Guide
                                   WINDOWS
 COMPUTER MEMORY       8 MB
 DISK DRIVES/TAPE      1 x flexible disk drive or
 STREAMER              1 x Hard disk drive (minimum 80MB).
 VDU's                 Monochrome or colour.
                       24 lines by 80 characters.
 KEYBOARD              Standard keyboard with cursor control keys and a minimum of
                       10 function keys.
 PRINTER               1 x parallel or serial printer depending on the type of printer
                       port available.
                       Printer width = 132 characters minimum (220 characters for
                       optimal use of the General Ledger Module).
 OPERATING SYSTEM      MS Windows 3.1 or later
 MOUSE CONTROL         ACUCOBOL 2.3 or higher
 ACUCOBOL              TITAN version 10 uses ACUCOBOL 5 or higher




SU - Getting Started                       JULY 2006                         1 - 11
CHANGES TO CBLCONFI
The following entries affect version 9.0 and upwards of TITAN mostly for WINDOWS users
but they can also affect CHARACTER based users:



     # graphical - displays and accepts Y/N
     # Unix - this should be set to N
     # Windows - setting this to N allows a windows user to choose the character version
     DISPLAY-GRAPHICAL N

     # mouse operation
     # Unix - unused
     # DOS
     USE-MOUSE 1
     #Windows and DOS - this must be set to 131 to enable - right and left mouse actions
     MOUSE-FLAGS 131

     # boxed (0) or unboxed (1)
     # Unix - this MUST be set to 0 otherwise we get additional [ ]'s
     # Windows - either makes the entry fields boxed or just holes in a template
     FIELDS-UNBOXED=1

     # set all labels to lower case
     LOWER-CASE Y

     # menu bar - drop down box Y/N
     # Unix - this must be set to N
     # Windows - setting this to Y will give a new style drop down menu
     MENU-BOX N

     # if function keys to be push buttons Y/N
     # Unix - set this to N
     # Windows - Push buttons = N will retain the line 24 displays
     PUSH-BUTTONS Y

     # BITMAPS
     # Unix - does not support push buttons
     # where to place bitmaps - defaults to line 10 column 30; BITMAP-LINE 5
     BITMAP-COL 20
     # the size of the bitmap - defaults to 10 lines 30 columns;
     BITMAP-LINES 15
     BITMAP-COLS 60

     # PUSH BUTTONS/BITMAPS for Graphical version
     # uncomment this line if you do not want function keys displayed as push-buttons
     # set the value to B if you want to use bitmap function keys (bin\titanmen.bmp)
     PUSH-BUTTONS B

     # FORCE ALPHA FIELDS TO BE UPPER CASE
     # uncomment this line if you do not want alpha fields to be upper case
     FORCE-UPPER-CASE Y




1 - 12                                JULY 2006         Systems Utilities - User Guide
     Other settings:

     # uncomment this line if you want to use the TITAN calculator and not the Windows
     one
     # WIN-CALC Y

     # uncomment this line if you wish TITAN to create the SUSCRN translation file
     # TITAN-SUSCRN Y

     # transaction logging for vision, log-file created in current directory
     # 0=off; 1=on
     LOGGING 1
     # LOG-DIR # use to specify where log file will be
     #LOG-FILE default.log

     #html settings
     #HTML-TEMPLATE-PREFIX /usr/local/apache/htdocs
     #CGI-AUTO-HEADER 0

     #MAIL_DIALOG Y
     # uncomment this line if you wish to display reports routed to e-mail in a dialog box

     #FORCE UPPERCASE
     # uncomment this line if you wish all field entries to be foreced to be uppercase
     #Please note, that this command will be ignored for AB, RW, SA30, SU30, SU34
     #GL60 and all 00 programs

     #MAIL SUFFIX
     #uncomment this line and change txt to a user definable suffix (e.g. eml)
     #TITAN-MAIL-SUFFIX txt




SU - Getting Started                                  JULY 2006                          1 - 13
OTHER OPERATING SYSTEMS
The programs are compatible with other operating systems and variations of the above. For
further information contact an official Dealer or Distributor.




1 - 14                            JULY 2006        Systems Utilities - User Guide
1.5.     CONCEPTS AND FUNCTIONS

1.5.1.      USING MENUS
The menu system consists of three levels.
         Level 1                    The Main Menu (M)

         Level 2                    Menus for each system (SU, AR, AP etc.)

         Level 3                    Individual Module menus (SU1, SU3 etc.)


         To select a program enter the Module number for example: 3 for SU3 -
         Maintenance and view the list of programs.


         Then enter the program number for example 31 for SU31 - Descriptions
         Masterfile Maintenance program.


         Press [Esc] to leave the program or press [Enter] to move back through the
         menus to the Main menu. The program keeps track of three previous menus
         and having backtracked through these you will return to the main menu.


This menu flexibility extends to all other TITAN systems installed. For example, you may
move from Accounts Receivable to Accounts Payable by entering the required program
number:
    AR3 module menu to AP3 module menu to program AP30 or
    IV system menu to program AR30 or
    SP5 module menu to AR7 module menu or
    GL6 module menu to program AR50.
You may define various options on the menu. See program SU30 - Installation
Maintenance in the System Utilities User Guide for further details.

    Please note that System and module menus may be excluded from displaying in
    program SU30 - Installation Maintenance. In this case all programs will display on
    the Main Menu. We suggest you only do this if you have less than 20 programs.




SU - Getting Started                              JULY 2006                      1 - 15
1.5.2.     SYSTEM MENU RESTRICTIONS
A number of restrictions apply to accessing systems/programs via the menu.
If the one of following is displayed;
   System not installed XX
   Program not installed XX99 or XX999
it means that the system/program has not been installed and program SU30 - Installation
Maintenance option 4 or 6 must be used.
An authorisation code is required for system installation and must be obtained from the
Distributor.
If one of the following is displayed;
   Access denied XX (where XX denotes the system)
   Access denied XX999 (where XX999 denotes the program)
it indicates that you do not have access to the system or program. Go to program SU38 -
System Password Maintenance to change this.
If NO installation has been performed, the user (SYSADMIN only), will be directed into
program SU30 - Installation Maintenance to install the system. No programs can be run
until this has been done.




1 - 16                                  JULY 2006    Systems Utilities - User Guide
1.5.3.     USING FUNCTION KEYS
All the system programs use function keys which will execute command functions using a
single keystroke.
These keys are normally found across the top or down the side of the main keyboard and
are usually denoted as [F1], [F2], [F3] ... for function keys 1, 2, 3... The function keys within
the system are used as follows:


 KEY           FUNCTION                     EXPLANATION
 [F1]          Scan forwards                Starts a scan (or search) of a masterfile. Entering
                                            a start value, before pressing [F1], causes the
                                            scan to begin at the value entered (known as
                                            partial scanning).
 [F2]          Scan backwards               Returns to the previous screen of scan data.
 [F3]          Update or accept             Updates the files with the data as displayed or
                                            entered on the screen.
 [F4]          Review or toggle             Permits the review of an input transaction or
                                            automatically pre-loads a cross reference
                                            number.
 [F5]          Alternate scan or toggle     Starts a scan in alphabetic or alternate sequence
                                            or allows a different option to be selected.
 [F6]          Special                      Reserved for special use in various programs.
                                            The status line will indicate the function allocated
                                            to this function key.
 [F7]          Special                      Reserved for special use in various programs.
                                            The status line will indicate the function allocated
                                            to this function key.
 [F8]          Delete                       Deletes record displayed on the screen.
 [F9]          Print                        Prints the details displayed on the screen.
 [F10]         Previous screen              Returns to the previous or function screen or
                                            function selected.
 [Esc]         Exit                         Terminate the program immediately and return to
                                            the previous menu.


 All function keys applicable to a particular screen are displayed on the last line,
 or status line of the screen. If there is insufficient space, the [Esc] and even the
 [F10] entries may be omitted. These two function keys are however, almost
 without exception, still operative, and have the functions listed above.
In the Windows graphical version, you may select to use either push buttons or bitmaps as
shown below. The push buttons are shown first, followed by bitmaps.




SU - Getting Started                                JULY 2006                         1 - 17
1.5.4.    USING CURSOR KEYS
Cursor keys are used to move the cursor up, down, left and right within a program. This
movement is always from field to field. They are indicated in the text as [], [] etc.
The system's `soft screen' facilities make it possible to move about the screen, using the
cursor keys. The cursor is under program control and will only allow movement to a field
sanctioned by the program. The program guides the cursor to the next field once input has
been completed for example, when a field is filled with data or when [Enter] is pressed.


                                    OTHER USEFUL KEYS
  [Bspace]     -     Moves the cursor back one space.
  Control-H    -     Moves the cursor left within a field.
  Control-L    -     Moves the cursor right within a field.
  Tab          -     Clears from the cursor to the end of the field with spaces or zeroes
                     if it is a numeric field.
  Control-X    -     Moves the cursor to the beginning of a field (if not re-defined as
                     the view key).

1.5.5.    EDITING LARGE FIELDS IN UNIX
Titan allows horizontal scrolling of large fields. For example, where a field is 50 characters
long and there is only space on the screen for 30 characters, these field are displayed
differently from others. They shows as underlined fields. In order to edit them, you can use:
    Ctrl+H to take you to the beginning of the field while it is still highlighted.
    Ctrl+L to take you to the end of the field while it is still highlighted.
Once the field is NOT highlighted:
    Ctrl+L to move the cursor forwards
    [Home , [End], [Backspace], [Insert] and [Delete] work within the field.




1 - 18                                JULY 2006           Systems Utilities - User Guide
1.5.6.    SPECIAL KEYS
Three special keys form part of the standard TITAN System and these keys may be invoked
from any part of the TITAN suite. The three keys, named the HELPKEY, the HOTKEY and
the VIEWKEY, are set up in SU01 - Terminal and Printer Setup as ^V, ^W and ^X
(Control-V etc.) respectively. As these functions require extra memory they can be disabled
in program SU30 - Installation Maintenance.

ONLINE HELP
You can use the Online Help by entering Ctrl V (^V). The Online Help shown can be
modified by the systems administrator. The following levels of help apply;
 Help on every ACCEPT (prompt) in the system.
 Help on a common pool of variables (public).
 Help on each program.
 System Help.
These levels may be toggled with [F5] when in the Help screen. If the system attempts to
read the Help message for a specific level and this cannot be found, it will automatically try
the next level, up to level 4. If it still cannot find any Help, a relevant message will be
displayed.
Some of the key concepts in Online Help are;
  [F1]    - Next Screen of Help to be shown.
  [F2]    - Previous Screen of Help to be shown.
  [F3]    - Update changes to level, Help displayed.
  [F5]    - Level of Help shown to user may be altered.
  [F7]    - The user (SYSADMIN only) may edit the Help message.
  [F10]   - Exit Help screen and return to the current position in the
            TITAN System.


A variable can be linked to another variable in the same or another program ensuring the
same Help message does not have to be entered more than once. Help messages may be
entered on 1 to 9999 screens per variable.
A load facility is also provided allowing Help messages to be read from an ASCII file. The
only rule is that each line in the ASCII file may not exceed 80 characters in length.
To invoke the load facility, enter [F7] when in the Help screen (edit Help), and then [F7]
again (load Help). A load screen will be displayed, prompting for an ASCII file name
(maximum 8 characters) from which to load.




SU - Getting Started                              JULY 2006                         1 - 19
SYSTEM HOTKEY
When you enter Ctrl W (^W) you are presented with a window which describes your current
environment as shown below. (The [F7] key also operates as a HOTKEY from the first
screen of any program).
 log on name
 current program
 system
 period
 company/branch selected
 company/branch access
 logging indicator and level
 debugging indicator
 report defaults
 operating system


  These function keys may be selected in the Hotkey window
  [F1]    - Window to the Operating System.
  [F2]    - Debug mode. This is a tool used in-house and is not accessible to
            you.
  [F9]    - Dump the screen to a printer.
  [Esc]   - Exit the Hotkey Window and return to current position in system.




1 - 20                            JULY 2006        Systems Utilities - User Guide
SYSTEM VIEWKEY
The TITAN Viewkey provides you with a data access tool if you are using an accounting
system.
By merely entering a user-defined key, a view window, which provides complete access to
all accounting information, overlays the current screen.
View the customer's master file information while performing Job Costing Operations, check
that an order posted 5 orders back went through with the correct narrative, pinpoint which
inventory items are producing the most sales while processing purchases, check stock
available in another company or branch. All this without leaving the screen you are currently
busy with.
The sophisticated windowing mechanism employed by the software merely overlays the
current screen with the VIEW window and once completed repaints the original window.

FEATURES

   User-definable key set up in SU01 - terminal independent.
   Ability to provide security from file level all the way down to field level.
   Windowing mechanism allowing you to overlay current screen with VIEW screen without
    aborting current operation.
   Integrates to Report Writer Dictionary for field and key definitions.
   Fast, online access to any data in the TITAN system - alpha, numeric and computational
    at the depression of a single key.
   Full Report Writer compatibility to RW26 - Dictionary Field Maintenance and RW27 -
    Dictionary Sequence Maintenance.
   Ability to interface to non-TITAN COBOL applications.
   Ability to skip to selected places in files using various keys.
   Ability to set up and store any number of views of the data.
   Ability to load VIEW program into memory to provide optional access.
   Ability to track and keep current position in file between scans.




SU - Getting Started                                  JULY 2006                    1 - 21
DETAILS
The TITAN View facility consists of a special utility program UTVIEW that integrates with the
system harness of TITAN providing you with an online view of your data at all times. You are
free to tailor the views to your own needs in order to show the information required.
Enter Ctrl X (^X) for the View Window which is loaded with the header for the default View.
The default View will be the last file accessed in TITAN.


  These function keys may be selected in the View Window
  [F1]    Alters the contents of the View.
  [F2]    Display the view (if it has been previously set up).
  [F9]    Alters key settings.
  [Esc]   Changes the current View.


The current View is always displayed in the top left hand corner of the screen together with
the program window that you have overlaid.

RELEVANT PROGRAMS

The View programs which are loaded in the $progs/UT directory are; UTVIEW, UTVFLD,
UTVKEY.


  SU01      Option 1 - Set up codes for the Viewkey for the specific terminals.
  SU38      Set up user permissions.
            User level (1-9) where 9 is a high access level.
            Read/Write/Denied permission restricts the user's ability to access, view or
            modify views.
  SU30      Enable the Hot or Help keys.
  RW26      Perform field maintenance (not mandatory)
  RW27      Perform key maintenance (not mandatory)




1 - 22                             JULY 2006         Systems Utilities - User Guide
HOW TO TAILOR THE VIEW SOFTWARE

[F5] - ALTERING A VIEW
The following details can be set;

RECORD LENGTH                       :   This is not currently needed

DESCRIPTION                         :   Describes the view, the description appears in the
                                        centre of the screen

KEY SEQ                             :   This relates the view to a key set up for this file via the
                                        [F6] key.

SECURITY LEVEL                      :   A level greater than the user's level in SU38 - System
                                        Password Maintenance prevents you from
                                        accessing this VIEW
On entering [F1] fields may be set up for the View;

START POSITION                      :   The start position in the file.

LEVEL                               :   Field security level, a level greater than the user's
                                        level in SU38 - System Password Maintenance
                                        prevents you from accessing this View.

HEADER                              :   10 character field description.

FIELD TYPE                          :   Alpha (1), numeric (2) or computational (3).
                                        If the field type is 2 or 3 you must enter the decimals
                                        and whether the field is signed or not.
A full interface to the Report Writer Module is provided. If you press [F1] you can access
RWDICT - the TITAN Report Writer Dictionary and select the fields. To do this you must
have been provided with the program UTVFLD and the file RWDICT.

[F6] - ALTERING KEYS

The [F6] key corresponds to [F5] except that you can define the keys available for the View.
The keys must be physically defined in the COBOL file. Again, an interface to RWDICT is
provided for you to select the key definitions. To do this you must have been provided with
the program UTVFLD and the file RWDICT.




SU - Getting Started                                JULY 2006                          1 - 23
[F1] - VIEWING THE FILE

Once the View has been defined you can see the contents of the files by pressing [F1].
You are prompted for a partial key which enables you to START the view at a particular
point in that file based on the key set. If you do not enter a partial key but press [F1] again,
the View will commence at the beginning of the data and continue through the file in a
sequential fashion.
IF NO KEY HAS BEEN DEFINED - a message "No Key Set" displays to the right of the key
input prompt and the View defaults to the prime key of that file.
At the end of the data an "End of data" message will appear and if you press [F1] again it
will reset the View to the top of the file.




1 - 24                               JULY 2006          Systems Utilities - User Guide
QUICK ACCESS
If you have a multi-user licence, you may use the ‘quick access’ facility provided that not all
users are logged on to the system.
This means that you can at any time, while in a specific program, press a special control
character and access another program.
This is extremely useful for instance if you are entering customer masterfiles and find that a
particular customer group is not on file. Instead of having to exit AR30 - Customer File
Maintenance and calling up program SU31 Description File maintenance, you can now
press the control character while in AR30 - Customer File Maintenance. A screen like
the one below displays.




     QUICK ACCESS:




Enter the program you wish to access, in our example SU31 Description File
maintenance, enter the data and exit this program. The system will return you to AR30 -
Customer File Maintenance where you can continue as normal.
If you wish to exit back to your original program without selecting a new program, enter
‘Q’.
For the quick access facility to be operative, add the following to your CBLCONFIG file.
‘KEYSTROKE exception=44 key’, where ‘key’ is the key to allow the quick access, for
example [CNTRL G] (^G).




SU - Getting Started                               JULY 2006                         1 - 25
1.5.7.    DATA FIELDS
Data fields may contain either numeric or alpha-numeric data. They are indicated by a left
square bracket at the beginning of the field and a right square bracket at the end of the field.
The space between the brackets is the field size that is available for characters or digits, for
example;


VENDOR #                          :     [         ]


Field sizes are indicated in this documentation by numbers following the field description.
Examples of this usage are as follows;

VENDOR #                          :     6 characters
                                        Such as 123456, ABC456 or JONES.

CREDIT LIMIT                      :     7 digits
                                        Such as 1600000

PURCHASES
YEAR-TO-DATE                      :     9.2 digits
                                        Such as 456789123.27




1 - 26                                JULY 2006        Systems Utilities - User Guide
1.5.8.    PRE-LOADED FIELDS
In order to reduce the amount of data to be entered, all the system input fields are
pre-loaded with the most commonly used options or selections, for example, if company 01
and branch 01 are the main company and branch combination, then 01/01 will be
pre-loaded into the company/branch field.
To accept the screen as displayed with the various pre-loaded options, press [Enter] in
answer to the "DETAILS OK? (Y/N)" prompt.
To change the pre-loaded field options, enter N (No) or use [Up arrow]. The cursor will move
to the first option field for the selection to be entered. This technique is used throughout.
Certain programs have more than one option screen.
Standard default screens, such as company/branch selection may be accepted as before by
pressing [Enter] in answer to the "DETAILS OK? (Y/N)" prompt.
Subsequent screens that present options related specifically to that program may be
changed according to the requirements by moving the cursor to that field and entering the
option. To accept the complete screen as displayed, press [F3] where indicated.




SU - Getting Started                             JULY 2006                        1 - 27
1.5.9.    COMPANY/BRANCH OPTIONS
On most programs in the TITAN suite you are prompted to enter the Company/Branch
combination for enquiry or input entry etc.
However, it is possible to set up defaults to prevent this prompt appearing when entering a
program.
A flag may be set in program SU30 - Installation Maintenance option 1 screen to suppress
the prompt for the Company/Branch options. If the suppress flag is set ON you will only be
prompted to enter the options if (a) the default options are not accepted for a particular
program or (b) the user enters the [F10] key from the first screen of any program. The
suppress flag may be overridden for individual users by setting the flag in SU38 - System
Password Maintenance.
The Company/Branch defaults are set up as either the user defaults when logging on (set in
SU38 - System Password Maintenance) or, if the user defaults are not set, the installation
defaults on the system.
You may override these by typing [F10] from the main menu, or from the first screen of any
program. The defaults may be automatically reset after each program if desired.

1.5.10.   INTERNATIONAL DATE
Three date formats may be used;
DD/MM/CCYY - Format 1
MM/DD/CCYY - Format 2
CCYY/MM/DD - Format 3
The date format is set up in SU30 - Installation Maintenance - Option 1 - Screen 3.

1.5.11.   SCREEN NUMBERS
Each program screen is numbered in the right-hand top corner for example, SU30 10/001.
The screen number is unique to each program and is used as a means of program
identification.
The number is made up of the following components.


                            System identifier           SU
                            Program number              30
                            Current release number      80
                            Current version number      001


 PLEASE QUOTE THIS NUMBER WHEN USING THE SUPPORT SERVICES




1 - 28                             JULY 2006         Systems Utilities - User Guide
1.5.12.     SCANNING
This facility enables the masterfile data to be found without knowledge of the
account/reference number, or with reference to the masterfile listing.
Scanning is always available in one sequence, with some programs giving two and
sometimes three or four scanning sequences. Examples of scanning sequences are;
 Customer account number or alphabetic sequences
 Order number, customer number, delivery date, stock number sequences.

       SYSTEM UTILITIES - DESCRIPTIONS FILE SCAN                      SU51   11/001
       CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED
       BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN
       STARTING RECORD TYPE        [AS]
       TYPE    CODE   DESCRIPTION
       AS              GL ACCOUNTING SECTIONS
       AS      A1      Fixed Assets
       AS      A2      Current Assets
       AS      C1      Capital
       AS      C2      COST OF SALES
       AS      E1      Cost of Sales
       AS      E2      Admin Expenses
       AS      I1      Trade income
       AS      I2      Other Income
       AS      L1      Long Term Liabilities
       AS      L2      Current Liabilities
       AS      XX      ALL ACCOUNTS
       BL              LAST YEAR'S BUDGET




       F1 - SCAN FORWARDS, F10 - CO/BR, ESC - EXIT




Function keys are used to operate scanning. The scanning options available in a program
are always displayed on the status line at the bottom of the screen. The figure shows a
typical masterfile screen with scanning options.


KEY       FUNCTION         EXPLANATION
[F1]      Scan             Starts a scan (or search) of the masterfile in primary key
          forwards         sequence (bank number sequence etc)
[F2]      Scan             Returns to the previous screen of scan data.
          backwards
[F5]      Alternate        Starts a scan in alphabetic or alternate sequence.
          scan




SU - Getting Started                                 JULY 2006                          1 - 29
     UTILITIES - DESCRIPTIONS FILE MAINTENANCE                          SU31   11/001
     CO : 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED
     BR : 01 - CAPE TOWN
     DESCRIPTION TYPE            [AS]            AREA CODES
     DESCRIPTION CODE            [C2 ]
     CODE    DESCRIPTION
     C2 <-->COST OF SALES
     E1      Cost of sales
     E2      Admin expenses
     I1      Trade Income
     I2      Other Income
     L1      Long Term Liabilities
     L2      Current Liabilities
     XX      ALL ACCOUNTS
     *** NO MORE ITEMS ***




     F1 - SCAN DESCRIPTION CODES, F10 - TYPE




The figure shows a masterfile scan screen with a series of scan options displayed.

PARTIAL SCANNING
The scanning facility also allows partial scans of masterfile data. A partial scan starts from a
particular point onwards. Just enter the number or alphabetic character from which the scan
should start and press the function key applicable either [F1] or [F5].
To start a partial scan in an alphabetic or alternate sequence, enter the alternate or
alphabetic character from which the scan should start and press [F5].
Press [F2] to go back to a previous scan page.

INDIVIDUAL RECORD SCAN
To select the individual record required either enter the record number shown or using the
cursor keys, move the pointer <--> down to the number.
The cursor keys control both the up and down movement of the pointer. As the pointer is
moved up or down the screen, the record number is automatically pre-loaded into the field.
If [F1] is now pressed, the next page of masterfile data will be displayed, starting with the
record denoted by the pointer <-->.
To accept the record selected, press [Enter]. The record selected via the scan is now
displayed.
Once the scan has been selected, [F1] will enable further scanning through the masterfile.




1 - 30                               JULY 2006          Systems Utilities - User Guide
1.5.13.   STATUS MESSAGES
The programs display messages on the status line.
The first message that appears is "CHECKING FILES..." which is displayed as the program
loads and checks for their presence and integrity.
Programs that have a processing and updating cycle will display a message
"PROCESSING..." on the status line.
As the processing cycle continues the program will indicate activity by displaying the record
being processed beside the message, such as PROCESSING...01-01-1800. These
numbers will increment as processing proceeds.

 As long as this message is displayed DO NOT switch off the terminal or
 shutdown the computer system.
When processing is complete a message "END OF PROCESSING" will be displayed.

1.5.14.   ERROR MESSAGES
An error message is displayed by the system in the following conditions;
 Invalid data is entered, or
 a processing error occurs
The error message clearly states the error condition and is designed to assist recovery and
correction procedures, therefore, it is important to fully understand the message and its
cause, before input or processing is continued.

INPUT ERROR MESSAGE
These are less serious than processing error messages. They are displayed whenever
invalid data is present, for example "INVALID CUSTOMER #".
Press [Enter] to acknowledge the invalid input condition. The cursor is then returned to the
field in which the error occurred, for the correct data to be entered.

PROCESSING ERROR MESSAGES
If an error occurs in the processing cycle, an error message is displayed on the status line.

 Make a note of the error message, and report it immediately to the Dealer or
 Distributor.
All processing errors that may occur are automatically logged to the system log.
This file may be viewed or printed out using program SU62 - Logging Maintenance (refer
to the System Utilities User Guide).




SU - Getting Started                              JULY 2006                         1 - 31
1.5.15.      ELECTRONIC MAIL
Internally
You may send and receive electronic mail to and from other users if you are on a multi-user
or networked system.
The system will warn you via a pop-up box when you have a message waiting.
Any time a menu is displayed, press [F6], a screen such as the one shown below will
display.

     TITAN MAIL/MESSAGES SYSTEM                                            MAIN-MENU



     Log message from SYSADMIN
     MESSAGE DESTINATION          [ ]      1 - To Logging
                                           2 - To User
     [                                                                              ]

     For Attention :              [             ]
     DETAILS OK?                  [Y]




     F5 - VIEW OWN MAIL, ESC - EXIT




TO SEND MAIL
You may send mail to either a User or to the Logging system


MESSAGE DESTINATION                   :     1 digit
                                            [1] to send your message to the Logging system.
                                            [2] to send your message to a user.

MESSAGE                               :     78 characters
                                            Enter a message of up to 78 characters.

FOR ATTENTION                         :     8 characters
                                            Enter the user Name of the person to which you wish to
                                            send the message.
                                            If you selected to send the message to the Logging
                                            system, the system will enter ‘LOG’ in this field.
                                            Changing this will have no effect.




1 - 32                                    JULY 2006         Systems Utilities - User Guide
TO READ MAIL
If mail was sent to the Logging system, you may read this by using Option 4 - Messages in
program SU62 - Logging Maintenance
If mail was sent to your User Name, press [F6] on any menu to access the messaging
system and then [F5] to view your own mail. A screen as the one shown will display.

     TITAN MAIL/MESSAGES SYSTEM                                           MAIN-MENU

     Mail Messages for            SYSADMIN
     Originator                   SYSADMIN
     Message      001
     Dated        960514              AT             105447

     Sandra, please phone me when you find the time - 461-2398 - thanks




     F1 - NEXT , F5 - SEND MAIL, F7 - BEGIN, F8 - DELETE, ESC - EXIT




Press [F1] to see the next message, until you have read them all. Use the [F8] key as
normal if you wish to delete the details.
Press [Esc] to return to the menu.
Externally
All printed reports and documents may be routed to the outbox of an electronic mail system.
This is done by selecting ‘Option 5 – Mail recipient‘ for the Destination any time you select
printer options.
In addition, Invoices may be routed to a customer provide that customer has an e-mail
address entered in AR30 - Customer File Maintenance in the narrative code designated
for that purpose in AR00 - System Record Maintenance.
For windows you must copy MAPI32.DLL to the program (progs) directory. If the
environment variable MAIL_DIALOG is set to ‘Y’, then the generated e-mail will be displayed
in a dialog box before being sent to the outbox.




SU - Getting Started                                JULY 2006                         1 - 33
1.5.16.    PRINTING OPTIONS
You may select to route reports to 5 different destinations.
1. Report Management System (the Spooler - as controlled by SU60 - Report
   Management System).
2. Direct to the Printer (can be routed to one of 99 possible printers).
3. Direct to a file.
4. Direct to screen - Direct to screen writes the report to the Spooler, but immediately calls
   SU60 - Report Management System and automatically displays the report.
5. Mail Recipient – This option when selected opens a box where an email address, copy
   addresses and a subject may be entered.
The Report Management system enables, among other choices, the reports to be viewed on
the screen and to print the reports with a wide variety of options.
Please refer to SU60 - Report Management System for a detailed explanation of the report
management system.
If printing direct to the printer, up to 99 direct printers may be selected.
The system supplies a number of default setups for printers in SYSCAP. Refer to SU01 -
Terminal and Printer Setup for more details on setting up printers.
Dedicated printers may be connected to TITAN and a screen dump option enables you to
print the current screen direct to printer to obtain a hard copy.
The default print options assigned to a particular program are the defaults set up for that
program.
If no defaults have been set up for that program then the default print options for that
System are used.
If no system defaults exist, then the user's defaults are used.
If no user's defaults exist, then the installation defaults are used.
If no defaults whatsoever have been set up, then you will be prompted for the default print
options upon entering a program.
The default print destinations are obtained in the following priority;
1. Installation defaults - are set up in SU30 (option 1).
2. User defaults - are set up in SU38.
3. System defaults - are set up in SU30 (option 4).
4. Program defaults - are set up in SU30 (option 6).
5. User enters [F9] for PRINT OPTIONS from first screen of program.




1 - 34                                JULY 2006          Systems Utilities - User Guide
1.5.17.    CALCULATOR
TITAN includes a calculator on all numeric fields. This enables you to press a control
character (specified in your cblconfig file) when your cursor is positioned in any numeric
field.
You may then make any calculations you require, and optionally insert the result into the
numeric field.
For the calculator to be operative, add the following to your cblconfig file.
‘KEYSTROKE exception=41 key’, where ‘key’ is the key to access the calculator, for
example [CNTRL L].

1.5.18.    AUTO-CALL FACILITY
Please refer to SU30 - Installation Maintenance option 6 for more details regarding this
facility.
For the facility to be operative, add the following to your cblconfig file.
‘KEYSTROKE exception=45 key’, where ‘key’ is the key call the new program, for example
[CNTRL V].
If you wish to determine the name of specific fields, also create a similar entry for key 46.

1.5.19.    COPY AND PASTE
Titan allows you the normal COPY and paste features in the DOS environment. To use this
set up the keys as described below.
To copy and paste add two entries to your cblconfig file:
For copy add KEYSTROKE exception=42 CNTRL Y (^Y)
For paste add KEYSTROKE exception=43 CNTRL Z (^Z)
You may select other keys from ^Y and ^Z, but please beware of conflicts.
When your cursor is positioned on a field to be copied please do the following:
1. simply enter the ‘copy’ key
2. move your cursor to the new field
3. enter the ‘paste’ key.
The copy field will now be in the new field.




SU - Getting Started                                 JULY 2006                       1 - 35
1.5.20.     MULTI-LANGUAGE FEATURE
All screen prompts can be changed as follows:
A file SUSCRN is created automatically to hold the screen terminology. It is updated for each field
which does not already exist on file for all users and all programs.
Terminology may be changed per user per program, per user all programs, or all users per
program or all users per all programs.
THIS SHOULD ONLY BE DONE BY SUPPORT STAFF.
To change the terminology enter the following on the command line:
vutil -unload -t SUSCRN SUSCRN.ls
Now edit SUSCRN.ls:
The format of this file is:        username 8 chrs
                                   program 6 chrs
                                   fixed terminology 30 chrs
                                   user terminology 30 chrs.
PLEASE NOTE: If [or] is in the terminology it must remain on both sides.
To reload the data once the SUSCRN.ls file has been edited, enter the following on the command
line.
vutil -load -t -r SUSCRN.ls SUSCRN
Titan will now run with the new terminology.

 The CBLCONFIG entry ‘SUSCRN X’ will stop the creation of this file.

1.5.21.     USER DEFINABLE MENU BAR IN WINDOWS
The menu bar at the top of the screen in the Windows versions is user definable:
Add a config entry 'menu-bar' and a list of the items to appear there (uses default if blank)
options are:

 Not all can be used because of the length of the line - select those required most
 often
Options are:             Ok Up Down Left Right F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9
                         F10 Hot Help View Esc Calc Quick Copy Paste Home




1 - 36                                JULY 2006          Systems Utilities - User Guide
1.6.    LOADING THE SYSTEM

GENERAL
The installation procedure has been automated to ensure that installation proceeds quickly
and with a minimum of technical knowledge. The User Guides and computer media are
required for each system to be loaded. The media contains all the programs required to
load the systems and will be either;
   flexible disks or CD-ROM for MS-DOS and UNIX systems
       or
   a streaming tape cartridge for UNIX systems
Only MS-DOS and UNIX installation procedures are described in the System Utilities User
Guide. Installation procedures for other operating systems are available on request through
an official Distributor or Dealer.




SU - Getting Started                              JULY 2006                      1 - 37
1.6.1.    LOADING ON MS-DOS SYSTEMS

REQUIREMENTS
The latest version of ACU COBOL.
DOS 5.0 or later.
The following diskettes are needed;
  1.       Main Installation Diskette labelled INSTALL
           This contains the following files;
           TITAN.BAT
           INSTALL.BAT
           AB.BAT                  SA.BAT
           AR.BAT                  SP.BAT
           AP.BAT                  IV.BAT
           SU.BAT                  GL.BAT
           RW.BAT                  JC.BAT
           FA.BAT                  UT.BAT
           UT.BAT                  CW.BAT
           IS.BAT                  DU.BAT
           BM.BAT                  CB.BAT
           PO.BAT                  BL.BAT
           MP.BAT                  WP.BAT
           PS.BAT                  EI.BAT
           RUNCBL.EXE              SUMASACC
           CBLCONFIG               SUMASCBW
           CONFIG.SYS              SUMASPWD
           CONFIG.ADD              SYSCAP
           ANSI.SYS                FORMDEF
           FCODET                  PROGSYS
  2.       Systems Diskettes. One or more diskettes per system. Each diskette will
           contain the necessary programs for the relevant system.
  3.       Report Writer and Help files if applicable
  4        ACUCOBOL installation diskettes




1 - 38                             JULY 2006        Systems Utilities - User Guide
PROCEDURE
1. The existing CONFIG.SYS and ANSI.SYS must be renamed as CONFIG.SAV and
ANSI.SAV.

 The entries in CONFIG.ADD must be added to your CONFIG.SYS. In addition if
 there are other entries in the old CONFIG.SYS, for example device drivers or
 network parameters, these should be inserted in the new CONFIG.SYS.
2. Select the drive to be used for the program and data files. Insert the floppy labelled
`INSTALL' into drive A.
     Type in `A:INSTALL C:' and press [Enter]
     (or `A:INSTALL D:' for drive D: etc.)
4. A message notifying that the main installation is complete, will appear after a few minutes.
Select the floppy labelled `SU' and insert it into Drive A.
     Type in `SU' and press [Enter]
5. Wait for the completion message. Select another system to install, type in the system
prefix and press [Enter].
6. Repeat Step 5 - until all systems have been installed.
7. If Report Writer and Help files are to be installed, use the following DOS restore
command;
     vio -ivndf ‘device’ where ‘device is a: or b: followed by
     H for 1.2MB High-density 5.25”
     3 for 1.44MB High-density 3.5”
     9 for 720KB, 9-sector low density 3.5”
     8 for 320KB, 8-sector low density 5.25”
8. Re-boot the machine, enter TITAN and press [Enter].
9. Login as SYSADMIN.




SU - Getting Started                               JULY 2006                         1 - 39
ADDITIONAL INSTALLATION NOTES ON MS-DOS


    DOS FILE STRUCTURE FOR TITAN

    OTHER FILES        TITAN           OTHER DIRECTORIES

    DATA         BIN   SU      AP      AR       OTHER SYSTEMS
    FILES


Copy the following files from the ACUCOBOL installation diskettes to the TITAN\BIN
directory:
   runcbl.exe
   vutil.exe
   vio.exe




1 - 40                              JULY 2006      Systems Utilities - User Guide
1.6.2.       LOADING ON UNIX SYSTEMS

REQUIREMENTS
  1.     UNIX Runtime System
  2.     `tar' program
  3.     `root' password
  4.     One of the following terminals;
             Ansi (console)
             VT100
             WY50 WY60 etc. (See $a_termcap)
  5.     Media containing;
             Installation and other scripts/programs
             TITAN programs
             Core data files and/or




SU - Getting Started                              JULY 2006   1 - 41
PROCEDURE
  1.     Login as root.
  2.     Choose a TITAN account directory
         for example /usr/acct
         or other if required, such as /u/acct
  3.     Create this directory using the `mkdir' command, for example;
         mkdir /usr/acct
  4.     Change to the new account directory using the `cd' command, for example;
         cd /usr/acct
  5.     Insert the supplied media labelled `volume 1' into the floppy diskette drive or the
         tape drive as is applicable
  6.     Type in the load command for the UNIX/media combination, for example Xenix
         with floppy disks;
         If the media supplied is floppy diskette(s) 360kb
         tar xvf /dev/rfd048ds9 or tar 0vx
         If the media supplied is floppy diskette(s) 720kb
         tar xvf /dev/rfd096ds9 or tar 2xv
         If the media supplied is floppy diskette(s) 1.2mb
         tar xvf /dev/rfd096ds15
         For XENIX/UNIX with a streamer tape;
         If media is a tape(s) made on Xenix/Unix refer to /etc./default/tar for tape
         definitions.
         For example :
         tar xvf /dev/rct0
         or
         tar 6xv
  7.     Insert the next volume and repeat Step 6 - until all supplied media is exhausted.


 Sometimes programs are supplied on diskettes but in DOS format. In this case
 the tar command will not work and the supplied 'gutil' script in $bin should be
 used. However ensure that all program directories have been created and have
 the correct permissions, and copy the programs only after Step 8 has been
 completed.




1 - 42                              JULY 2006         Systems Utilities - User Guide
  8.   Type the following command;
       sh bin/install
  9.   The following Unix/Xenix files/scripts should also be loaded in $bin.
       titan
       setenv
       cblconfig
       a_termcap
       btitan
  These are machine dependent and may require modifications. They can be found in
  the distributed ACUDIST directory. Ensure that these are loaded in the '$acct/bin'
  directory.
  We recommend that ownership of 'runcbl' is `titan' and has the user id-bit on.

CHANGES TO CBLCONFIG

For the calculator add ‘KEYSTROKE exception=41 key’, where ‘key’ is the key to access
the calculator, for example [CNTRL L] (^L).
For the mouse use MOUSE 1, MOUSE-FLAGS 131
For Logging, use LOGGING 1 (or 0), 0 = OFF, 1 = ON (1 bing the default)
To cut and paste add two entries:
For cut add KEYSTROKE exception=42 CNTRL Y (^Y)
For paste add KEYSTROKE exception=43 CNTRL Z (^Z)
You may select other keys from ^Y and ^Z, but please beware of conflicts.
To specify a directory for printing files to disk

Include an entry: SU60-DIR name_of_directory

The name must include the FULL pathname, for instance /usr/spool/uucppublic/ or
C:\TITAN\TEMP\

 The file name of 8 characters is appended to this pathname so it MUST include
 the end slash.

Once the above files/scripts have been set up, you must load the client's licensed
ACUCOBOL disk or tape. You need only load the 'runcbl', 'vutil' and 'vio' programs from this
disk or tape into the above mentioned bin directories.

To use Vision version 3 file system (with data and indexes combined) V-version 3 otherwise
indexes are held in ?????.vix files. For example NLMAST (data), NLMAST.vix (index).




SU - Getting Started                                JULY 2006                      1 - 43
To export reports to external systems via SU60 - Report Management System, you need
to complete the following for each external system.
These TITAN-DEST parameters start at 6. Look at the example below:
TITAN-DEST6-NAME Word                    This contains an optional Name, here we used Word
TITAN-DEST6-"C:\Program Files\Microsoft Office\Office\WINWORD.EXE" This is the
command that executes the external package
TITAN-DEST6-SUFFIX .txt                This is optional and is the extension given to the temporary
print file. If this is omitted, the extension will be .prn
TITAN-DEST6-DELETE N                   If you retain the default as N (no) then the temporary
files will not be deleted on exiting the command. If you change this to Y, then the temporary
file will be deleted and you ill have to save the file in the normal manner if you wish to retain
this.




1 - 44                                JULY 2006          Systems Utilities - User Guide
1.6.3.    INSTALLING TITAN ON WINDOWS

  1      Load the ACU COBOL from the Program Manager using the Run command. On
         the command line enter a: setup
         This will copy wruncbl.exe, vutil.exe, vio.exe and so forth into TITAN\BIN
  2      Create an application TITAN
         From Program Manager select File...New and then place it in a selected group.
         Then select File...Properties and on the command line enter:
         c:\titan\bin\wrucncbl -12 -c c:\titan\bin\cblconfi -s -l -err.%LOGNAME% UT\UT00
         Then select File...Properties...Working directory and on the command line
         enter:
         c:\titan\progs
  3      Ensure that the cblconfi file has the following entries:
         # to point to programs and files
         CODE-PREFIX c:\titan\progs; UT SU AR AP GL .....etc.
         FILE-PREFIX c:\titan
         # to use the windows spooler
         PRINTER _P SPOOLER
         # to set the window size - starts with maximised screen
         SCREEN size=35,79 window=999,999
         #other areas to look at
         # to draw lines and boxes with 3D effect
         3D-LINES 1
         # to use the graphical font (default)
         FONT 1
         # to use a different icon when minimised
         ICON path of icon
         # to control whether the window should be able to be closed
         QUIT-MODE               -2 disable close (recommended)
                                 -1 close only on input (i.e. not if running a batch)
                                 0 Always close (very dangerous)
                                 >0 Program controlled
         # to control how hardware errors are handled
         WIN-ERROR-HANDLING 1 on use host (default)
                                 0 off send message to program
         # to change the window heading from UT00 to your own heading
         WINDOW-TITLE heading




SU - Getting Started                            JULY 2006                       1 - 45
1.7.     INSTALLING THE SYSTEMS UTILITIES MODULE

After installing the Systems Utilities as described enter "titan" to load the system.
The system logon is displayed and the prompt - User name - appears. Now enter
SYSADMIN.
This user name is termed a `Super-User' and will give access to all the programs with
special privileges.

 This "Super-User" name MUST BE PROTECTED by a password at a later stage to
 prevent unauthorized use of the user name.
If passwords have already been implemented for this "Super-User", the program will prompt
for entry of at least one password.
The program allows three attempts at a password input before returning to the operating
system.
Exit the system at this point by pressing [Esc].




1 - 46                               JULY 2006         Systems Utilities - User Guide
1.7.1.      THE MAIN MENU
After completing the system logon procedure the main system menu is displayed which
shows all the available systems in the suite.
To logon using a different user name, enter [A] to return to the initial system logon screen.
To quit the system, enter [Q]. The prompt "IS THIS THE LAST RUN OF THE DAY ?
[Y/N]" will appear.
Once the system is set up, entering Y (Yes) will first lead into the Report Management
Maintenance Program (See the Systems Utilities User Guide - Program SU61 - Report
Management Maintenance) and then into the logging procedure if this facility has been
enabled. Enter N (No) to return to the operating system prompt.

    All entries must be followed by pressing the enter key [Enter] as an
    acknowledgement to the system that the response is complete.

OTHER FACILITIES

    You may configure and define the options on the menu.
    You may optionally select to `hide' systems, modules or programs from the menu (SU30
     - Installation Maintenance Options 4 and 5).
    Use theand  keys to scan for the required program.
    The [F5] key disables the menu display.
    The [F6] key allows you view and send mail.
    The [F7] key will display your environment.
    The [F10] key is used to set the CO/BR and DATE default.




SU - Getting Started                               JULY 2006                        1 - 47
1.7.2.    THE UTILITIES SYSTEM MENU
To select this system from the main menu, enter SU. The following modules and programs
form part of the Systems Utilities system.

                            TITAN SYSTEMS UTILITIES MENU
                                 SU0 - SYSTEM SETUP
  SU00    CREATE SYSTEM FILES             SU01   TERMINAL AND PRINTER SETUP
                             SU1 - ON-LINE HELP MODULE
  SU10    LOAD SUPPLIED HELP (ASCII)      SU13   DELETE SUPPLIED OR USER HELP
  SU11    COPY SUPPLIED OR USER HELP SU14        RENAME HELP VARIABLE NAMES
  SU12    USER HELP LINK MAINTENANCE
                             SU3 - MAINTENANCE MODULE
  SU30    INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE        SU351 CUSTOMISED TERMINOLOGY
  SU31    DESCRIPTIONS FILE               SU36   CURRENCY FILE MAINTENANCE
          MAINTENANCE
  SU32    NUMBERS FILE MAINTENANCE        SU37   FORMULA MAINTENANCE
  SU33    NARRATIVE FILE MAINTENANCE SU38        SYSTEM PASSWORD MAINTENANCE
  SU35    CUSTOMISED FORM                 SU39   JOB PROCESSING
          MAINTENANCE
                            SU - MISCELLANEOUS MODULE
  SU40    MEMORY/SPEED OPTIMISATION SU44         CUSTOMISED FILE LAYOUT
                                                 MAINTENANCE
  SU41    REFERENCE FILE                  SU45   GENERAL CROSS REFERENCE
          MAINTENANCE                            MAINTENANCE
  SU42    COMMON CATEGORY INPUT/
          MAINTENANCE
                            SU5 - ENQUIRY/SCAN MODULE
  SU50    COMPANY FILE ENQUIRY            SU53   OBJECT VERSION ENQUIRY
  SU51    DESCRIPTIONS FILE SCAN          SU55   GENERAL CROSS REFERENCE
                                                 ENQUIRY
  SU52    NUMBERS FILE SCAN               SU58   SYSTEM PASSWORD ENQUIRY
                         SU6 - REPORT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
  SU60    REPORT MANAGEMENT               SU62   LOGGING MAINTENANCE
          SYSTEM
  SU61    REPORT MANAGEMENT
          MAINTENANCE
                                 SU7 - PRINT MODULE
  SU71    DESCRIPTIONS FILE PRINT
                               SU9 - OPERATING SYSTEM
  SU90    OPERATING SYSTEM UTILITIES


As you can see these modules are organised into functional groups, for example the
maintenance module (SU3) contains all the programs that are concerned with the
maintenance of the system.
The menu system has pre-loaded the SU mnemonic and all that is required is to enter the
relevant module number, for example [3] for the Maintenance module.
Enter [M] to select the main menu.




1 - 48                               JULY 2006     Systems Utilities - User Guide
                                                             2. SET-UP AND RUN

2.1.   THE SET-UP SEQUENCE
This section sets out the sequence of procedures that must be followed for setting up the
system.
Refer to the relevant section of this User Guide for detailed instructions on how to use the
programs listed in this set-up sequence.

 Should there be any difficulties during this set up procedure please contact the
 Dealer or Distributor immediately.


After installing the system, proceed with the following set up sequence;


 STEP        PROGRAM             FUNCTION AND PROCEDURE
 1.          SU30                The Installation Maintenance program must be run to
             Mandatory           install the Company Name, Systems and Branches.
                                 Authority to do this MUST be obtained from the Dealer.
                                 Three levels of installation must be performed.
                                 1 - System Installation - option 1.
                                 An installation number and authorisation code must be
                                 obtained from the Dealer before this can be done.
                                 2 - Company/Branch Installation - option 2 and 3.
                                 Authority codes for each company and branch must be
                                 obtained from the Dealer before this can be done.
                                 3 - System Installation - option 4.
                                 Authority codes are required for each system to be
                                 installed. These must be obtained from the Dealer.

 If an authority violation occurs or the system is not installed, you will be forced to run
 SU30 - Installation Maintenance and install the system.
 2.           SU01                SU01 - Terminal and Printer Setup program contains
              Mandatory           essential system parameters that are used by all systems
                                  in the suite. This program will be set up by the Dealer or
                                  Distributor.
                                  DO NOT attempt to use this program unless authorised,
                                  and trained in its use by the Dealer or Distributor.
 3.           SU31                The Descriptions File Maintenance program is used to
              Mandatory           set up the various descriptions required by the systems.
                                  Refer to the set-up sequences in the relevant User
                                  Guides.
 4.           SU32                The Numbers File Maintenance program sets up the
              Mandatory           various numeric sequences within the system. Refer to
                                  the set-up sequences in the relevant User Guides.




SU - Set-up and Run                               JULY 2006                         2- 49
 STEP      PROGRAM          FUNCTION AND PROCEDURE
 5.        SU33             The Narrative File Maintenance program is used to set
           Optional         up the various descriptions required by the systems. Refer
                            to the set-up sequences in the relevant User Guides.
 6.        SU35             The Customised Forms Maintenance program will set
           Optional         up and maintain the various forms used in the systems.

 7.        SU36             The Currency File Maintenance program is used to set
           Mandatory        up the various currencies and their descriptions and rates
                            of exchange. Refer to the set-up sequences in the
                            relevant User Guides. Mandatory in order to enter the
                            default currency.
 9.        SU37             The use of the Formula Maintenance program depends
           Optional         on which other applications you run and will be specified
                            in the individual user guides.
 9.        SU38             The Password Maintenance program is used to create
           Mandatory        and maintain user names and access permission for all
                            programs.

 The Systems Capabilities (SYSCAP) file is set up by SU01 - Terminal and Printer
 Setup and is created for the whole system.
 As the system is a multi-company and multi-branch system, the sequence of
 set-up procedures needs to be repeated for each company/branch on the
 system.




2 - 50                      JULY 2006                     System Utilities - User guide
2.2.    BACKUP
This section provides important advice on how to backup MS-DOS and UNIX based
systems. It is essential for the successful and secure operation of the system, to protect
valuable data from possible destruction, corruption and operational failures, and must be
regarded as mandatory.
Backup must be performed regularly and for systems with high transaction volumes every
four hours is recommended but never less than once per day. It is also essential to backup
before doing an interface or period-end run.
Backup not only covers the physical copying of data, but also the keeping of adequate
posting and backup records.
General documentation procedures that should be followed before entering any transaction
(or group of transactions), are;
   Complete a batch listing record. This will serve as a control to ensure that all batches of
    entries to be processed are in fact processed.
   After entering transactions, an audit trail will automatically be printed. Attach this printout
    to the original source documents, which should be completed in date order. File these
    printouts in the daily computer file.
   After each batch has been entered, each document in the batch must be stamped to
    indicate that it has been processed.
A suggested batch listing record layout could look like this;


    DATE         BATCH #           DOCUMENT #'S           BATCH TOTAL           SIGNATURE

    12/2/91      254               1347-2563              36874.36              A. MARTIN
    13/2/91      255               2564-4712              87862.01              N. BELL




SU - Set-up and Run                                  JULY 2006                          2- 51
2.2.1.      BACKUP DISKS/TAPES
All disks must be formatted prior to use. Backup disks or tapes to be used are;
DAILY DISKS/TAPES
At least three sets of disk/tapes are required for the daily backups. Label these sets as 1, 2,
3,
The first backup will be on the backup 1 set, the second and third time use the second and
third backup sets.
At the last backup, return to the backup 1 set. This procedure continues on a daily basis. It
means that there are always at least three levels of backup. Should anything go wrong with
the most recent backup set, there will always be at least two other levels of backup
disks/tapes to rely on.
These disks/tapes must be stored in a safe place (fireproof safe) each night. It is also
advisable to keep a copy off-site (bank or other place of safe-keeping).
Backing-up will often take up more than one disk. In this case each set of backup disks will
consist of several disks, each labelled accordingly. For example, if the backup set contains
three disks/tapes then they will be labelled as follows;
     Backup 1 disk/tape 1 of 3 (first disk/tape).....date
     Backup 1 disk/tape 2 of 3 (second disk/tape)....date
     Backup 1 disk/tape 3 of 3 (third disk/tape).....date
     etc.

INTERFACING DISKS/TAPES
Certain application systems interface to others. These interfaces may be run at the users
convenience. It is however essential to keep track of when these interfaces are performed.
Use a separate set of tapes/disks for interface backup. Label these disks/tapes "Before
Interfacing".
Keep this set of interfacing disks/tapes separate from the daily and monthly disks/tapes, and
use them to backup the system each time before doing an interface run (if the interface is
performed once a month, these same disks/tapes will be used once a month).




2 - 52                            JULY 2006                      System Utilities - User guide
MONTHLY DISKS/TAPES
At the end of every month, once all processing for that month is complete, prior to executing
the month-end run, a monthly backup must be taken. Label it accordingly (General Ledger
January month-end backup disk 1 of 3) which must be stored in a safe place for a complete
year.
This means that at the end of month 1 when performing the monthly backup the disks/tapes
are marked as end of Month 1 (January 31, 1991 month-end) disks/tapes. Store these
disks/tapes in a fireproof safe.
At the end of month 2, take another set of blank disks/tapes, do a monthly backup, and
mark these disks/tapes as end of month 2 (February 28, 1998 month-end) disks/tapes etc.




SU - Set-up and Run                              JULY 2006                        2- 53
2.2.2.    BACKUP - MS-DOS SYSTEMS
To backup, insert the next disk to be backed up (refer to the backup record to ensure that
the correct disk is used), into drive A. Close the drive.
Exit from TITAN.
Key in the command for backup as provided by your dealer or support person, or the menu
number corresponding to this function. The screen now displays the following;
     Insert backup diskette 01 in drive A;
     Warning! Diskette files will be erased
     Strike any key when ready
Follow the instructions on inserting the next disk(s) if applicable. Then remove the last disk
when the backup is complete and store in a safe place.

 CAUTION - Never remove the floppy disk until the red light near the disk drive is
 off. Always remember to write down the date, time, details and user's initials on
 the backup record when doing a backup.

2.2.3.    RESTORING FROM BACKUP - MS-DOS SYSTEMS
Should the data stored on the hard disk (internal disk) become corrupted, it is necessary to
restore the data by copying the data from the backup disk(s) to the hard disk.
This is done as follows;
Exit from TITAN.
Insert the most recent backup disk (that contains the information that must be restored), into
drive A.
Key in the command provided by the dealer or support person, or the menu number
corresponding to this function.
Follow the instructions displayed on the screen. Then remove the disk when the backup is
complete and store in a safe place.

 CAUTION - Never remove the floppy disk until the red light near the disk drive is
 off. Whatever work has been done since the most recent backup must be
 redone. Thus regular backup saves a lot of duplicate work should data need to
 be restored.




2 - 54                            JULY 2006                      System Utilities - User guide
DAILY BACKUP RECORD
A suggested daily backup record could look like this;


            BACKUP 1                     BACKUP 2                     BACKUP 3
  DATE &         DETAILS &      DATE &          DETAILS &      DATE &     DETAILS &
  TIME           INITIALS       TIME            INITIALS       TIME       INITIALS
  12/2/91        All files PB   13/02/91        All files NR   14/02/91   All files NR
  14.05                         14.30                          14.15




SU - Set-up and Run                              JULY 2006                    2- 55
2.2.4.     BACKUP - UNIX SYSTEMS
The system provides you with either automatic or manual backup facilities when using
computers operating under these systems.
To select manual backup, enter SU90 - Operating System Utilities and proceed according
to the instructions provided by the TITAN Dealer or Distributor.
The module provides an interface to the operating system and will present you with a
selection of commands.
This procedure should be used whenever backup is required during the course of the day or
when special circumstances demand, for example prior to a hardware upgrade or
engineering maintenance.
The available backup functions (set up in program SU01 - Terminal and Printer Setup -
Option 5) are prompted by the system.

2.2.5.     RESTORING - UNIX SYSTEMS
Should the data on the disk become corrupted, it will be necessary to do one of the
following;
1. Attempt to recover the corrupt files.
For details contact the Dealer or Distributor.
2. If the recover solution is unacceptable (failed recovery or only partial recovery with no
data integrity across files) then it will be necessary to restore from the latest backup.




2 - 56                            JULY 2006                      System Utilities - User guide
2.3.    CREATE SYSTEM FILES - SU00

SU00 - Create System Files enables you to create files for a particular system and verify
that the I/O modules are present and performing correctly. It also contains file utility
programs which provide such features as file compression and recovery.

       SYSTEM UTILITIES - CREATE SYSTEM FILES                               SU00   11/001
       SELECT FUNCTION            [1]           1 - Create System Files
                                                2 - Verify IO Modules
                                                3 - File Utility Programs




       ESC - EXIT




SU - Set-up and Run                                     JULY 2006                           2- 57
OPTION 1 - CREATE SYSTEM FILES.
This first option enables you to create files for one or more systems.
If selected the following prompt appears;
CREATE FILES FOR SYSTEM :             2 characters.
Press [F1] to scan the systems, [F5] to tag the selected systems, [F3] to initiate the creation
of files for the systems tagged. After pressing [F3] the files will be created for all the tagged
systems if they do not already exist. However, if they do exist, a message will be displayed
and you must press [Enter] for the program to continue.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - CREATE SYSTEM FILES                             SU00   11/001
     CREATE FILES FOR SYSTEM      [AP]
       SYSTEM    DESCRIPTION
         AB      APPLICATION BUILDER
     -> AP <--> ACCOUNTS PAYABLE
         AR      ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE
         BM      BILL OF MATERIALS
         CB      CASH BOOK
         CU      CONVERSION UTILITIES
         CV
         DU      DEALER UTILITIES
         ES      ESTIMATING
         FA      FIXED ASSETS
         GL      GENERAL LEDGER
         IS      INSTALMENT SALES
         IV      INVENTORY
         JC      JOB COSTING
         MP      MONTHLY PAYROLL
         OP      OPTIMISATION


     F1 - SCAN, F3 - UPDATE, F5 - FLAG, F10 - OPTIONS, ESC - EXIT




 Please ensure that newly created files have the correct operating system flags,
 and where relevant the correct ownership and group indicators.




2 - 58                             JULY 2006                        System Utilities - User guide
OPTION 2 - VERIFY I/O MODULES

INPUT/OUTPUT MODULES
Associated with each data file is a special I/O module. These reside in the UT program
directory. If an I/O module is deleted by accident, you will receive a 'COBOL ERROR 204' on
attempting to use these files. The names of the I/O modules correspond to those of the
TITAN files, for example DESCRIP, NLMAST and so forth.
You may verify the existence and validity of the I/O modules.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - CREATE SYSTEM FILES                             SU00   11/001
     FILE TO VERIFY              [SLMAST ]




     SLMAST   - VERIFIED   Press RETURN to continue...



FILE TO VERIFY                     :     8 characters.
                                         Enter the name of the file to be verified.


The system will output one of the following messages;
"I/O MODULE NOT AVAILABLE"
This indicates that the module either does not exist or that it is corrupt.
"FILE DOES NOT EXIST"
This will display if the I/O module exists but the associated data file does not.
"VERIFIED"
If both the data file and the I/O module exist, this is the message which will be displayed.




SU - Set-up and Run                                  JULY 2006                          2- 59
OPTION 3 - FILE UTILITY PROGRAMS
You may copy files or parts of files using File Utility Programs.
Enter option 3, and complete the following;

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - CREATE SYSTEM FILES                             SU00   11/001


     SELECT FILE TO RECOVER               [ABMAST                        ]
     RECOVER OPTION?                      [C]   C - Index to Index Copy
                                                B - Sequential <-> Index Copy
     DO YOU WISH TO CONTINUE?             [N]




     F10 - OPTIONS, ESC - EXIT



SELECT FILE
TO RECOVER                        :     29 characters.
                                        Enter the name of the file to be recovered.

RECOVER OPTION                    :     1 character.
                                        [C] lets you create a copy of some or all of the records
                                        in the selected index file. The resultant file is an index
                                        file. This option also allows you to compress excess
                                        data thus saving valuable disk space.
                                        [B] Enables you to load an index file from a binary
                                        sequential format or create a binary sequential file from
                                        an indexed format.

 Please note that ‘vutil’ allows you to create and restore binary line sequential
 files




2 - 60                            JULY 2006                         System Utilities - User guide
RECOVERY OPTION C - INDEX TO INDEX COPY
If option C - Index to Index Copy was selected the following screen will be displayed;

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - CREATE SYSTEM FILES                           XABMAST   11/011

     PROGRAM COPIES INDEX FILE ABMAST TO ABMAST.CPY
     MAXIMUM NO OF RECORDS TO COPY?       [9999999]
     START KEY                  [                                                  ]
     END KEY                    [                                                  ]
     MERGE THE TWO FILES?                 [N]
     DO YOU WISH TO CONTINUE?             [Y]




     F10 - NEXT FILE, ESC - EXIT



MAXIMUM NO OF
RECORDS TO COPY                    :    7 digits.
                                        The default is 99999999 and should normally be
                                        accepted.

START KEY                          :    50 characters.
                                        If the whole of the file is to be copied press [Enter], or
                                        contact the dealer or distributor for information on key
                                        structures.

END KEY                            :    50 characters.
                                        If the whole of the file is to be copied press [Enter], or
                                        contact the dealer or distributor for information on key
                                        structures.

MERGE THE TWO FILES?               :    Y/N
                                        [Y] enables you to join the data in two files with the
                                        same structure into one file. The data with the specified
                                        name is merged with a file with the same name but
                                        suffixed with `.CPY', which must already exist, creating
                                        a new merged file called `FILENAME.CPY'. Thus
                                        SLMAST will be merged with a file called
                                        SLMAST.CPY and the merged data will end up in
                                        SLMAST.CPY. If you do not wish to merge two files but
                                        merely do an Index to Index copy, a new file will also be
                                        created as `FILENAME.COPY'




SU - Set-up and Run                                   JULY 2006                          2- 61
DO YOU WISH
TO CONTINUE?                  :    Y/N
                                   [Y] will start the process.
                                   [N] will allow you to correct or re-enter data.


When the program comes to an end, you must remember to copy the .CPY file to the
normal filename.




2 - 62                        JULY 2006                       System Utilities - User guide
RECOVERY OPTION B - SEQUENTIAL TO/FROM INDEX COPY
If option B - Sequential to/from Index Copy was selected the following screen will be
displayed;

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - CREATE SYSTEM FILES                              XABMAST   11/011

     FILE CONVERT                  ABMAST
     DESTINATION OF COPY?          [1]        1 - Binary to Index
                                              2 - Index to Binary
     DO YOU WISH TO CONTINUE?      [Y]


     WARNING - HAVE YOU SAVED YOUR OLD FILE?




     F10 - NEXT FILE, ESC - EXIT



DESTINATION OF COPY                 :  Enter [1] to create an Index file from a binary sequential
                                       format.
                                       Enter [2] to create a binary sequential file from an
                                       indexed format.
When the file being read is an indexed file, the binary sequential file created by the program
is suffixed with `.BS", for example SLMAST.BS. When the input file is binary sequential, it
MUST be suffixed by `.BS' although you must specify the file name without the suffix.


DO YOU WISH
TO CONTINUE?                        :       Y/N
                                            [Y] will start the process.
                                            [N] will allow you to correct or re-enter data.

When the program comes to an end, you must remember to copy the files created to the
appropriate filenames.




SU - Set-up and Run                                     JULY 2006                             2- 63
2.4.     THE SYSTEM PARAMETER FILE - SU01
The system parameter file defines global environment - specific parameters that apply to all
the systems. This program will be set up by the Dealer or Distributor.

 DO NOT attempt to use this program unless trained and authorised in its use, by
 the Dealer or Distributor.
The information provided in this section is exclusively for those Dealers and user's trained in
its use. The program has three distinct functions for controlling terminals, printers, and
operating system commands.
Enter SU01 to load the program, the available options are displayed as follows;

SELECT FUNCTION                     :        [1] Set terminal capabilities.
                                             [2] Set terminal assignments.
                                             [3] Set printer capabilities.
                                             [4] Set printer assignments.
                                             [5] Set system commands.

       SYSTEM UTILITIES - TERMINAL AND PRINTER SETUP                            SU01   11/001
       SELECT FUNCTION             [1]   1    -   SET   TERMINAL CAPABILITIES
                                         2    -   SET   TERMINAL ASSIGNMENTS
                                         3    -   SET   PRINTER CAPABILITIES
                                         4    -   SET   PRINTER ASSIGNMENTS
                                         5    -   SET   SYSTEM COMMANDS




       ESC - EXIT




2 - 64                              JULY 2006                              System Utilities - User guide
[1] - SET TERMINAL CAPABILITIES
     SYSTEM UTILITIES - TERMINAL AND PRINTER SETUP                      SU01   11/001
     ENTER THE UNIQUE NAME FOR THIS TERMINAL TYPE:    [ANSI        ]
     ANSI            VIEWPOINT
     DG 461          VIEWPOINT80
     DUMB            VT100
     ESPRIT 925      VT52
     FREEDOM ONE     WYSE 50
     HP 2392A        WYSE 50-80
     HP-150          WYSE 60
     IBM 3161        WYSE 75
     ICL 6402        XYZ
     LINK 125
     NCR 4920
     PC-XT
     SIEM 97801
     TI 940
     TVI910


     F10 - OPTION MENU, ESC - EXIT




The "Set Terminal Capabilities" option allows you to specifically describe the characteristics
of any given terminal. The system is supplied with the descriptions of various terminal types
but additional terminals may be added if required. Press [Enter] to accept the default
selection or enter the following field;

ENTER THE UNIQUE NAME
FOR THIS TERMINAL TYPE               : 12 characters.
                                       Enter the name of the terminal or scan for available
                                       terminal types.
After entering or scanning for the terminal type, enter the fields displayed, by pressing the
appropriate key once as described on the next page.

 It is imperative that these are correctly set for the terminal in use. Ensure that the
 first key entered is the [Up arrow] key as this will be recognized as the future
 backtrack key.
It is essential to set the terminal parameters for all other keys except [Home], and the keys
for the Help, Hot and View functions. These are optional.
Press the other arrow and [Esc] keys (the terminal must have these to be usable).
To inhibit keys such as [Home], press the space bar twice in each field. This will insert [00]
into the relevant field. Doing this for other keys will result in an error message, since all other
keys are essential.




SU - Set-up and Run                                  JULY 2006                          2- 65
Enter the function key values (function keys 1 to 10).

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - TERMINAL AND PRINTER SETUP                        SU01   11/102

     SET TERMINAL PARAMETERS FOR THE PC-XT

     PRESS EACH KEY ONCE:         Up-Arrow       [52]         F1        [01]
                                  Down-Arrow     [53]         F2        [02]
                                  Left-Arrow     [50]         F3        [03]
                                  Right-Arrow    [51]         F4        [04]
                                  Home           [54]         F5        [05]
                                  Tab            [09]         F6        [06]
                                  Escape         [27]         F7        [07]
                                  Help           [23]         F8        [08]
                                  Hot Key        [24]         F9        [16]
                                  View Key       [22]         F10       [15]

     ENTER TERMINAL PARAMETERS:   Lines for Spooler Display   [24]
                                  Remap Function Keys         [N]
                                  Display Menu Bar Y/N        [Y]
                                  Screen saver after (Mins)   [15]
     F1 - NEXT, F3 - ACCEPT, F8 - DELETE, F10 - OPTION MENU, ESC - EXIT




 The keyboard must have 10 function keys for optimal use. Each one must be
 programmed to some value, or string of values, and these strings must match
 the values expected by the runtime.
On UNIX systems, the strings are set in either the termcap or terminfo files. To set these
strings for a particular terminal, consult the UNIX manuals.
Similar procedures should be followed for XENIX systems. The strings can be set to
anything required, as long as they are "sensible" and do not clash with existing values.
The standard sequences used are;
         F1    Control-A1
         F2    Control-A2
         F3    Control-A3
         F4    Control-A4
         F5    Control-A5
         F6    Control-A6
         F7    Control-A7
         F8    Control-A8
         F9    Control-P
         F10   Control-O
Now complete the next set of parameters;




2 - 66                             JULY 2006                         System Utilities - User guide
Level 1
ENTER TERMINAL PARAMETERS;

LINES FOR SPOOLER
DISPLAY                           :    2 digits.
                                       Used to specify the number of lines displayed on the
                                       screen in SU60 - Report Management System.

REMAP FUNCTION KEYS               :    Y/N
                                       If you enter [Y], you will be able to remap the 10
                                       function keys mentioned above.

DISPLAY MENU BAR                  :    Y/N
                                       If you enter [Y], a menu bar as shown below will be
                                       displayed on all your menu screens. You may use
                                       your mouse to point at each of the options or enter
                                       [Alt]+[Highlighted character]. For instance, if you wish
                                       to use the calculator, enter [Alt+C]. for [F1] you will
                                       enter [Alt+1], and so forth.

SCREEN SAVER AFTER                :    2 digits
                                       Enter the number of minutes after which you want your
                                       screen saver to start in. The default is 15 minutes.
                                       If you enter ‘99’ the screen saver facility will not be
                                       used.

Press [F1] to continue to the next level.


Level 2
The first prompt appearing on the screen is as follows;


ENTER ESCAPE
SEQUENCES TO                      :    16 characters.


Now enter the escape sequences (in hexadecimal) to set up screen capabilities.
These capabilities are optional. They are used to format all menus, and to display the
contents of files, as used in SU60 - Report Management System. These strings and values
all refer to screen capabilities.
The Switch Cursor Off/On strings are not currently used.
The Switch Display Off/On strings are used by the menus to blank the display while the
screen is being painted.
The Display High/Low Intensity strings are used by the menus.




SU - Set-up and Run                               JULY 2006                         2- 67
The Enter/Exit Graphics Mode strings are used only on those terminals which have a
separate graphics mode, such as VT100 emulations as opposed to those that do not, for
example PC-XT console.
The Enter 80/132 Column Mode strings are used by SU60 - Report Management System
when displaying the contents of a report. Both must be set for either to be recognised by
SU60 - Report Management System.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - TERMINAL AND PRINTER SETUP                     SU01   11/001
     ENTER ESCAPE SEQUENCES TO:   Switch Cursor Off         [0000000000000000]
                                  Switch Cursor On          [0000000000000000]
                                  Switch Display Off        [0000000000000000]
                                  Switch Display On         [0000000000000000]
                                  Display High Intensity    [1B5B30741B5B316D]
                                  Display Low Intensity     [1B5B306D00000000]
                                  Enter Graphics Mode       [1B28301B29300000]
                                  Exit Graphics Mode        [1B28421B29420000]
                                  Enter 80-Column Mode      [1B5B3F336C000000]
                                  Enter 132-Column Mode     [0000000000000000]
                                  Switch Aux Port On        [1B5B3F3368000000]
                                  Switch Aux Port Off       [0000000000000000]
     ENTER HEXADECIMAL VALUES FOR EACH OF THESE GRAPHICS CHARACTERS:
            Upper-Left Corner     [6C]            Normal   'T'       [77]
            Upper-Right Corner    [6B]            Left     'T'       [74]
            Lower-Left Corner     [6D]            Right    'T'       [75]
            Lower-Right Corner    [6A]            Inverted 'T'       [76]
            Single Hor. Line      [71]            Double Hor. Line   [71]
            Single Vert. Line     [78]            Solid Block        [61]
     F2 - PREVIOUS, F3 - SAVE, F8 - DELETE, F10 - OPTION MENU, ESC - EXIT




The next prompt is;


ENTER HEXADECIMAL VALUES
FOR EACH OF THESE
GRAPHICS CHARACTERS    :                2 digits.

The graphics characters are used by the menus for formatting the boarders, and the TITAN
logo on the logon screen. Set unused characters to spare (20 Hex).
Set unused escape sequences to all zeros. (0000000000000000).




2 - 68                            JULY 2006                        System Utilities - User guide
[2] - SET TERMINAL ASSIGNMENTS
The "Set Terminal Assignments" option provides a mapping between an externally supplied
terminal number and a given terminal type. Thirty-two different assignments can be made,
allowing up to thirty-two different terminal types to run the system at any given time.
This means that up to 32 different terminal types may coexist on a system at one time. If
more than one terminal is of the same type, then a correspondingly higher number can be
handled by the system. In practice, the number of terminals will not depend on SU01 -
Terminal and Printer Setup, but on a combination of the operating system and computer
the system is running on. The figure will therefore vary from 1 to over 100.
Enter [2] to select this option.
The following displays;


ASSIGN TERMINAL TYPES
TO TERMINAL NUMBERS                    :   12 characters.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - TERMINAL AND PRINTER SETUP                     SU01     11/102
     ASSIGN TERMINAL TYPES TO TERMINAL NUMBERS:
         NUMBER           TYPE                       NUMBER        TYPE
           00       [PC-XT         ]                   16     [ESPRIT 925   ]
           01       [WYSE 50       ]                   17     [HP 2392A     ]
           02       [WYSE 75       ]                   18     [DG 461       ]
           03       [VT100         ]                   19     [NCR 4920     ]
           04       [HP-150        ]                   20     [             ]
           05       [ANSI          ]                   21     [             ]
           06       [VIEWPOINT     ]                   22     [             ]
           07       [TVI910        ]                   23     [             ]
           08       [FREEDOM ONE   ]                   24     [             ]
           09       [IBM 3161      ]                   25     [             ]
           10       [WYSE 60       ]                   26     [             ]
           11       [VT52          ]                   27     [             ]
           12       [ICL 6402      ]                   28     [             ]
           13       [SIEM 97801    ]                   29     [             ]
           14       [LINK 125      ]                   30     [             ]
           15       [TI 940        ]                   31     [DUMB         ]
     F3 - ACCEPT, F4 - COPY PREVIOUS FIELD, F10 - OPTION MENU, ESC - EXIT




The terminal type selected for a given terminal number must have already been defined
(see set terminal capabilities). The terminal number, the type is assigned to, will be the
terminal number the system is called with (see adding a new terminal type to the system). A
given terminal type may be assigned to more than one terminal number.
If you press [F4] a time saving copy facility exists which repeats the field above and allows
you to make a minor alteration.

 The assignment number must correspond to the switch settings associated with
 each terminal in the 'titan' script. See "ADDING NEW TERMINAL TYPE" at the end
 of this section.




SU - Set-up and Run                                  JULY 2006                           2- 69
[3] - SET PRINTER CAPABILITIES
The "Set Printer Capabilities" option allows the characteristics of any given printer to be
specifically designed for that printer.
The system is supplied with various printer types already described.
Enter [3], to select this option.

ENTER THE UNIQUE NAME
FOR THIS PRINTER TYPE                 :   12 characters.
                                          Enter the unique name for this printer or scan to find a
                                          printer already on file.

      SYSTEM UTILITIES - TERMINAL AND PRINTER SETUP                     SU01   11/001
      ENTER THE UNIQUE NAME FOR THIS PRINTER TYPE:     [C-310/15X 8"]
      C-310/15X 8"    OKI 294S 11"
      CI 300          OKI 294S 12"
      CI-3500         OKI 294S 8.5
      DUMMY           OKI 93
      FX-100+         SPG-8010
      LASER           SPG-8020
      M-1550          SPG-8050
      MT 85/86 11"    SPG-8070
      MT 85/86 8"     TI 810
      NEC P5          TI 810LQ
      OKI 182S 11"
      OKI 182S 8"
      OKI 192+
      OKI 193
      OKI 193 I
      F10 - OPTION MENU, ESC - EXIT




The escape sequences for various functions are displayed in hexadecimal format. The
correct escape sequence can be determined from the manual for the printer type being set
up.
While entering hexadecimal values, only the characters "0" to "9", "A" to "F" and "a" to "f"
are accepted. If any other characters are entered on the line, an error message will be
displayed.
Fill the rest of the escape sequence field with zeros. This pads the field with zeros which will
be ignored by the printers.
If an escape sequence for a given function is not available, then enter all zeros on the line.
This will inform the system that this particular function is not available.




2 - 70                                JULY 2006                     System Utilities - User guide
This function will not then be offered by the print programs at the time of setting the print
mode, font or density.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - TERMINAL AND PRINTER SETUP                      SU01   11/002

     SET PRINTER PARAMETERS FOR THE C-310/15X 8"

     ENTER ESCAPE SEQUENCES TO:
     Set Compressed Print         [1B0F000000000000]
     ....Compressed cont.         [0000000000000000]
     Set Standard   Print         [1200000000000000]
     Set Expanded   Print         [0000000000000000]
     Set Letter-Quality Font      [1B78010000000000]
     Set Draft-Quality Font       [1B78000000000000]
     Set 6 Lines / Inch           [1B321B4330000000]
     Set 8 Lines / Inch           [1B301B4340000000]
     Set Job Control e.g. Reset   [0000000000000000]
     ....Job control cont.        [0000000000000000]




     F1-NEXT, F3-ACCEPT, F8-DELETE, F10-OPTIONS, ESC-EXIT




 A number of printers specify page length in terms of the number of lines which in
 turn depends on the number of lines per inch.
 1. Use the printer name to indicate page length e.g. OKI2945 11".
 2. Specify the SET 6 lines/inch to include the escape sequences for 6 lines/inch
 and the escape sequence to specify the number of lines/page.
 3. Repeat (2) for SET 8 lines/inch.
Press [F1] to display the next screen.


ENTER FONT ESCAPE
SEQUENCES FOR                     :      32 characters
                                         This allows you to enter hexadecimal escape
                                         sequences for different fonts for each of your printers.
                                         You will find these escape sequences in your printer
                                         manual.




SU - Set-up and Run                                    JULY 2006                        2- 71
You may enter these sequences here, as shown below, or else you may enter up to six
different font types and descriptions in SU31 Description File maintenance, type ‘FN’. If
you do that, you need only enter the 4 character font code and the hexadecimal characters
will be read from the DESCRIP file and displayed here.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - TERMINAL AND PRINTER SETUP                   SU01   11/002

     SET PRINTER PARAMETERS FOR THE OKI 520 IBM

     ENTER FONT ESCAPE SEQUENCES FOR:
     01   [   ]   [1B104108313030353130303000000000]
     02   [   ]   [1B104108313030363130303000000000]
     03   [   ]   [00000000000000000000000000000000]
     04   [   ]   [00000000000000000000000000000000]
     05   [   ]   [00000000000000000000000000000000]
     06   [   ]   [00000000000000000000000000000000]




     F2 - PREVIOUS, F3 - SAVE, F8 - DELETE, F10 - OPTION MENU, ESC - EXIT




These fonts may be used in both RW30 - Report Maintenance and SU35 - Customised
Form Maintenance. It allows you to print report and document lines in different fonts.
Please refer to the relevant user guides for more information regarding this feature.
If you print one of these reports or forms from SU60 - Report Management System, you
may change the printer and the system will ensure that the correct fonts are used by reading
the details from this record.




2 - 72                            JULY 2006                        System Utilities - User guide
[4] - SET PRINTER ASSIGNMENTS
The "Set Printer Assignments" option allows not only up to 3 different printers to be specified
but additional parameters, such as the default mode, font and print density for that printer.
Enter the printer number to be set up. The system allows up to 99 different printers on the
system at the same time, but the operating system may only allow one. Always use printer 1
if in doubt.

SET UP PARAMETERS
FOR PRINTER                       :        2 digits.
                                           Enter the printer number for which parameters are to
                                           be specified.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - TERMINAL AND PRINTER SETUP                            SU01   11/001
     SET UP PARAMETERS FOR PRINTER:     [01]    PRINTER TYPE:      [OKI 294S 11"]
                                                PRINTER SYNONYM:       [PRINTER ]
     DESCRIPTION: [Our very first prt     ]
     ENTER THE PARAMETERS:                      ENTER THE SYSTEM DEFAULTS:
     Skip Pages Before Print     [0]            Print Mode        [C] Compressed
     Skip Pages After Print      [1]                                   Standard
     Skip Lines at Top of Page  [00]                                   Expanded
     Skip Lines at End of Page  [00]
     Lines/Page                 [66]            Print Font         [D]   Draft Quality
     Characters/Line           [132]                                     Letter Quality
                                                Print Density      [6]   6 Lines/Inch
                                                                         8 Lines/Inch
     Is this a Dedicated Printer?        [N]
     Should a Banner Page Be Printed?    [N]
     Enable this printer?                [Y]
     Printer Form?                       [ALL    ]


     F3 - ACCEPT, F8 - DELETE, F10 - OPTION MENU, ESC - EXIT




Set the relevant parameters;

PRINTER TYPE                      :        12 characters.
                                           This is the unique name for the printer in use, and must
                                           already have been defined under "Set Printer
                                           Capabilities".




SU - Set-up and Run                                     JULY 2006                             2- 73
     SYSTEM UTILITIES - TERMINAL AND PRINTER SETUP                           SU01   11/001
     SET UP PARAMETERS FOR PRINTER:   [01]     PRINTER TYPE:      [OKI 294S 11"]
                                               PRINTER SYNONYM:       [PRINTER ]
     DESCRIPTION: [Our very first prt   ]
     ENTER THE PARAMETERS:                     ENTER THE SYSTEM DEFAULTS:
     Skip Pages Before Print     [0]           Print Mode        [C] Compressed
     Skip Pages After Print      [1]                                  Standard
     Skip Lines at Top of Page  [00]                                  Expanded
     Skip Lines at End of Page  [00]
     Lines/Page                 [66]           Print Font         [D]   Draft Quality
     Characters/Line           [132]                                    Letter Quality
                                               Print Density      [6]   6 Lines/Inch
                                                                        8 Lines/Inch
     Is this a Dedicated Printer?       [N]
     Should a Banner Page Be Printed?   [N]
     Enable this printer?               [Y]
     Printer Form?                      [ALL    ]
     F3 - ACCEPT, F8 - DELETE, F10 - OPTION MENU, ESC - EXIT



PRINTER SYNONYM                   :      8 characters.
                                         The Cobol runtime is supplied with one or more
                                         "synonyms" which tell it where to send the print output
                                         to. The field on this screen must have a name which
                                         matches one of these synonyms.
                                         All runtimes should recognise the synonym
                                         "PRINTER". However, if the installation has more than
                                         one printer and the synonym "PRINTER" is used giving
                                         file errors when printing from SU60 - Report
                                         Management System, please contact the Dealer or
                                         Distributor.

DESCRIPTION                       :      20 characters.
                                         Enter the description for this printer, such as `SYSTEM
                                         PRINTER' or `Remittance Adv.'.


Now enter the following printer parameters;

SKIP PAGES
BEFORE PRINT                      :      1 digit.
                                         Zero or non-zero
                                         When using SU60 - Report Management System,
                                         and a report is printed, a zero in this field will have no
                                         effect on paging, and printing will commence
                                         immediately. If the field is non-zero, a top-of-form will
                                         be performed before printing commences.




2 - 74                            JULY 2006                             System Utilities - User guide
SKIP PAGES AFTER PRINT           :     1 digit.
                                       Zero or non-zero
                                       When using SU60 - Report Management System,
                                       and a report is printed, a zero in this field will have no
                                       effect on paging, and printing will commence
                                       immediately. If the field is non-zero, a top-of-form will
                                       be performed before printing commences.
SKIP LINES
AT TOP OF PAGE                   :     2 digits
                                       This field is not used.

SKIP LINES
AT END OF PAGE                   :     2 digits
                                       Enter the number of lines you wish to skip at the end of
                                       every page.

LINES/PAGE                       :     2 digits
                                       Enter the number of lines per page that your printer is
                                       set for.

 The number of lines printed on reports is calculated as Lines per Page - Skip
 lines at end of page - 2.

CHARACTERS/LINE                  :     3 digits
                                       Enter the number of characters your printer can print
                                       per line.


The next fields to be entered are the system default fields, which will be used by the print
programs unless the values are deliberately changed.

 Only those options for which there are non-null entries (see "Set Printer
 Capabilities") will be offered here.

PRINT MODE                       :     C/S/E
                                       C - Compressed mode
                                       S - Standard mode
                                       E - Expanded mode

PRINT FONT                       :     D/L
                                       D - Draft Quality
                                       L - Letter Quality

PRINT DENSITY                    :     6/8
                                       6 - 6 Lines per inch
                                       8 - 8 Lines per inch




SU - Set-up and Run                                JULY 2006                          2- 75
IS THIS A
DEDICATED PRINTER?              :     Y/N
                                      Enter a [Y] if the printer is to be dedicated to a specific
                                      terminal port.
The device directory must also be entered in SU30 - Installation Maintenance option 1.
The printer synonym must be the name of the device (port) to which the relevant terminal
(and thus the printer) is attached.
For example,         device directory "/dev/"
                     printer synonym "ttyla"
also the dedicated printer must NOT be a defined XENIX/UNIX printer (it should not appear
when using the lpstat command.
To find the correct printer synonym, use your hot key to get to the operating system and
then enter 'who am i'.
See "ADDING NEW PRINTER TYPE" at the end of this section.

SHOULD A BANNER
PAGE BE PRINTED?                :     Y/N.
                                      If [N] then no banner is printed. If [Y] then enter the
                                      name of a text file, in the directory, which is to be
                                      printed.

 The order of printing in SU60 - Report Management System is; skip page before
 banner printing and skip page after printing. The banner is only printed by SU60 -
 Report Management System.
If the banner file is given as "USERNAME" then the banner file printed will have the same
name as the users' login name (if logged in as "SYSADMIN" then the file "SYSADMIN" will
be printed).

ENABLE THIS PRINTER ?           :     Y/N.
                                      If [N] then no printing can be done on this printer. A
                                      message will be displayed when attempting to do so.

PRINTER FORM ?                  :     6 characters.
                                      If this printer is to be used exclusively for the printing of
                                      a specific form such as invoices or statements, enter
                                      the form type here. Refer to program SU35 -
                                      Customised Form Maintenance in the maintenance
                                      section of this User Guide for a list of all form types. If
                                      the printer is for general use, enter ALL.




2 - 76                          JULY 2006                        System Utilities - User guide
[5] - SET SYSTEM COMMANDS
The "Set System Commands" option interfaces to the external operating system commands
which may be used when backing up data files to disk, flexible disks or to streaming tape to
be specified. These commands may be used to call any operating scripts or commands
such as backup/restore commands.
If you use the Point-of-Sale features in the Sales Order Processing System, you will also
enter the command to open your cash drawer here.
You may enter up to 15 commands. These commands will then be available on a menu in
SU90 - Operating System Utilities.
Enter the commands into the two separate command-line strings; one for floppy disk, and
the other for entering tape commands. The program which actually uses these strings is
SU90 - Operating System Utilities.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - TERMINAL AND PRINTER SETUP                 SU01   11/001
     SET UP COMMAND-LINE STRINGS:
     COMMAND DESCRIPTION NO 04
       [Send a Message                                                    ]
     COMMAND LINE STRING NO 04
       [sendmsg                       ]
     The Command Line is Operating-System Dependent




     F3 - ACCEPT, F10 - OPTION MENU, ESC - EXIT




Enter these strings either as the actual commands to be executed, for example
     cpio -ovb "*" > /dev/rtp
or as the name of a shell-script or job-control file holding the actual command. The second
method is recommended as proper checks can be made to ensure the backup proceeds
smoothly and correctly.
If you wish to go to the Unix command level enter sh as your string and for the DOS
command level, enter command.com




SU - Set-up and Run                                   JULY 2006                    2- 77
ADDING A NEW TERMINAL TYPE
Proceed as follows for UNIX systems;
  STEP         ACTION
  1.           Have the terminal User or Technical manual available.
  2.           Physically attach the terminal to a terminal port on the computer. Set the
               terminal up so that it functions normally as a terminal using the editor etc.
               Set up a termcap file for it, decide on function key string values, etc.
  3.           Edit the "titan" shell script file in the titan directory, study the script and
               become familiar with its basic operation. The actual command to run the
               system is;
                       runcbl UT00 -k -s 00000001
                       where....
                       runcbl         =        Cobol Runtime
                       UT00           =        Menu program/Driver
                       -k             =        Status Information Suppression
                       -s             =        Switch Settings Follow
                       00000001       =        Switch Settings
               The left-hand digit is bit 8
               The right-hand digit is bit 1
               Bit 8 has this function:
                       0              Force automatic file backup on a daily basis
                       1              Do not force automatic backup
               Bits 6 and 7 have the function:
                       00             single directory system - DOS version
                       01             multi-directory UNIX
                       10             multi-directory DOS
               Bits 0 to 5 together form a Binary Terminal Number, such that
                       Terminal Number = 16* Bit 5 + 8* Bit 4 + 4* Bit 3 + 2* Bit 2 + Bit 1
               where Bits 1 to 5 are either "0" or "1", for example;
                       00000 PC XT console
                       00001 Wy50
                       00010 Wy75
                       00011 Vt100 etc.
               Hence Wy50 on a UNIX multi-directory system with no forced backup,
               gives a setting of 10100001.
  4.           Choose an unused terminal number.
               If in doubt, use 30 (00011110) or perform steps 5,6,7,8,9,10 and 11 to see
               which terminal numbers are available, and to define the terminal type, and
               then return to step 4 again.
               Add an entry for this terminal number, using the termcap name and
               corresponding switch setting for this terminal, into the `titan' shell script.
  5.           Run the system and the message "TERMINAL - TYPE - NOT FOUND"
               will be displayed. If this happens follow the procedure for setting up a new
               terminal type
  Program SU01 - Terminal and Printer Setup will be run automatically. Now be careful
  and precise;
  6.           Press 1 to set terminal capabilities.



2 - 78                           JULY 2006                      System Utilities - User guide
  STEP       ACTION
  7.         DO NOT PRESS ANY FUNCTION KEYS.
             Enter a unique name for this terminal Press [Enter].
             The message "NO SPECIFICATION FOR THIS TERMINAL EXISTS" will be
             displayed. Enter [2] to create a new specification.
  8.         Carefully press each indicated key once.
  9.         Using the terminal manual as a guide, enter escape sequences and
             graphics character values for as many functions as the terminal supports.
             If the terminal does not support graphics characters, leave the "Enter/Exit
             Graphics Mode" strings as all zeros, and enter ordinary printable character
             values as graphics characters (could be used as the "Solid Block"). Press
             [F3] to update.
  10.        Press "2 - Set Terminal Assignments". Place the cursor at the start of the
             field next to the terminal number selected in step 4. Enter the terminal name
             selected in step 7. Press [F3] to update.
  11.        Press [Esc] to exit. Again the message "TERMINAL-TYPE - NOT
             FOUND" is displayed.
             Enter [E] to exit and return to the operating system.
  12.        Run the system again. Press [Enter].
             The system may or may not force a backup, depending on whether Bit 8 of
             the switch settings is set or not (see step 3) and when the system was last
             backed up. If necessary, perform backup.




SU - Set-up and Run                            JULY 2006                        2- 79
ADDING A NEW PRINTER TYPE.
Proceed as follows for UNIX & Xenix systems;


  STEP      ACTION
  1.        Have the printer User or Technical manual available.
  2.        Physically attach the printer to the logical printer port "1", "2" or "3" of the
            computer. Set the printer up so that it prints an ordinary text file from the
            operating system's command line.
  3.        Run the system and select SU01 - Terminal and Printer Setup. Select Option
            [3] - Set Printer Capabilities. Enter a unique name for this printer type.
  4.        Using the manual as a guide, enter the escape sequence strings (in
            hexadecimal) for each of the printer functions listed on the screen. If the printer
            does not support a particular function, leave the field filled with zeros. Press
            [F3] to update.
  5.        Select Option [4] - Set Printer Assignments. Enter the logical printer number
            selected in step 2.
            Enter the same printer name as that entered in step 3. Select the default mode,
            font and density, as appropriate for this printer. Press [F3] to update. Press
            [Esc] to exit.
  6.        Using a print program, check that each of the mode, font and density options
            set in step 4 actually works for this printer.


 RECOMMENDATION - Assign the highest speed system printer as "PRINTER 1",
 reserving "PRINTER 2" and "PRINTER 3" for special printing devices (letter
 quality, laser and plotters etc.)




2 - 80                          JULY 2006                      System Utilities - User guide
2.5.    OPERATING SYSTEM UTILITIES - SU90
This program gives access to the operating system. It should be password protected and the
various operating system commands are set up in SU01 - Terminal and Printer Setup.

       SYSTEM UTILITIES - OPERATING SYSTEM UTILITIES                           SU90   11/001


       SELECT OPTION   [00]    1   -   BACKUP DATA FILES
                               2   -   RESTORE DATA FILES
                               3   -   Send a Message
                               4   -   Clear a Message
                               5   -   Display Process Status
                               6   -   Show Compile Queue
                               7   -   Display Compile Log
                               8   -   Use Unix Editor Vo
                               9   -   Submit a Compile
                              10   -   Cancel Current or Next Print on Printer
                              11   -   informix - client data base
                              12   -   examine/alter data file performance strategy
                              13   -   RECOVER DATA FILES
                              14   -   Unix Command Level


       ESC - EXIT



SELECT OPTION                             :     [00]
                                                1 - 15 available for use.

Press [Esc] to exit.




SU - Set-up and Run                                         JULY 2006                          2- 81
                                                  3. ON-LINE HELP MODULE

3.1.     THE ON-LINE HELP MODULE MENU
This module consists of the following programs;
 SU10 - LOAD SUPPLIED HELP (ASCII)
 SU11 - COPY SUPPLIED OR USER HELP
 SU12 - USER HELP LINK MAINTENANCE
 SU13 - DELETE SUPPLIED OR USER HELP
 SU14 - RENAME HELP VARIABLE NAMES
These programs enquire into and allow the System Utilities data to be viewed.
Enter SU1 to display the menu.
Enter SU to return to the System Utilities menu or M, to return to the main menu.




3 - 82                             JULY 2006                Systems Utilities - User Guide
3.2.    LOAD SUPPLIED HELP (ASCII) - SU10
This program is used by the distributor to load the ASCII versions of the User Guides into
the system in order to provide on-line Help facilities.
Enter SU10 to select the program.
Level 1

       SYSTEM UTILITIES - LOAD SUPPLIED HELP (ASCII)                          SU10    11/001

       SYSTEM TO LOAD [AB]
       SYSTEM     HELP SYSTEM NAME       HELP STATUS        DATE     TIME     PAGES   INDEX
       AB    <--> APPLICATION BUILDER    LOADED             890901   082758   0173    0167
       AP         ACCOUNTS PAYABLE       LOADED             890707   121735   0215    0205
       AR         ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE    LOADED             890706   175026   0215    0205
       ES         ESTIMATING             LOADED             891127   121654   0126    0123
       FA         FIXED ASSETS           LOADED             891129   114758   0110    0108
       GL         GENERAL LEDGER         LOADED             891128   173159   0201    0173
       IV         INVENTORY              LOADED             891211   145649   0198    0191
       PO         PURCHASE ORDERS        LOADED             890707   123540   0201    0191
       RW         REPORT WRITER          LOADED             891207   153948   0126    0123
       SP         SALES ORDER PROCESSI   LOADED             891129   102925   0169    0165
       SU         SYSTEMS UTILITIES      LOADED             891201   154114   0208    0203
       UT         SYSTEM OVERVIEW        LOADED             890713   123926   0053    0050



       *** NO MORE ITEMS ***
       F1 - SCAN FORWARD, F3 - LOAD, ESC - EXIT



SYSTEM TO LOAD                      :       2 characters.
                                            Enter the 2 characters representing the system to be
                                            loaded. For example `AB' for Application Builder and
                                            `AP' for Accounts Payable.


The system will automatically append `.HLP' to the 2 characters entered and will attempt to
open the ASCII file, for example `AB.HLP'.




SU - Online Help                                  JULY 2006                                    3 - 83
     SYSTEM UTILITIES - LOAD SUPPLIED HELP (ASCII)                          SU10    11/001
     SYSTEM TO LOAD [AP]
     SYSTEM     HELP SYSTEM NAME       HELP STATUS        DATE     TIME     PAGES   INDEX
     AB         APPLICATION BUILDER    LOADED             890901   082758   0173    0167
     AP    <--> ACCOUNTS PAYABLE       LOADED             890707   121735   0215    0205
     AR         ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE    LOADED             890706   175026   0215    0205
     ES         ESTIMATING             LOADED             891127   121654   0126    0123
     FA         FIXED ASSETS           LOADED             891129   114758   0110    0108
     GL         GENERAL LEDGER         LOADED             891128   173159   0201    0173
     IV         INVENTORY              LOADED             891211   145649   0198    0191
     PO         PURCHASE ORDERS        LOADED             890707   123540   0201    0191
     RW         REPORT WRITER          LOADED             891207   153948   0126    0123
     SP         SALES ORDER PROCESSI   LOADED             891129   102925   0169    0165
     SU         SYSTEMS UTILITIES      LOADED             891201   154114   0208    0203
     UT         SYSTEM OVERVIEW        LOADED             890713   123926   0053    0050
     NOTE:
     All current supplied help will be deleted before the new help will be loaded.
     OK TO CONTINUE? (Y/N) [N]

     F3 - LOAD, ESC - EXIT



HELP SYSTEM NAME                  :       2 characters.
                                          You are prompted for a Help system name. If this is the
                                          same as the combination of the system name and
                                          `.HLP', (for example AR.HLP) then press [Enter],
                                          otherwise enter the name of the appropriate ASCII file.


If no such file is found an appropriate message will display. Before the new Help is loaded,
a message 'All current supplied Help will be deleted before the new Help will be
loaded' is displayed. This only applies to the CURRENT system being loaded, all other
systems will remain unchanged.

OK TO CONTINUE? (Y/N)             :       Y/N.
                                          Accept the default or make the required changes.


After the Help has been loaded, the program will attempt to re-link page and line numbers to
the existing variable names (prompts), thus ensuring that each prompt will point to the
correct page and line in the manual. Any new prompts added to the manual will have to be
linked manually, after which it will be maintained automatically from then on. It could happen
that an existing prompt no longer appears in the manual, in this case the link can no longer
be maintained, and thus the program will link such unmatched prompts to point to the
INDEX page.
Once the system has been loaded and the prompts linked, it should be copied to the Help
work file HELPFILB, by using program SU11 - Copy Supplied or User Help. This file may
the be sent to users to copy into the HELPFILE, also using program SU11.




3 - 84                                 JULY 2006                   Systems Utilities - User Guide
3.3.    COPY SUPPLIED OR USER HELP - SU11
This program is used to copy any Help (supplied or user Help) from the HELPFILE to the
HELPFILB or vice versa. This facility is used to transfer portions of the HELPFILE easily to
new sites.
Enter SU11 to select the program.

       SYSTEM UTILITIES - COPY SUPPLIED OR USER HELP                         SU11   11/001
       SELECT OPTION   [1]   1   -   Copy records from HELPFILB (work file) to HELPFILE
                             2   -   Copy records to HELPFILB (work file) from HELPFILE
                             3   -   Clear HELPFILB (work file)
       SELECT TYPE     [S]   S   -   Supplied Help
                             U   -   User Help




       ESC - EXIT




Level 1

SELECT OPTION                           :   [1] Copy records from HELPFILB (work file) to
                                        HELPFILE.
                                            [2] Copy records to HELPFILB (work file) from
                                        HELPFILE.
                                            [3] Clear HELPFILB (work file)

SELECT TYPE                             :     [S] Supplied Help
                                              [U] User help




SU - Online Help                                    JULY 2006                                3 - 85
If Option 1 and Supplied Help was selected, the following screen is displayed;

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - COPY SUPPLIED OR USER HELP                        SU11   11/001
     COPY RECORDS FROM HELP WORK FILE (HELPFILB)
     SYSTEM NAME    [AP    ]    ALL = ALL SYSTEMS
     FG#   SYSTEM     DESCRIPTION          HELP STATUS           DATE   TIME
           AP    <--> ACCOUNTS PAYABLE     LOADED                890707 121735




     ADDING VARIABLES -       AP         CONTACT NAME



SYSTEM NAME                        :     6 characters.
                                         Press [F1] to scan all the systems loaded into the
                                         HELPFILB (workfile). Move the cursor to the required
                                         systems and press [F5] to flag these systems. Once all
                                         systems have been flagged, press [F3] to copy these
                                         systems from the work file (HELPFILB) to HELPFILE.

COPY SYSTEMS? (Y/N)                :     Y/N
                                         Enter [Y] to initiate the copy, or [N] to return to the
                                         `SYSTEM NAME' prompt.


While processing the system displays `ADDING HELP LINES'. On completion the program
returns to the options screen.




3 - 86                                 JULY 2006                 Systems Utilities - User Guide
If Option 1 and User Help was selected, the following screen is displayed;

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - COPY SUPPLIED OR USER HELP                  SU11   11/001
     COPY RECORDS FROM HELP WORK FILE (HELPFILB)
     PROGRAM NAME   [AP10 ]     ALL = ALL PROGRAMS
     FG#   PROGRAM    DESCRIPTION
           AP10 <--> INVOICE/CREDIT NOTE INPUT
           AP11       MANUAL PAYMENT/DISCOUNT INPUT
           AP30       VENDOR FILE MAINTENANCE




     ADDING HELP LINES -      AP10



PROGRAM                              :   6 characters.
                                         Press [F1] to scan all the programs for which you
                                         designed your own Help screens. Move the cursor to
                                         the required programs and press [F5] to flag these
                                         programs. Once all programs have been flagged, press
                                         [F3] to copy these programs from the work file
                                         (HELPFILB) to HELPFILE.

COPY PROGRAMS? (Y/N)                 Y/N
                                     :
                                     Enter [Y] to initiate the copy, or [N] to return to the
                                     `PROGRAM NAME' prompt.
While processing the system displays `ADDING HELP LINES'. On completion the program
returns to the options screen.




SU - Online Help                              JULY 2006                             3 - 87
If Option 2 and Supplied Help was selected, the following screen is displayed;

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - COPY SUPPLIED OR USER HELP                        SU11    11/001
     COPY RECORDS TO HELP WORK FILE (HELPFILB)
     SYSTEM NAME    [AB    ]    ALL = ALL SYSTEMS
     FG#   SYSTEM     DESCRIPTION          HELP STATUS          DATE     TIME
           AB    <--> APPLICATION BUILDER LOADED                890901   082758
           AP         ACCOUNTS PAYABLE     LOADED               890707   121735
           AR         ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE LOADED                890706   175026
           ES         ESTIMATING           LOADED               891127   121654
           FA         FIXED ASSETS         LOADED               891129   114758
           GL         GENERAL LEDGER       LOADED               891128   173159
           IV         INVENTORY            LOADED               891211   145649
           PO         PURCHASE ORDERS      LOADED               890707   123540
           RW         REPORT WRITER        LOADED               891207   153948
           SP         SALES ORDER PROCESSI LOADED               891129   102925
           SU         SYSTEMS UTILITIES    LOADED               891201   154114
           UT         SYSTEM OVERVIEW      LOADED               890713   123926

     ***   NO MORE ITEMS   ***

     F1 - SCAN, F3 - COPY SYSTEMS, F5 - FLAG SYSTEM, F10 - OPTIONS, ESC - EXIT



SYSTEM NAME                       :     6 characters.
                                        Press [F1] to scan all the systems loaded into the
                                        HELPFILE. Move the cursor to the required systems
                                        and press [F5] to flag these systems. Once all systems
                                        have been flagged, press [F3] to copy these systems to
                                        the work file (HELPFILB).

COPY SYSTEMS? (Y/N)               :     Y/N
                                        Enter [Y] to initiate the copy, or [N] to return to the
                                        `SYSTEM NAME' prompt.


While processing the system displays `ADDING HELP LINES'. On completion the program
returns to the options screen.




3 - 88                                JULY 2006                 Systems Utilities - User Guide
If Option 2 and User Help was selected, the following screen is displayed;

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - COPY SUPPLIED OR USER HELP                        SU11   11/001
     COPY RECORDS TO HELP WORK FILE (HELPFILB)
     PROGRAM NAME   [AB25 ]     ALL = ALL PROGRAMS
     FG#   PROGRAM    DESCRIPTION
     001   AB25 <--> DICTIONARY FILE MAINTENANCE
           AB26       DICTIONARY FIELD MAINTENANCE
           AB30       PROGRAM GENERATOR
           AB32       MENU GENERATOR
           AB40       MAIN MENU
           AB42       RUN A PROGRAM
           AP10       INVOICE/CREDIT NOTE INPUT
           AP11       MANUAL PAYMENT/DISCOUNT INPUT
           AP30       VENDOR FILE MAINTENANCE
           AR00       SYSTEM RECORD MAINTENANCE
           AR10       INVOICE/CREDIT NOTE INPUT
           AR11       PAYMENT INPUT
           AR12       UNALLOCATED PAYMENT ALLOCATION
           AR13       UNALLOCATED PAYMENT WORKSHEET
           AR14       JOURNAL ENTRY INPUT
           AR15       INVOICE/CREDIT NOTE TAKE-ON
     ADDING VARIABLES -       AB25       DESCRIPTION



PROGRAM                              :   6 characters.
                                         Press [F1] to scan all the programs for which you
                                         designed his own Help screens. Move the cursor to the
                                         required programs and press [F5] to flag these
                                         programs. Once all programs have been flagged, press
                                         [F3] to copy these programs to the work file
                                         (HELPFILB).

COPY PROGRAMS? (Y/N)                 :   Y/N
                                         Enter [Y] to initiate the copy, or [N] to return to the
                                         `PROGRAM NAME' prompt.


While processing the system displays `ADDING HELP LINES'. On completion the program
returns to the options screen.




SU - Online Help                               JULY 2006                                  3 - 89
If Option 3 is selected, all information will be removed from the workfile. The following will
display;

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - COPY SUPPLIED OR USER HELP                         SU11   11/001


     SELECT OPTION   [3]   1   -   Copy records from HELPFILB (work file) to HELPFILE
                           2   -   Copy records to HELPFILB (work file) from HELPFILE
                           3   -   Clear HELPFILB (work file)
     SELECT TYPE     [U]   S   -   Supplied Help
                           U   -   User Help




     ARE YOU SURE (Y/N) [Y]


     F10 - OPTIONS, ESC - EXIT



ARE YOU SURE? (Y/N)                   Y/N
                                      :
                                      Enter [Y] to clear the workfile or [N] to select another
                                      option.
While processing the system displays `BUSY CLEARING HELPFILB..'. On completion the
operator must press [Enter] for the program to return to the options screen.




3 - 90                                    JULY 2006                 Systems Utilities - User Guide
3.4.    USER HELP LINK MAINTENANCE - SU12
The program creates a linked User Help between various programs. This would be done
where the Help for two or more programs is the same. Numerous programs may all be
linked to one individual program. For example, AR10 may be the link program for AR11,
AR12 and AR13. However you may not link a program to another which is itself part of a
group. For instance in the above example you would be warned that you may not link AR15
to AR11 as it is already part of that group.
Enter SU12 to select the program.

       SYSTEM UTILITIES - USER HELP LINK MAINTENANCE                   SU12   11/001
       PROGRAM NAME           AR10
       LINK PROGRAM NAME     [AR15 ]




       F3 - UPDATE, F8 - DELETE, F10 - NEXT PROGRAM, ESC - EXIT



PROGRAM NAME                        :     6 characters.
                                          Enter the program name which is to be linked or press
                                          [F1] to view the linked programs.

LINK PROGRAM NAME                   :     6 characters.
                                          Enter the program name to which the previously
                                          entered program is to be linked.


The status line displays the available options. Press [F3] to update, [F8] to delete a link,
[F10] to return to the `PROGRAM NAME' field and [Esc] to exit the program.




SU - Online Help                                JULY 2006                              3 - 91
3.5.     DELETE SUPPLIED OR USER HELP - SU13
This program is supplied to provide the end user of TITAN with the simple means of deleting
selected systems and programs from Supplied or User Help and/or deleting selected
prompts.
Enter SU13 to select the program.
The following options screen is displayed;

       SYSTEM UTILITIES - DELETE SUPPLIED OR USER HELP                      SU13   11/001
       SELECT OPTION   [1]   1 - Delete selected Supplied Help
                             2 - Delete selected User Help
                             3 - Delete selected Variables/Prompts




       ESC - EXIT



SELECT OPTION                       :     [1] Delete selected Supplied Help
                                          [2] Delete selected User Help
                                          [3] Delete selected Variable/Prompts

Enter the required function.




3 - 92                                  JULY 2006                    Systems Utilities - User Guide
If Option 1 was selected, the following screen is displayed;

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - DELETE SUPPLIED OR USER HELP                      SU13    11/001
     DELETE SELECTED SUPPLIED HELP
     SYSTEM NAME    [AB    ]    ALL = ALL SYSTEMS
     FG#   SYSTEM     DESCRIPTION          HELP STATUS          DATE     TIME
     001   AB    <--> APPLICATION BUILDER LOADED                890901   082758
           AP         ACCOUNTS PAYABLE     LOADED               890707   121735
           AR         ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE LOADED                890706   175026
           ES         ESTIMATING           LOADED               891127   121654
           FA         FIXED ASSETS         LOADED               891129   114758
           GL         GENERAL LEDGER       LOADED               891128   173159
           IV         INVENTORY            LOADED               891211   145649
           PO         PURCHASE ORDERS      LOADED               890707   123540
           RW         REPORT WRITER        LOADED               891207   153948
           SP         SALES ORDER PROCESSI LOADED               891129   102925
           SU         SYSTEMS UTILITIES    LOADED               891201   154114
           UT         SYSTEM OVERVIEW      LOADED               890713   123926


     DELETE SYSTEMS? (Y/N)   [N]
     F10 - OPTIONS, ESC - EXIT



SYSTEM NAME                        :    6 characters.
                                        Press [F1] to scan all the systems loaded into the
                                        HELPFILE. Move the cursor to the required systems
                                        and press [F5] to flag these systems. Once all systems
                                        have been flagged, press [F8] to delete these systems
                                        from the HELPFILE.

DELETE SYSTEMS? (Y/N)              :    Y/N
                                        Enter [Y] to initiate the deletion, or [N] to return to the
                                        `SYSTEM NAME' prompt.


While processing the system displays `DELETING HELP LINES'. On completion the
program returns to the options screen.




SU - Online Help                              JULY 2006                                    3 - 93
If Option 2 was selected, the following screen is displayed;

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - DELETE SUPPLIED OR USER HELP                    SU13   11/001
     DELETE SELECTED USER HELP
     PROGRAM NAME   [AB25 ]     ALL = ALL PROGRAMS
     FG#   PROGRAM    DESCRIPTION
     001   AB25 <--> DICTIONARY FILE MAINTENANCE
           AB26       DICTIONARY FIELD MAINTENANCE
           AB30       PROGRAM GENERATOR
           AB32       MENU GENERATOR
           AB40       MAIN MENU
           AB42       RUN A PROGRAM
           AP10       INVOICE/CREDIT NOTE INPUT
           AP11       MANUAL PAYMENT/DISCOUNT INPUT
           AP30       VENDOR FILE MAINTENANCE
           AR00       SYSTEM RECORD MAINTENANCE
           AR10       INVOICE/CREDIT NOTE INPUT
           AR11       PAYMENT INPUT
           AR12       UNALLOCATED PAYMENT ALLOCATION
           AR13       UNALLOCATED PAYMENT WORKSHEET
           AR14       JOURNAL ENTRY INPUT
           AR15       INVOICE/CREDIT NOTE TAKE-ON
     DELETE PROGRAMS? (Y/N) [N]
     F10 - OPTIONS, ESC - EXIT



PROGRAM NAME                       :     6 characters.
                                         Press [F1] to scan all the programs loaded into the
                                         HELPFILE. Move the cursor to the required programs
                                         and press [F5] to flag these programs. Once all
                                         programs have been flagged, press [F8] to delete
                                         these programs from the HELPFILE.

DELETE
PROGRAMS? (Y/N)                    :  Y/N
                                      Enter [Y] to initiate the deletion, or [N] to return to the
                                      `PROGRAM NAME' prompt.
While processing the system displays `DELETING HELP LINES'. On completion the
program returns to the options screen.




3 - 94                                 JULY 2006                Systems Utilities - User Guide
If Option 3 was selected, the following screen is displayed;

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - DELETE SUPPLIED OR USER HELP                     SU13   11/001
     DELETE SELECTED VARIABLES/PROMPTS
                     PROG VARIABLE                        ID
     VARIABLE NAME [AB25 ABDICT-FILE-DESCRIPTION             ]   ALL = ALL VARIABLES
     FG#   VARIABLE                                     DESCRIPTION
     001   AB25 ABDICT-FILE-DESCRIPTION          <-->   DESCRIPTION
           AB25 ABDICT-FILE-SECURITY-LEVEL              SECURITY LEVEL
           AB25 ABDICT-FILE-TYPE                        FILE TYPE
           AB25 INKEY                                   FILE NAME
           AB25 WS-CONTINUE                             AB25
           AB25 WS-MAST-FILE                            MASTER FILE
           AB25 WS-PRESS-Q                              PRESS Q TO QUIT VIEW
           AB25 WS-VIEW-IND                             AB25
           AB26 ABDIC2-DEFAULT-IND                      WHEN TO DEFAULT
           AB26 ABDIC2-DEFAULT-TYPE                     DEFAULT TYPE
           AB26 ABDIC2-VALIDATE-FAIL                    FAIL ACTION
           AB26 ABDIC2-VALIDATE-MATCH                   VALIDATE MATCH
           AB26 ABDIC2-VALIDATE-MESSAGE                 FAIL MESSAGE
           AB26 ABDIC2-VALIDATE-TYPE                    VALIDATE TYPE
           AB26 ABDICT-FIELD-DATE-FORMAT                DATE FORMAT
           AB26 ABDICT-FIELD-DECIMALS                   DECIMALS
     DELETE VARIABLES? (Y/N) [N]
     F10 - OPTIONS, ESC - EXIT



VARIABLE NAME                     :     38 characters.
                                        Press [F1] to scan all the programs/variables loaded
                                        into the HELPFILE. Move the cursor to the required
                                        programs/variables and press [F5] to flag these
                                        programs/variables. Once all programs/variables have
                                        been flagged, press [F8] to delete these
                                        programs/variables from the HELPFILE.

DELETE
VARIABLES? (Y/N)                  :     Y/N
                                        Enter [Y] to initiate the deletion, or [N] to return to the
                                        `VARIABLE NAME' prompt.


While processing the system displays `DELETING HELP LINES'. On completion the
program returns to the options screen.




SU - Online Help                              JULY 2006                                  3 - 95
3.6.     RENAME HELP VARIABLE NAMES - SU14
This program is supplied to provide the end user of TITAN with the simple means of
changing variable names. These names are often difficult to interpret as they are used in the
programs. For example `customer account number' may be called `SL-ACC' and this may
be changed to be easily understood.
Enter SU14 to select the program.

       SYSTEM UTILITIES - RENAME HELP VARIABLE NAMES                       SU14   11/001
                       PROG VARIABLE                        ID
       VARIABLE NAME [AB25 ABDICT-FILE-DESCRIPTION             ]
       NEW NAME             [ABDICT-FILE-DESCRIPTION           ]
             VARIABLE                                     DESCRIPTION
             AB25 ABDICT-FILE-DESCRIPTION          <-->   DESCRIPTION
             AB25 ABDICT-FILE-SECURITY-LEVEL              SECURITY LEVEL
             AB25 ABDICT-FILE-TYPE                        FILE TYPE
             AB25 INKEY                                   FILE NAME
             AB25 WS-CONTINUE                             AB25
             AB25 WS-MAST-FILE                            MASTER FILE
             AB25 WS-PRESS-Q                              PRESS Q TO QUIT VIEW
             AB25 WS-VIEW-IND                             AB25
             AB26 ABDIC2-DEFAULT-IND                      WHEN TO DEFAULT
             AB26 ABDIC2-DEFAULT-TYPE                     DEFAULT TYPE
             AB26 ABDIC2-VALIDATE-FAIL                    FAIL ACTION
             AB26 ABDIC2-VALIDATE-MATCH                   VALIDATE MATCH
             AB26 ABDIC2-VALIDATE-MESSAGE                 FAIL MESSAGE
             AB26 ABDIC2-VALIDATE-TYPE                    VALIDATE TYPE
             AB26 ABDICT-FIELD-DATE-FORMAT                DATE FORMAT
       F3 - UPDATE, F10 - VARIABLE NAME, ESC - EXIT



VARIABLE NAME                       :     38 characters.
                                          Press [F1] to scan all the programs/variables loaded
                                          into the HELPFILE. Move the cursor to the required
                                          programs/variables and press [F5] to rename the
                                          variable name.

NEW NAME                            :     32 characters.
                                          Enter the new program/variable name.


Continue as above until all the required program/variable names have been altered.




3 - 96                                  JULY 2006                   Systems Utilities - User Guide
                                                  4. MAINTENANCE MODULE

4.1.   THE MAINTENANCE MODULE MENU
This module consists of the following programs;


  SU30       INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE - Mandatory for all systems
  SU31       DESCRIPTIONS FILE MAINTENANCE - Mandatory for all systems
  SU32       NUMBERS FILE MAINTENANCE - Mandatory for all systems
  SU33       NARRATIVE FILE MAINTENANCE - Optional
             Used by the Sales Order Processing and Inventory Systems.
  SU35       CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE
             Mandatory for all systems where user-defined forms are used, such as
             Accounts Receivable, Accounts Payable and Payroll systems.
  SU351      CUSTOMISED TERMINOLOGY
             Allows you to change screen prompts and external names.
  SU36       CURRENCY FILE MAINTENANCE - Optional
             This is only used by the individual systems where multi-currency
             features are used, such as Purchase Ordering.
  SU37       FORMULA MAINTENANCE - Optional
             Relates only to certain systems. Refer to the individual User Guides for
             more information.
  SU38       SYSTEM PASSWORD MAINTENANCE - Mandatory for all systems
  SU39       JOB PROCESSING - Optional


Enter SU3 from the main menu. Then select the number of the program required. The SU is
already loaded.




SU - Maintenance                          JULY 2006                             4 - 97
4.2.     INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE - SU30
Enter SU30 to select the program.
The screen will now show the following options;

SELECT FUNCTION                  :     [1] General Details.
                                       [2] Company Details.
                                       [3] Branch Details.
                                       [4] System Details.
                                       [5] Module Details.
                                       [6] Program Details.
                                       [7] Loads Details from LOADSYS.


Select the option required. Each option will be described in detail in the following pages.

 Please note that options 1 - 3 must always be done for a new installation.
 Authority codes will be required and must be obtained from the Dealer. A special
 form is used to request these codes - see Appendix A at the back of this User
 Guide for an example.




4 - 98                               JULY 2006         Systems Utilities - User Guide
OPTION 1. GENERAL INSTALLATION DETAILS
This option consists of three screens of data.

SCREEN 1.
The initial company set up data is displayed. Enter the following fields;

INSTALLATION #                    :    5 digits.
                                       The installation number will be supplied at the time of
                                       installation by the Distributor or Dealer. The number is
                                       unique to the installation.

INSTALLATION NAME                 :    The installation name appears on the main menu. It is
                                       necessary to install an installation name for each
                                       computer on which Titan runs. Please consult the
                                       dealer or distributor for assistance to do this.

EXPIRY DATE                       :    CCYYMMDD
                                       Your dealer will have this date. It will be used in
                                       conjunction with the installation name, to calculate a
                                       unique authorisation code for your installation. On or
                                       after the expiry date, the system will give the following
                                       message as you sign on.
                                       'WARNING - LICENCE DUE. PLEASE CONSULT
                                       YOUR DEALER'.
                                       The system will continue to function for a further month
                                       after this date, giving the same warning when you sign
                                       on. At any time during that period, once your licence
                                       fees have been paid, you will be given a new expiry
                                       date and authorisation code, and after these have been
                                       entered, the message will no longer display.
                                       If after a month has expired, and you have not entered
                                       the new date and code, you will not be able to use
                                       Titan. The following message will be displayed.
                                       'LICENCE EXPIRED - CONSULT YOUR DEALER'
                                       If this is a NEW installation or if the installation
                                       number, name or expiry date is being changed, then
                                       the cursor will move to the bottom of the screen and
                                       require entry of the authorisation code before
                                       proceeding.

MAXIMUM USERS                     :    3 digits
                                       This is the maximum number of users that may be
                                       working on TITAN at any one time. Your support
                                       person will know the number you selected for which to
                                       pay licence fees.




SU - Maintenance                             JULY 2006                               4 - 99
DEFAULT COMPANY                     :        2 digits
                                             This will be the number of the company most often
                                             used on the system. This company number will appear
                                             in all programs as the default company and will be pre-
                                             loaded into the company number field.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE                            SU30   11/003
     INSTALLATION #               [   10]
     INSTALLATION NAME            [TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED        ]
     EXPIRY DATE                  [20020930] CCYYMMDD
     MAXIMUM USERS                [999]
     DEFAULT COMPANY              [01]
     BACKGROUND DISPLAY? (Y/N)    [N]
     LOGFILE OPERATIONAL? (Y/N)   [Y]
     LOGGING LEVEL                [5]
     CYCLES ON RECORD LOCKING     [006]
     LOG DATABASE NOT IN USE
     REPORT DEFAULTS:          Destination      Printer #   Destinations:
      1                            [1]            [01]      1 = Report management system
      2                            [1]            [01]      2 = Direct to printer
      3                            [1]            [01]      3 = Direct to a file
                                                            4 = Direct to screen
     NUMBER OF USERS LOGGED IN     003                      5 = Mail recipient


     F1-NEXT SCRN, F3-UPDATE, F10-OPTION, ESC-EXIT



BACKGROUND DISPLAY?                 :        Y/N
                                             The flag used for background job processing. See
                                             SU39 - Job Processing in the Systems Utilities User
                                             Guide for further details.

LOGFILE OPERATIONAL?                :        Y/N
                                             This dictates whether or not system logging is enabled.
                                             Refer to program SU62 - Logging Maintenance in
                                             the Report Management section of this User Guide for
                                             more information.

LOGGING LEVEL                       :        See SU62 - Logging Maintenance in the System
                                             Utilities User Guide for further details.
                                             If the logfile is operational the levels 1-5 dictate the
                                             depth of the logging to be performed. The levels are;
                                             [1] All logging information
                                             [2] System errors only
                                             [3] File updates only
                                             [4] Messages only
                                             [5] System access only




4 - 100                                  JULY 2006           Systems Utilities - User Guide
CYCLES ON RECORD
LOCKING                       :     3 digits
                                    This figure represents the number of times the system
                                    will retry reading a locked record. Each retry will take 1
                                    second. At the end of the retry cycle, you will be asked
                                    if you wish to start another retry cycle or if you press
                                    [Esc], you will exit the program.

 Set this to an acceptable level such as '5' or '10'. If you enter '999', you may be
 locked into the retry cycle for about 16 minutes.
                                    When a record is locked the process ID of the user
                                    locking the record is displayed in the record locked
                                    window. For instance 11562 is ‘ps –fp11562’. This
                                    applies only to UNIX users.

ACUVIEW INSTALLED? (Y/N) :          Y/N
                                    This is a separate product which you must purchase if
                                    you wish to run the Chart Writer module.

LOG DATABASE IN USE           :     This is not a prompt but a display. You will see this if
                                    you are running TITAN on a database and the
                                    transaction logging is set to 'ON'.

LOG DATA BASE
NOT IN USE                    :     This is not a prompt but a display. You will see this if
                                    you are running TITAN on a Vision file system.

REPORT DEFAULTS               :     Installation defaults for reports used if no USER,
                                    SYSTEM or PROGRAM defaults are set. The printer
                                    number corresponds to the printer # as set up in SU01
                                    - Terminal and Printer Setup and should be
                                    specified even for the report destination going directly
                                    to report management system or screen.


 Remember, if you select the option to route reports directly to the screen, they
 still go to the Report Management system from where they can be viewed and
 printed.




SU - Maintenance                         JULY 2006                                 4 - 101
NUMBER OF
USERS LOGGED IN                  :     3 digits
                                       The system keeps track of the number of users logged
                                       on to TITAN. This number here may NOT exceed the
                                       'MAXIMUM NUMBER OF USERS' specified earlier. If
                                       the two numbers are equal and you try to log on to the
                                       system, a warning will be given and you will not be able
                                       to continue.

 If for some exceptional reason such as a power failure, this value has not been
 reset as happens when a user logs off, please contact your support person who
 will help you to reset this value to '1'. Please note that ALL users except one
 person with the proper authority (Level 9must be logged off when doing this.
The status line provides the prompts. Press [F1] or [F3] to update the file and to proceed to
the next screen. Press [F10] to return to the option menu or [Esc] to return to the main
menu.




4 - 102                              JULY 2006        Systems Utilities - User Guide
SCREEN 2 - MENU DETAILS.


    SYSTEM UTILITIES - INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE                       SU30   11/001
    PRODUCT NAME :               TITAN          Release :      5.0
    Menu Details:
     MAIN MENU DESCRIPTION      [INTEGRATED FINANCIAL SOFTWARE ]
     MENU OPERATOR PROMPT       [ENTER OPTION :    ]
     CENTRE MENUS? (Y/N)        [Y]
     ARROW SIZE? (3-5)          [3]
     DISPLAY CO/BR/DATE? (Y/N) [Y]
    Installation terminology:
      CO :                      [CO - ]
      BR :                      [BR - ]
      DATE:                     [DATE ]
      PAGE #                    [PAGE ]
      PERIOD                    [PERIOD - ]
    Company/Branch control at start of program:
     SUPPRESS CO/BR SCREEN?     [Y]    Y=Yes N=No
     RESET TO DEFAULT CO/BR?    [Y]    Y=Yes N=No

    F1 - NEXT SCREEN, F2 - PREVIOUS SCREEN, F3 - UPDATE, F8 - DELETE, F10 - OPTIONS



MAIN MENU DESCRIPTION            :     You may define the description that appears on the
                                       main menu.

MENU
OPERATOR PROMPT                  :     The string that prompts you to enter a program name
                                       on the menu is user-defined.

CENTRE MENUS?                    :     Y/N
                                       You may choose to centre the systems displayed on
                                       the main menu or display them from the top down.

ARROW SIZE? (3-5)                :     The arrow displayed on the main menu may be defined
                                       as size 3 or 5 character width.

DISPLAY CO/BR/DATE?              :     Y/N
                                       The current company, branch and date defaults may
                                       be displayed or suppressed on all menus.




SU - Maintenance                             JULY 2006                                4 - 103
INSTALLATION TERMINOLOGY
The terminology that heads each program may be changed according to the users'
requirements. The defaults are set as listed below.

CO                            :     CO -

BRANCH                        :     BR -

DATE                          :     DATE

PAGE #                        :     PAGE

PERIOD                        :     PERIOD -


COMPANY BRANCH CONTROL AT START OF PROGRAM

SUPPRESS
CO/BR SCREEN?                 :     Y/N
                                    If suppressed, you will not be prompted to enter Co/Br
                                    defaults on every program entered, but will have to use
                                    the [F10] key to access that screen.

RESET TO
DEFAULT CO/BR                 :     Y/N
                                    If set to "Yes" the Co/Br defaults are reset to the initial
                                    defaults after exiting the program.




4 - 104                           JULY 2006         Systems Utilities - User Guide
SCREEN 3 - NUMERIC ACCEPT DETAILS


    SYSTEM UTILITIES - INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE                            SU30   11/110
    PRODUCT NAME :              TITAN                Release :     6.0

    LEFT JUSTIFY LEADING ZEROS? [Y]          - Numeric Display Mode
    ENABLE CALCULATOR FUNCTIONS?[Y]          - Numeric Input Only
    CENTURY                     [19]
    DEVICE DIRECTORY           [/dev/    ]
    DISPLAY STATION ID         [Y]
    SPECIAL FUNCTION MODE      [1]           0 - Inhibit Help/Hotkey
                                             1 - Allow Help/Hotkey
    DATE FORMAT                [1]           1 - dd/mm/yy
                                             2 - mm/dd/yy
                                             3 - yy/mm/dd
    HELP EDIT LEVEL            [-]           A   -   All users may edit User help
                                             S   -   Only SYSADMIN may edit User help
    DEFAULT HELP LEVEL         [-]           U   -   User help, S - Supplied help
    MEMORY RANKING             [-]           H   -   High, L - Low
    F2 - PREVIOUS SCREEN, F3 - UPDATE, F8 - DELETE, F10 - OPTIONS, ESC - EXIT



LEFT JUSTIFY
LEADING ZEROS?                   :      Y/N
                                        On numeric accepts, a leading zero may be justified to
                                        the left or not depending on the setting of this flag.

ENABLE CALCULATOR
FUNCTIONS                        :      Y/N
                                        If [Y], you will be able to use the calculator function as
                                        described in the GETTING STARTED section of this
                                        manual.

 Please note that if you use this feature and you wish to enter a negative value in
 a numeric field, the minus sign (-) must be entered before the value. If not, the
 system will assume that you are performing a calculation in that field and that
 you are about to enter another value which must be subtracted from the first

CENTURY                          :      2 digits
                                        The current century is set to [19]

DEVICE DIRECTORY                 :      8 characters
                                        This variable describes the directory name of the
                                        device to be used as the dedicated port, for example
                                        /dev/.

DISPLAY STATION ID               :      Y/N
                                        If you enter [Y, then each program will show your Login
                                        station ID under the program reference on line 2 of the
                                        screen.
                                        [N] - this will inhibit the display.



SU - Maintenance                                 JULY 2006                                 4 - 105
SPECIAL
FUNCTION MODE               :     [0] off
                                  [1] on
                                  This flag enables you to inhibit HELP/HOT/VIEWKEY if
                                  there is insufficient memory to fully utilise these special
                                  functions.

DATE FORMAT                 :     [1] dd/mm/ccyy
                                  [2] mm/dd/ccyy
                                  [3] ccyy/mm/dd
                                  Three date formats are available. Select the
                                  appropriate one for the installation.

HELP EDIT LEVEL             :     1 character
                                  Enter an [A] if all users may edit the User help and an
                                  [S] if only the system administrator using the
                                  SYSADMIN user name may edit the User help.

DEFAULT HELP LEVEL          :     1 character
                                  If the default help is to be the User help, enter a [U],
                                  and enter an [S] if the Supplied help is to be used as a
                                  default.

 SUPPLIED HELP is supplied by the Distributor and is an on-line version of the
 User Guides. USER HELP may be added by individual users.

MEMORY RANKING              :     1 character
                                  This feature allows certain large programs to run with a
                                  memory boundary of 1MB. Currently it only affects
                                  program SP10 - Order Entry in regard to its use via
                                  Job Costing programs.
                                  Enter an [H] if the computer has a memory of more
                                  than 1MB, and an [L] if the memory is 1MB or less.




4 - 106                         JULY 2006         Systems Utilities - User Guide
OPTION 2 - COMPANY DETAILS
The default company previously entered appears in the first field of this screen. Press
[Enter] to accept the company or enter a new company number.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE                     SU30   11/103

     COMPANY #                    [01]
     COMPANY NAME                 [TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED     ]
     ADDRESS 1                    [1942 PEACHTREE STREET    ]
     ADDRESS 2                    [BLDG. 7 SUITE B           ]
     ADDRESS 3                    [ATLANTA                  ]
     POSTAL CODE                  [30341          ]
     TELEPHONE #                  [555 4948       ]
     FAX # #                      [555 3092       ]
     COMPANY REGISTRATION #       [000005000303        ]
     COMPANY TAX REGISTRATION # 1 [900090000930038     ]
     COMPANY TAX REGISTRATION # 2 [                    ]
     DEFAULT BRANCH #             [01]
     COMPANY STOCK PERIOD         [12]




     F3 - UPDATE, F8 - DELETE, F10 - OPTION MENU, ESC - EXIT




Enter the following fields;

COMPANY #                          :     2 digits.
                                         Enter the required company number or accept the
                                         default.

COMPANY NAME                       : 30 characters.
                                     Enter the name of the company as it should appear on
                                     all reports and displays.
                                     Whenever this name is changed, a new authorisation
                                     code must be requested from the distributor or dealer.
The following fields may be left BLANK if required although some of them may be optionally
printed on user-defined forms such as statements.


ADDRESS 1                          :     25 characters.

ADDRESS 2                          :     25 characters.

ADDRESS 3                          :     25 characters.

POSTAL CODE                        :     15 characters.

TELEPHONE #                        :     15 characters.




SU - Maintenance                               JULY 2006                             4 - 107
FAX #                              :     15 characters.

COMPANY REGISTRATION # :                 20 characters.

COMPANY TAX
REGISTRATION # 1                   :     20 characters.

COMPANY TAX
REGISTRATION # 2                   :     20 characters.

DEFAULT BRANCH #                   :     2 digits.
                                         The number of the branch most often used in
                                         conjunction with the default company. This number will
                                         appear together with the company number as the
                                         default company and branch in all programs. This
                                         combination will be pre-loaded into all the
                                         company/branch fields, for example if company 01 and
                                         branch 01 have been entered as the default
                                         combination, the company number prompt will read
                                         COMPANY/BRANCH # 01/01).
Press [F3] to update the record.

AUTHORITY CODE                     :     6 digits.
                                         This code is unique to this company and must be
                                         obtained from the Dealer or Distributor.
Press [F3] to return to the option screen and select Option [3] to enter branch details.



UPDATING/DELETING COMPANY DETAILS

UPDATING A COMPANY
Enter [2] to update the details of existing companies on the system then enter the number of
the company to be updated.
Move the cursor down to the field that is to be updated. Once the data has been entered,
press [F3] to update the data on the file.
If the name of the company is to be updated a new authority code will be required. This
must be obtained from the Dealer or Distributor.

DELETING A COMPANY

Press [F8] to delete company data.

 The system, however, will not allow companies to be deleted that have branches
 or systems allocated to them. These systems and branches have to be to be
 deleted and de-activated before company deletion will be permitted.




4 - 108                                JULY 2006          Systems Utilities - User Guide
OPTION 3 - BRANCH DETAILS

The default branch previously entered appears in the first field of this screen. Press [Enter]
to accept the branch or enter a new branch number.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE                     SU30   11/001
     COMPANY #                   [01]
     BRANCH #                    [01]
     BRANCH NAME                 [CAPE TOWN                    ]
     ADDRESS 1                   [                        ]
     ADDRESS 2                   [                        ]
     ADDRESS 3                   [                        ]
     POSTAL CODE                 [               ]
     TELEPHONE #                 [               ]
     FAX #                     [               ]
     DEFAULT WAREHOUSE           [01]




     F3 - UPDATE, F8 - DELETE, F10 - OPTION MENU, ESC - EXIT




Enter the following fields;

COMPANY #                         :     2 digits.
                                        Enter the Company number to which the branch, for
                                        whom details are being entered, belongs.

BRANCH #                          :     2 digits.
                                        Enter the required Branch number.

BRANCH NAME                       :     30 characters.
                                        Enter the Branch name for whom details are being
                                        entered.

ADDRESS 1                         :     25 characters.

ADDRESS 2                         :     25 characters.

ADDRESS 3                         :     25 characters.

POSTAL CODE                       :     15 characters.

TELEPHONE #                       :     15 characters.

FAX #                             :     15 characters.




SU - Maintenance                              JULY 2006                              4 - 109
DEFAULT WAREHOUSE                  :     2 digits.
                                         The number of the warehouse most often used in the
                                         branch. This number will appear together with the
                                         company/branch number as the default warehouse in
                                         all programs where it is relevant. You must specify that
                                         warehouses are to be used in program IV00 - System
                                         Record Maintenance.


Press [F3] to update the record.

AUTHORITY CODE                     :     6 digits.
                                         This code is unique to this company/branch
                                         combination and must be obtained from the Dealer or
                                         Distributor.


Continue until all branches to be used have been entered. The status line provides the
prompts required.
On completion, press [F10] to return to the option menu.



UPDATING/DELETING BRANCH DETAILS

UPDATING BRANCH DETAILS
To update the branch data, enter the relevant company and branch numbers to be updated.
Move the cursor to the fields that are to be updated. Once the data has been entered, press
[F3] to update the data on the file.
If the name of the branch is to be updated a new authorisation code will be required. This
must be obtained from the Dealer or Distributor.

DELETING A BRANCH

Press [F8] to delete branch data.

 The system, however, will not allow branches to be deleted that have systems
 allocated to them. These systems have to be to be deleted and de-activated
 before branch deletion will be permitted.




4 - 110                                JULY 2006        Systems Utilities - User Guide
OPTION 4 - SYSTEM DETAILS
While the DEMONSTRATION system is active ALL systems are installed.
When an Installation Name is installed using SU30 - Installation Maintenance - Option [1],
ALL systems are automatically uninstalled and must be individually reinstalled. To reinstall a
system please contact the Dealer or Distributor and quote the following information;
1. Installation name
2. Installation number
3. System name
The Dealer will then supply the authority code that may be used to install the system.
Please see the special form in Appendix B.

SYSTEM NAME                       :     2 digits
                                        Enter the required name or scan the systems available
                                        using the [F1] key.

INTERNAL SYSTEM #                 :     2 digits.
                                        This is the internal number associated with the system
                                        and is NOT available for alteration.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE                     SU30   11/001
     SYSTEM NAME                [AB]
     SYSTEM SYS# USER SEQ#       DESCRIPTION                    STATUS      MENU
     AB <--> 19   003 17         APPLICATION BUILDER           INSTALLED      Y
     AP      03   010 02         ACCOUNTS PAYABLE              INSTALLED      Y
     AR      02   000 01         ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE           INSTALLED      Y
     BL      17   000 23         BANK LINK                     INSTALLED      Y
     BM      13   000 13         BILL OF MATERIALS             INSTALLED      Y
     CB      16   004 22         CASH BOOK                     INSTALLED      Y
     CS      25        23        CUSTOMER SPECIALS                            N
     CU      23   --- 20         CONVERSION UTILITIES          INSTALLED      N
     CV                19        CONVERSIONS                   INSTALLED      N
     DU      24   --- 21         DEALER UTILITIES              INSTALLED      N
     FA      10   001 03         FIXED ASSETS                  INSTALLED      Y
     GL      01   003 04         GENERAL LEDGER                INSTALLED      Y
     IS      14   000 12         INSTALMENT SALES              INSTALLED      Y
     IV      05   000 06         INVENTORY                     INSTALLED      Y
     JC      12   001 09         JOB COSTING                   INSTALLED      Y


     F1 - SCAN, F10 - OPTION MENU, ESC - EXIT




SU - Maintenance                                JULY 2006                            4 - 111
     SYSTEM UTILITIES - INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE                           SU30   11/001
     SYSTEM NAME :               AB         Internal System # 19
                                 STATUS - ON HOLD
     SYSTEM DESCRIPTION         [APPLICATION BUILDER      ]
     EXPIRY DATE                [19980930] CCYYMMDD
     MAXIMUM USERS              [ 20]
     REPORT DEFAULTS:       Destination    Printer #    Destinations:
      1                         [0]          [00]       1 = Report management system
      2                         [0]          [00]       2 = Direct to printer
      3                         [0]          [00]       3 = Direct to a file
                                                        4 = Direct to screen
                                                        5 = Mail recipient
     System Terminology:
      1                          [            ]
      2                          [            ]
      3                          [            ]
      4                          [            ]
      5                          [            ]
     MENU SEQUENCE #             [15]
     SHOW ON MENU (Y/N)?         [Y]
     NUMBER OF USERS LOGGED IN   [000]
     F3 - UPDATE, F5 - TOGGLE STATUS, F8 - DELETE, F10 - OPTIONS, ESC – EXIT



SYSTEM DESCRIPTION                   :     45 characters
                                           If the description is altered this will then appear on the
                                           menu as a replacement of the default.

EXPIRY DATE                          :     CCYYMMDD
                                           Your dealer will have this date. It will be used in
                                           conjunction with the installation name, to calculate a
                                           unique authorisation code for your installation for each
                                           specific module. On or after the expiry date, when you
                                           try to access the expired system, the following
                                           message will be displayed.
                                           'System not Installed XX - press RETURN to
                                           continue'.
                                           'XX' denotes the system, for example 'AR' or 'GL'.
                                           This will normally happen when you have decided to
                                           discontinue the use of a particular module, or where
                                           you had the use of it for a limited period in order to
                                           evaluate it for future use.
                                           If this is a NEW installation or if the expiry date is
                                           being changed, then the cursor will move to the
                                           bottom of the screen and require entry of
                                           authorisation code before proceeding.

MAXIMUM USERS                        :     3 digits
                                           This is the maximum number of users that may be
                                           working on this specific application at any one time.
                                           Your support person will know the number you selected
                                           to pay licence fees for.




4 - 112                                  JULY 2006         Systems Utilities - User Guide
REPORT DEFAULTS                :   The destination for reports for this system may be set
                                   up either to;
                                        [1] Report Management System
                                        [2] Direct to printer
                                        [3] Direct to a file
                                        [4] Direct to screen
                                        [5] Mail recipient
                                   Printer Number; 1 to 99
                                   This corresponds to printer definitions set up in
                                   program SU01 - Terminal and Printer Setup - Option
                                   [4].

 Entries made here will override those made in Option 1 for the installation as a
 whole.


SYSTEM TERMINOLOGY             :   Certain terminology used by the system may be user-
                                   defined. For example `Postal Code' may also be
                                   referred to as `Zip Code' and individual users may use
                                   their discretion. These fields are not used for system
                                   `SU' but must be entered for the following systems.

     Accounts Payable :
         Field 1 : POST CODE
         Field 2 : CHEQUE
         Field 3 : NOT USED
         Field 4 : NOT USED
         Field 5 : NOT USED
     Accounts Receivable :
         Field 1 : POST CODE
         Field 2 : CHEQUE
         Field 3 : AR GROUP
         Field 4 : SALESMAN
         Field 5 : NOT USED
     Inventory :
          Field 1 : BIN LOCATION
          Field 2 : PACKING REF
          Field 3 : NOT USED
          Field 4 : NOT USED
          Field 5 : NOT USED
     Job Costing :
          Field 1 : SETUP
          Field 2 : NOT USED
          Field 3 : NOT USED
          Field 4 : NOT USED
          Field 5 : NOT USED



SU - Maintenance                        JULY 2006                              4 - 113
     Sales Analysis :
          Field 1 : SA CODE 1
          Field 2 : SA CODE 2
          Field 3 : NOT USED
          Field 4 : NOT USED
          Field 5 : NOT USED
     Sales Order Processing :
          Field 1 : POST CODE
          Field 2 : REFERENCE
          Field 3 : IN BODY OF INVOICE
          Field 4 : IN BODY OF INVOICE
          Field 5 : IN BODY OF INVOICE
     Cash Book
         Field 1 : NOT USED
         Field 2 : NOT USED
         Field 3 : USER CODE 3
         Field 4 : USER CODE 4
         Field 5 : NOT USED

MENU SEQUENCE #                 :     2 digits.
                                      The menu sequence controls the order in which
                                      systems appear on the menu. For instance if Systems
                                      Utilities has sequence number 1, it will appear first on
                                      the main menu.

SHOW ON MENU?                   :     Y/N
                                      If set to "No" this will inhibit the system being shown on
                                      the Main Menu.




4 - 114                             JULY 2006         Systems Utilities - User Guide
NUMBER OF
USERS LOGGED IN             :    3 digits
                                 The system keeps track of the number of users using
                                 this specific application. This number here may NOT
                                 exceed the 'MAXIMUM NUMBER OF USERS'
                                 specified earlier. If the two numbers are equal and you
                                 try to log on to the application, a warning will be given
                                 and you will not be able to continue.

 If for some exceptional reason such as a power failure, this value has not been
 reset as happens when a user logs off, please contact your support person who
 will help you to reset this value to '1'. Please note that ALL users except
 SYSADMIN or another user with level 9 authority must be logged off when doing
 this.




SU - Maintenance                      JULY 2006                                4 - 115
On Hold Restrictions

There is an [F5] toggle on the status line which will toggle the system between ‘ON HOLD’
and ‘AVAILABLE’. The ‘ON HOLD’ option will have the effect of the system being
inaccessible to all users except ‘SYSADMIN’ and other Level 9 users.
When you press [F5] a new screen displays which allows you to select specific
Company/Branch/Warehouse combinations to place on hold. As a further extension, the
[F6] key allows you to restrict the on-hold instruction to selected users.
An example of these two screens are shown below.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE                        SU30   11/007
               SYSTEM NAME :       AB         Internal System # 19
                                   SYSTEM ON HOLD
               SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [APPLICATION BUILDER      ]
                                 COMPANY    [ 1]
                                 BRANCH     [02] (00 = ALL BRANCHES)
                                 WAREHOUSE [00] (00 = ALL WAREHOUSES)
     CO        BR        WH
     01 <-->   02        00




     *** NO MORE ITEMS ***
     F1-SCAN, F3-ACCEPT, F5-TOGGLE, F6-USERS, F8-DELETE, F10-BACK, ESC-EXIT



     SYSTEM UTILITIES - INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE                        SU30   11/007
               SYSTEM NAME :      AB         Internal System #   19
                                  CO/BR/WH OR USERS ON HOLD
              SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [APPLICATION BUILDER      ]
                                [ABBY    ]
     USERNAME           DESCRIPTION              STATUS
     ABBY     <-->      TEMPLATE FOR GROUP 1     ON HOLD
     ABBY1              TEST
     BR01               BRANCH 01 ONLY
     BR0102             BRANCH 01 AND 02
     DAWN               DAWN PILATOWICZ
     DP1                TEMP1
     HAG01              HAGGIE - BR 1,2
     HAGG02             HAGGIE - BR 3
     NEW3               NEW
     SYSADMIN           SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR
     TEMP               TEMPLATE FOR GROUP 1
     TEMP1              TEMP1
     TEST3              8.1 SU38 MOD RESTRICTIONSON HOLD
     THERESA            THERESA HARGITAI

     F1-SCAN, F3-SWITCH, F10-BACK, ESC-EXIT

The same functionality described above has been extended to module and program detail.




4 - 116                              JULY 2006          Systems Utilities - User Guide
OPTION 5 - MODULE DETAILS
Programs within a particular system are grouped into modules - usually Input, Maintenance,
Enquiry, Print, Period-end and so forth.
These module names appear on the system menu and may be altered through this option. It
is suggested that the defaults be maintained.

MODULE NAME                       :     3 characters
                                        Enter the required module name or scan the modules
                                        available using the [F1] key.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE                       SU30   11/001
     MODULE NAME                 [GL1]
     MODULE   DESCRIPTION                    MENU
     GL1 <--> INPUT MODULE                     Y
     GL2      BALANCE TAKE-ON MODULE           Y
     GL3      MAINTENANCE MODULE               Y
     GL4      INTERFACE MODULE                 Y
     GL5      ENQUIRY/SCAN MODULE              Y
     GL6      MANAGEMENT REPORTING MODULE      Y
     GL7      PRINT MODULE                     Y
     GL9      PERIOD-END MODULE                Y
     IS1      INPUT MODULE                     Y
     IS3      MAINTENANCE MODULE               Y
     IS5      ENQUIRY/SCAN MODULE              Y
     IS7      PRINT MODULE                     Y
     IS9      PERIOD-END MODULE                Y
     IV1      INPUT MODULE                     Y
     IV2      INTERFACE MODULE                 Y
     IV3      MAINTENANCE MODULE               Y
     F1 - SCAN, F2 - SCAN BACK, F10 - OPTION MENU, ESC - EXIT



MODULE DESCRIPTION                :     45 characters
                                        Enter the required description.

SHOW ON MENU?                     :     Y/N
                                        If set to [N] this will inhibit the module name being
                                        shown on the menu.

On Hold Restrictions

There is an [F5] toggle on the status line which will toggle the system between ‘ON HOLD’
and ‘AVAILABLE’. The ‘ON HOLD’ option will have the effect of the system being
inaccessible to all users except ‘SYSADMIN’ and other Level 9 users.
When you press [F5] a new screen displays which allows you to select specific
Company/Branch/Warehouse combinations to place on hold. As a further extension, the
[F6] key allows you to restrict the on-hold instruction to selected users.
Screen examples may be seen under the SYSTEM description.




SU - Maintenance                              JULY 2006                                4 - 117
OPTION 6 - PROGRAM DETAILS
This option allows the default program settings to be altered or records for new programs to
be entered.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE                           SU30   11/006
     PROGRAM NAME :              AR30          Called Synonym :   NONE
     PROGRAM DESCRIPTION        [CUSTOMER FILE MAINTENANCE                        ]
     REPORT DEFAULTS:        Destination      Printer #    Destinations:
      1                          [0]            [00]      1 = Report management system
      2                          [0]            [00]      2 = Direct to printer
      3                          [0]            [00]      3 = Direct to a file
     REPORT ACCESS GROUP         [    ]                   4 = Direct to screen
                                                          5 = Mail recipient
     SHOW ON MENU (Y/N)?        [-] USER [          ]
     AUTO-CALL TO PROGRAM       [------]
     AUTO-CALL PROMPT           [------------------------------]
     AUTO-CALL MENU TEXT        [----------]
     CALL AS PROGRAM            [      ]
     WITH DEFAULT CO/BR/WH      [00/00/00]




     F3-UPDATE, F5-STATUS, F8-DELETE, F10-OPTIONS, ESC-EXIT



PROGRAM NAME                      :        6 characters
                                           Enter the required program name or scan the programs
                                           available using the [F1] key.

PROGRAM DESCRIPTION               :        45 characters
                                           If the description is altered this will then appear on the
                                           menu and in all places where the specific program is
                                           referred to.

CALLED SYNONYM                    :        This is an internal field showing the relation between
                                           programs. This field may NOT be altered. When a
                                           program is a synonym of another, it means that only
                                           the synonym physically exists but that the program
                                           itself may be called from the menu, which then calls the
                                           synonym. Thus SP01 - Financials may be called from
                                           the menu, but only SP00 - System Record
                                           Maintenance exists physically.




4 - 118                               JULY 2006            Systems Utilities - User Guide
REPORT DEFAULTS                 :    The destination for reports for this system may be set
                                     up either to;
                                          [1] Report Management System
                                          [2] Direct to printer
                                          [3] Direct to a file
                                          [4] Direct to screen
                                          [5] Mail recipient
                                     Printer Number; 1 to 99
                                     This corresponds to printer definitions set up in
                                     program SU01 - Terminal and Printer Setup - Option
                                     [4].

 Please note that for SP19 - Demand Order Entry, you must set Printer 1 to print the
 Sales Order Documents and Printer 2 to print the Purchase Order documents as
 there is an option in SP00 - System record Maintenance to automatically create
 Purchase Orders in this program for back ordered items.


On Hold Restrictions

There is an [F5] toggle on the status line which will toggle the system between ‘ON HOLD’
and ‘AVAILABLE’. The ‘ON HOLD’ option will have the effect of the system being
inaccessible to all users except ‘SYSADMIN’ and other Level 9 users.
When you press [F5] a new screen displays which allows you to select specific
Company/Branch/Warehouse combinations to place on hold. As a further extension, the
[F6] key allows you to restrict the on-hold instruction to selected users.
Screen examples may be seen under the SYSTEM description.

REPORT ACCESS GROUP             :    4 characters
                                     This is the first 4 characters of the description in SU38 -
                                     System Password Maintenance. If you enter a user
                                     group here, then not only will the person who
                                     generated this report have access to it in SU60 -
                                     Report Management System, but also all members of
                                     this user group.

SHOW ON MENU?                   :    Y/N
                                     The facility exists to mask selected programs from the
                                     menus if required.

USER                            :    8 Characters
                                     You may enter a user name here if you wish this
                                     program to only be visible for a single user.




SU - Maintenance                           JULY 2006                                4 - 119
AUTO-CALL FACILITY
The following 3 prompts relate to the auto-call facility. This allows users to specify for each
program another program that will automatically be called on a keystroke which is specified
in the cblconfig file. The #exception value 45 sets the auto-call key. For instance if your auto-
call key is CONTROL-V, then the cblconfig entry would be:
KEYSTROKE exception=45 ^|
In addition you should set up key 46 in the same manner to display the field name for entry
in the AUTO-CALL PROMPT field.


AUTO-CALL TO PROGRAM               :     6 characters
                                         Enter the name of the called program.

AUTO-CALL PROMPT                   :     30 characters
                                         If you want the auto-call facility to only be available from
                                         a particular prompt on the calling program screen, enter
                                         this prompt here. To find the name of this field, go to
                                         the relevant field and press the control key set up to
                                         display the field name in the case of a numeric field or
                                         ?? in the case of an alpha field.

AUTO-CALL MENU TEXT                :     10 characters
                                         If you are using a menu bar, you can define the text for
                                         the menu button.

 Note: the calling program passes the value of the field the cursor is on when
 CONTROL-V is pressed.

Below is a few examples of how this facility may be used:


a)   In AR30 - Customer File Maintenance hitting CONTROL-V whilst on the account
     number (i.e. after pressing [F3] to update the new customer) will call SP15 - Batch
     Invoice Entry, passing it the CO/BR and the account number. SP15 (UTSLM) has
     been amended to pick up the passed value. Once the invoice is complete and [F3]
     pressed, the program is passed an [ESC] to pass control back to the calling program.
b)   In AR50 - Customer File Enquiry/Print hitting CONTROL-V whilst on the X-REF
     (invoice number) in the transaction scan, will call SP57 - Invoice Enquiry passing it
     the invoice number. If it does not exist in the current file use [F5] to select history. If it
     does not exist [F10] takes you back to the original program. SP10SF has been
     amended to pick up the passed value.
c)   If the program called does not pick up the passed value use the paste option set in the
     config file (exception=43) to paste in the passed value.




4 - 120                                JULY 2006         Systems Utilities - User Guide
CALL AS            :   6 Characters
                       This is used where you wish to simulate an already
                       existing program, but wish it to default to a specific
                       CO/BR/WH default.




SU - Maintenance            JULY 2006                                 4 - 121
OPTION 7 - LOAD DETAILS FROM LOADSYS
LOADSYS is used to input new program numbers, synonyms and names into the
PROGSYS file of individual installations.
The installation of new systems and programs, will be distributed in the LOADSYS file and
may be loaded by the user. Users will be advised by support staff when this is to be done.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE                           SU30   11/001
     SELECT FUNCTION             [1]     1    Load PROGSYS from LOADSYS

     Overwrite user terminology? (Y/N)   [N]




     F10 - OPTIONS, ESC - EXIT



SELECT FUNCTION                   :          1 digit.
                                             Accept the default to update the PROGSYS file for the
                                             installation with the latest program/menu names
                                             residing in the latest distributed LOADSYS file.

OVERWRITE USER
TERMINOLOGY                       :          Y/N
                                             If [Y] is entered, all changes made for the installation
                                             using program SU30 - Installation Maintenance
                                             options 4 - 6, will be overwritten with the standard
                                             details concerning system and program names and
                                             menu options. If [N], new entries will be written to the
                                             PROGSYS file but all user specific entries will remain
                                             unchanged.




4 - 122                                JULY 2006            Systems Utilities - User Guide
4.3.   DESCRIPTIONS FILE MAINTENANCE - SU31
This program enables users to enter their own file descriptions against specific description
types which are used in the programs. The system already has the standard description
types loaded.
To illustrate how this facility is used, consider the use and definition of product groups within
the system. Each inventory item in a TITAN Inventory system may be allocated a 4
character product group code. The Sales Analysis system uses these product group codes
and their respective descriptions in analysing and printing various Sales Analysis reports.
It is the definition of these product group descriptions and their respective codes that is
made within this program.
Product groups would thus be defined for use in the Sales Analysis system, for example
0010 Hand Tools, 0020 Power Tools, by using description code type PG which represents
product groups and then entering the four digit product group code and thirty character
product group description.
Enter SU31 to select the program.
To illustrate the use of this module the maintenance of a standard description code type (AR
- Area) is given at the end of this list of descriptions.
All description types which are entered identically to the area code are listed below with a
short description of where they are used.


                             STANDARD DESCRIPTION CODES
  A1        Sub-inventory descriptions.
  A2        Please refer to the Inventory user Guide Set-up and Run. These description
  A3        types refer to the three-part sub-inventory number as set up in the systems
            parameter file (IV00). These are user-defined but could for example refer to
            colour, style and size.
  AD        You will not be able to set these up as they are used by the system to hold
  ad        alternate keys for the Accounts Receivable system.
  AP        You will not be able to set these up as they are used by the system to hold
  ap        alternate keys for the Accounts Payable system.
  AR        Customer area codes.
            One of these codes are entered on each customer masterfile record. As it
            forms part of the key on the customer masterfile record, all reports printed
            from this file may optionally be sequenced by area.
            It also allows sales to be analysed by area.
  AS        Accounting section.
            This is used on the General Ledger masterfile. It provides additional flexibility
            for analysis on user-defined reports.
  BL        Last year's budget codes.*
  BT        This year's budget codes.*




SU - Maintenance                              JULY 2006                               4 - 123
                          STANDARD DESCRIPTION CODES
  BN      Next year's budget codes.*
          *
            A large number of budgets may be held on file for the periods mentioned
          above. You may select any one or all for reporting purposes.
          At the end of the financial year, the system will automatically move next year
          to this year, and this year to last year. Next year will be cleared.
  BM      Alternate sequence codes for Bill of Materials
  C1      Cashbook User Code 1 descriptions
          This is a user defined code and is used in CB30 - Bank Masterfile
          Maintenance.
  C2      Cashbook User Code 2 descriptions.
          This is a user defined code and is used in CB30 - Bank Masterfile
          Maintenance.
  CA      Accounts Payable category.
          Although these category descriptions are held on the description file, they are
          entered via program AP34 - Purchase Analysis Maintenance.
          These categories are used to analyse purchases and control the optional
          posting to the General Ledger system.
  CB      Cash Book Control Account.
  CC      Accounts Payable Control accounts.
          These descriptions are used in AP00 - System record Maintenance and
          describe the various transaction types and control accounts.
  CG      Vendor groups.
          One of these codes are entered on each vendor masterfile record. As it forms
          part of the key on the vendor masterfile record, all reports printed from this file
          may optionally be sequenced by vendor group.
  CH      Chart Types used by the Titan Chart Writer system - please refer to the
          Acuview manual for details.
  CM      Accounts Payable Alternate Category.
          Purchase categories are set up using program AP34 - Purchase Analysis
          Maintenance. However, program AP35 - Alternate Category Maintenance
          allows you to set up alternate categories, providing greater flexibility in
          reporting. The descriptions of these alternate categories are set up using this
          code.
  CN      Company Registration Number.
  CR      Vendor Purchase Category maintained by AP34 - Purchase Analysis
          Maintenance.
  CS      Cashbook category as maintained by program CB32 - Cashbook Analysis
          Category Maintenance.
  DA      Customer Alternate Sequence.
          Program AR34 - Alternate Sequence Maintenance allows you to set up a
          large number of alternate sequences by which all Accounts Receivable reports
          may be printed. The descriptions of these sequences may be entered or
          altered using this code.


4 - 124                           JULY 2006          Systems Utilities - User Guide
                         STANDARD DESCRIPTION CODES
  DI      Delivery Instructions.
          Any one of these codes may be entered at invoicing stage for printing on the
          invoice/delivery note.
  DR      Sales Category.
          These categories may only be maintained in program AR32 - Category File
          Maintenance, but are held on the descriptions file. They may also be viewed in
          program SU51 - Descriptions File Scan.
  DS      Discount reference.
          These codes are used in conjunction with discounts set up in program SP32 -
          Discount Maintenance and are used for printing on order or invoice
          documents.
  FC      Fixed Asset Control Accounts.
          These descriptions are used in FA00 - System Record Maintenance and
          describe the various transaction types and control accounts.
  GA      GL Allocation descriptions maintained in GL37 - Allocation File
          Maintenance.
  GL      Alternate sequence codes set up in GL31 - Alternate Sequence
  Gl      Maintenance.
  IB      Maintained only in IV15 - Input Inventory Budgets.
  IC      Inventory Control accounts - maintained by the system
  IV      Alternate sequence codes maintained in IV31 - Alternate Sequence
  iv      Maintenance.
  JA      Alternate sequence as maintained in JC31 - Alternate File Maintenance.
  ja
  JB      Job Costing/Estimating transaction type.
          Although the transaction types are entered and maintained on the Job Costing
          and/or Estimating systems, they are held on the description file but are not
          available for entry in this program.
  JC      Job Costing/Estimating category.
          Although the categories are entered and maintained on the Job Costing and/or
          Estimating systems, they are held on the description file but are not available
          for entry in this program.
  JP      Job Costing/Estimating Project.
          All jobs may be grouped into projects. These codes and descriptions are set up
          in this program using this type.
  JS      Job Costing/Estimating Status Code.
          Although the status codes are entered and maintained on the Job Costing
          and/or Estimating systems, they are held on the description file but are not
          available for entry.
  MP      Salaries Control Accounts.




SU - Maintenance                         JULY 2006                             4 - 125
                            STANDARD DESCRIPTION CODES
  MT       Management Reports.
           Although Management Report descriptions and parameters are entered and
           maintained in the General Ledger system, the codes and descriptions are held
           on the description file but should not be maintained in this program.
  PA       Alternate sequence codes maintained in PO31 - Alternate Sequence File
  Pa       Maintenance.
  PO         Purchase Order Reference Description.
  PP         Pay point description.
             This is used on the Weekly payroll system.
  RE         Reason Code
             This is used to enter reasons codes which may be entered in SP17 - Credit
             Note Entry provided it is on the SP00 - System Record Maintenance jump
             table.
  RG         Region Code
             This is held on the AR00 - System Record Maintenance, screen and is used to
             provide an alternate sequence on the current and history transaction files. This
             code must be entered at the 'all branches' level, i.e. branch '00'.
  RN         Range Code
             This is used in SU38 - System Password Maintenance to restrict user
             access to a range of items.
  RR         Receiver of Revenue Office.
             This is used on the Weekly payroll system.
  ST         Inventory category codes.
             When issuing inventory on the Inventory system, the issues may be analysed
             according to inventory categories set up in program IV38 - Categories/Product
             Analysis Maintenance.
  WH         Inventory and Sales Order Processing systems – set parameters for inventory
             usage and stock issue voucher numbers as well as invoice/credit note
             numbers if required.
  USER-DEFINED DESCRIPTION TYPE.
  X          Certain description types such as sub-sections of the General Ledger code are
             user-defined.
             The components of the code may be described and defined by making use of
             a description type starting with X,Y or Z.
  Y
  Z
  ALL codes starting with any other characters although not mentioned above, may in
  future be used by the system.
  It is therefore imperative that only codes starting with these three characters are used for
  user-defined description types. For an example of the fields on these codes, please
  refer to ‘XA’ in ‘ADDITIONAL DESCRIPTION TYPES’ section following this.

EXAMPLE OF A DESCRIPTION TYPE ENTRY


4 - 126                             JULY 2006         Systems Utilities - User Guide
To enter any of the description types which have been described, the following options are
available;
Level 1

DESCRIPTION TYPE                  :        2 characters.
                                           Enter a two character description type or press [F1] to
                                           scan the file of types and their descriptions on file.

DESCRIPTION CODE                  :        4 characters.
                                           When entering description codes for the first time,
                                           always create the description for the type first by
                                           pressing [F3] in the code field where the code consists
                                           of blank characters and enter the type description.
                                           For individual code descriptions, press [F1] to scan the
                                           area codes already on file within description type AR.
                                           If this code is the same as one in SU41 - Reference
                                           File Maintenance, you may enter “_MAN”. If this type
                                           is also linked to a debtor via [F7], then it means that the
                                           SU41 - Reference File Maintenance code is
                                           mandatory for that debtor and the SP1 programs will
                                           check if a blank code is entered.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - DESCRIPTIONS FILE MAINTENANCE                     SU31   11/002
     CO - 01 - HEAD OFFICE
     BR - 01 - HEAD OFFICE
     DESCRIPTION TYPE           [AR]               AREA CODE
     DESCRIPTION CODE           [BL    ]

     DESCRIPTION                [BOLAND                           ]




     F3 - UPDATE, F6 - LONG DESC, F8 - DELETE, F10 - TYPE, ESC - EXIT




Move the cursor to an existing area code and press [Enter] to accept the selection or enter
a new code.
The area description is displayed if the code already exists. Enter a new area description, for
example City Centre. Press [F3] to update the description file with this area description.




SU - Maintenance                                JULY 2006                                 4 - 127
You may also attach a long description. To do so press [F6]. A new screen as shown below
displays.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - DESCRIPTIONS FILE MAINTENANCE                   SU31 11/002
     CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED                                ttyp0
     BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN
     DESCRIPTION TYPE            [XM]            MEDICAL AID
     DESCRIPTION CODE            [SANM]

     DESCRIPTION                 [SANMED                       ]
                                 [                             ]
     A1                           [ ]
     A2       +------------ LONG DESCRIPTION ------------+
              ¦ PLEASE SUBMIT THIS ACCOUNT DIRECTLY TO Y ¦
     AMOUNT   ¦ OUR MEDICAL AID.                         ¦
              ¦ SIGN THE BOTTOM.                         ¦
     N2       ¦                                          ¦
              ¦                                          ¦
              ¦                                          ¦
              +------------------------------------------+

     F3 - UPDATE, F6 - LONG DESC, F8 - DELETE, F10 - PREV, ESC - EXIT



LONG DESCRIPTION                   240 characters
                                        This allows you to enter 6 lines of up to 40 characters
                                        each. These lines - concatenated in pairs of two - may
                                        optionally be printed on statements (AR91 - Form
                                        Print) and invoices (SP70 - Invoice Form Print),
                                        provided this is specified in AR00 - System record
                                        Maintenance.
To return to the company/branch selection prompt, press [F10].
Press [F8] to delete the product code and description.




4 - 128                                 JULY 2006        Systems Utilities - User Guide
ADDITIONAL DESCRIPTION TYPES
Description types which carry additional information will be described individually in detail on
the following pages.
                            ADDITIONAL DESCRIPTION TYPES
  BI       Banklink Interface Types.
           These are used where you use the Banklink system in conjunction with the
           Titan Cashbook. The description type must denote the type of interface, for
           example, CATS, CAMS, BEST, NED or ABSA.
  CY       Currency conversion codes used in the Payroll system.
  D1-7     Transport mode details. (User-defined field.)
  DC       Accounts Receivable Control Accounts.
           These descriptions are used in AR00 - System Record Maintenance and
           describe the various transaction types and control accounts. This type allows you
           to enter a long description which will be used for statement printing, and a short
           description, which will be used on enquiries and other reports.
  DG       Debtors groups.
           One of these codes is entered on each customer masterfile record. As it forms
           part of the key on the customer masterfile record, all reports printed from this file
           may optionally be sequenced by customer group. In addition the transaction date
           option for invoices/credit notes may be set per debtors group provided the option
           is set in SP00 - System Record Maintenance.
  DT       Customer terms
  FM       Soft formulae
  FN       Fonts
  IS       Instalment sales arrears interest rate and finance charges
  OC       Occupation description
  PD       Sundry codes for Purchase Ordering
  PG       Product group code
  PM       Payment method.
  PR       Prefix (for document numbers)
  PS       Inventory category markup for Purchase Orders
  P1-4     Customer special codes
  RC       Route code description.
  RP       Representative codes
  RS       Range size descriptions
  RT       Range size description (greater than 3)
  SC       Sundry codes
  S1       Sales Analysis code 1




SU - Maintenance                             JULY 2006                               4 - 129
                            ADDITIONAL DESCRIPTION TYPES
  S2        Sales analysis code 2.
            This is a user-defined description type, allowing an additional analysis code to be
            entered at invoicing stage. For instance it could be used to distinguish special
            promotion invoices from normal ones.
  TT        Transaction type for Cash Book.
  USER-DEFINED DESCRIPTION TYPE.
  WH           Warehouse code.
               The Inventory system optionally make use of warehouse locations. The
               numbers and descriptions must be set up in SU31 - Descriptions File
               Maintenance. In addition if you wish to number invoices/credit notes by
               warehouse, you will have to enter details here.
  X            Certain description types such as sub-sections of the General Ledger code are
               user-defined.
               The components of the code may be described and defined by making use of
               a description type starting with X,Y or Z.
  Y
  Z
  ALL codes starting with any other characters although not mentioned above, may in future
  be used by the system.
  It is therefore imperative that only codes starting with these three characters are used for
  user-defined description types. For an example of the fields on these codes, please refer
  to ‘XA’ in this section.




4 - 130                            JULY 2006          Systems Utilities - User Guide
CURRENCY CONVERSION - CY

BANKLINK INTERFACE TYPES - BI
These are used where you use the Banklink system in conjunction with the Titan Cashbook.
The description type must denote the type of interface, for example, CATS, CAMS, BEST,
NED or ABSA.
The additional details described below relate ONLY to ABSA.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - DESCRIPTIONS FILE MAINTENANCE                     SU31   10/011
     CO - 01 - SEAGULL SOFTWARE CC
     BR - 01 - MAIN BRANCH
     DESCRIPTION TYPE           [BI]               BANKLINK INTERFACE TYPES
     DESCRIPTION CODE           [ABSA]             NOT ON FILE

     DESCRIPTION                [                                ]
     BANKREF                    [1]                1 - POSITION 266 - CATG
                                                   2 - POSITION 270 - FUNCTION




     F3-UPDATE, F6-LONG DESC, F10-TYPE, ESC-EXIT




Enter the following details;

BANKREF                             :    1 character.
                                         Select the field to use as the Bank Reference, either
                                         the category or the function.




SU - Maintenance                              JULY 2006                                   4 - 131
CURRENCY CONVERSION - CY
This conversion factor is used in the following systems;
This currency code is used in the Monthly Payroll system to indicate the symbol for the
currency such as [$] and the symbol for coinage [c]. In addition the number of coins per unit
is indicated, for example 100 cents to the Dollar. These must be entered to provide a
coinage analysis.

BASE CURRENCY
DESCRIPTION CODE                   :     4 characters.
                                         To enter details for the base currency press [F3] in the
                                         description code when it is filled with blanks.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - DESCRIPTIONS FILE MAINTENANCE                    SU31    11/001
     CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED
     BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN
     DESCRIPTION TYPE            [CY]             DOLLAR
     DESCRIPTION CODE            [     ]
     CURRENCY SIGN               [$]
     COIN SYMBOL                 [C]
     CURRENCY SHORT DESCRIPTION [DOLL]
     CURRENCY LONG DESCRIPTION   [DOLLAR       ]
     FACTOR                 $1 = [ 100]C
     DENOMINATIONS: HIGHEST                                                     LOWEST
     NOTES ($)     [      50] [       20] [      10] [        5] [      2] [         1]
     COINS (C)     [      50] [      20] [      10] [         5] [      2] [         1]




     F3 - UPDATE, F8 - DELETE, F10 - TYPE, ESC - EXIT




Enter the following details;

CURRENCY SIGN                      :     1 character.
                                         This is the symbol to be used by the system, for
                                         example [$].

COIN SYMBOL                        :     1 character.
                                         This is the symbol to be used by the system for
                                         example [c].

CURRENCY SHORT
DESCRIPTION                        :     4 characters.
                                         For example [DOLL]

CURRENCY LONG                      :
DESCRIPTION                        :     15 characters.




4 - 132                                JULY 2006           Systems Utilities - User Guide
FACTOR                           :    4 digits.
                                      Enter the number of units (coin symbol) in each
                                      currency, such as 100 cents to the dollar.

DENOMINATIONS NOTES              :    8 digits
                                      There are six fields for possible note denominations, for
                                      example;
                                      100, 50, 20, 10, 5, 1.
                                      These run from the highest to the lowest.

DENOMINATIONS COINS              :    8 digits.
                                      There are six fields for possible coin denominations, for
                                      example;
                                      50, 20, 10, 5, 2, 1.
                                      These run from the highest to the lowest.

 Not all six fields need to be used. However, the field used will determine the
 position when the value is eventually printed on the payslip.


FOREIGN CURRENCIES
DESCRIPTION CODE                 :    4 characters.
                                      Press [F1] to scan the currency codes on file within
                                      description type CY move the cursor to the currency
                                      code required and press [Enter] to accept the
                                      selection.

DESCRIPTION                      :    30 characters.
                                      Enter the required description.

EXCHANGE RATE                    :    5.4 digits.
                                      The rate of exchange used is the foreign currency to
                                      the base currency entered on the code containing
                                      blanks, for example 1 US Dollar = 2 pounds sterling if
                                      sterling is the base currency.


Press [F3] to update the currency file with this new exchange rate.




SU - Maintenance                            JULY 2006                              4 - 133
USER-DEFINED FIELD - D1 to D7
These user-defined codes can be used to detail transportation modes, collection details,
railway siding names, shipping details etc. They are used in conjunction with delivery
address to print on sales order processing documents.

DESCRIPTION TYPE                    :     2 characters.
                                          Scan the file for code i.e. [D1] or enter it.

DESCRIPTION CODE                    :     4 characters.
                                          Enter the code or press [F1] to scan the Customer term
                                          codes on file. Press [Enter] to accept the selection.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - DESCRIPTIONS FILE MAINTENANCE                      SU31   11/001
     CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED
     BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN
     DESCRIPTION TYPE            [D1]            TRANSPORT MODE
     DESCRIPTION CODE            [1   ]
     DESCRIPTION                   [BY TRUCK                      ]
     REFERENCE                     [899-6543FG]




     F3 - UPDATE, F8 - DELETE, F10 - TYPE, ESC - EXIT




Enter the following term fields;

DESCRIPTION                         :     30 characters.

REFERENCE                           :     10 characters.




4 - 134                                 JULY 2006          Systems Utilities - User Guide
ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE CONTROL ACCOUNTS - DC
These terms are used to set up descriptions for transaction types to be used by the
Accounts Receivable system. These codes and default descriptions are created when you
run AR00 - System Record Maintenance, for the first time.

DESCRIPTION TYPE                    :     2 characters.
                                          Scan the file for [DC] or enter it.

DESCRIPTION CODE                    :     4 characters.
                                          Enter the code or press [F1] to scan the Customer
                                          codes on file. Press [Enter] to accept the selection.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - DESCRIPTIONS FILE MAINTENANCE                   SU31 11/001
     CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED
     BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN
     DESCRIPTION TYPE            [DC]            ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE CONTR. A/C
     DESCRIPTION CODE            [DRCN]
     DESCRIPTION                   [CREDIT NOTE         ]
     TRANSACTION TYPE              [CRN]




     F3 - UPDATE, F8 - DELETE, F10 - TYPE, ESC - EXIT




Enter the following term fields;

DESCRIPTION                         :     20 characters.
                                          This is used on the System parameter file and
                                          statements.

TRANSACTION TYPE                    :     3 characters
                                          This is used for enquiry/display purposes on programs
                                          such as AR50 - Customer File Enquiry/Print and
                                          AR11 - Payment Input.




SU - Maintenance                                  JULY 2006                            4 - 135
DEBTORS GROUPS - DG
One of these codes is entered on each customer masterfile record. As it forms part of the
key on the customer masterfile record, all reports printed from this file may optionally be
sequenced by customer group. In addition the transaction date option for invoices/credit
notes may be set per debtors group provided the option is set in SP00 - System Record
Maintenance.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - DESCRIPTIONS FILE MAINTENANCE                     SU31   11/003
     CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED
     BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN
     DESCRIPTION TYPE           [DG]             ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE GROUP
     DESCRIPTION CODE           [0010]

     DESCRIPTION                [WHOLESALERS                      ]
     SP - DATE ON IV/AR TRS     [ ]     I-INVOICE
                                        D-DEL DATE
                                        L-LATEST DEL DATE




     F3-UPDATE, F6-LONG DESC, F8-DELETE, F10-TYPE, ESC-EXIT



SP DATE ON IV/AR TRS              :      1 character
                                         [I] , [D] or [L]
                                         Only one date is held on each stock/debtors
                                         transaction. Select the appropriate date for your
                                         organisation.
                                         If you select [I], the invoice date will be used when
                                         writing to the stock or debtors transaction file.
                                         If you select [D], the delivery date entered on invoices
                                         and orders will overwrite the invoice date in all cases.
                                         If you select [L], the latest delivery date will be used.
                                         SP14 - Release Picked Quantity to Invoice will
                                         change the invoice date to the latest if this is set.




4 - 136                                JULY 2006            Systems Utilities - User Guide
CUSTOMER TERMS - DT
These terms are used to calculate settlement discount on customer receipts. They may also
be used to calculate interest on overdue accounts.

DESCRIPTION TYPE                    :    2 characters.
                                         Scan the file for [DT] or enter it.

DESCRIPTION CODE                    :    4 characters.
                                         Enter the code or press [F1] to scan the Customer term
                                         codes on file. Press [Enter] to accept the selection.

      SYSTEM UTILITIES - DESCRIPTIONS FILE MAINTENANCE                    SU31   11/001
      CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED
      BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN
      DESCRIPTION TYPE            [DT]            TERMS
      DESCRIPTION CODE            [0010]
      DESCRIPTION                  [STANDARD TERMS               ]
                    TERMS : [10.00] % FOR [ 15] DAYS
                            [ 5.00] % FOR [ 30] DAYS
                                  NET FOR [ 60] DAYS
                    FROM DOC OR M/E DATE   [D]




      F3 - UPDATE, F8 - DELETE, F10 - TYPE, ESC - EXIT




Enter the following term fields;

DESCRIPTION                         :    30 characters.

TERMS %                             :    2.2 digits.

FOR                                 :    3 digits.
                                         Enter the percentage discount and the number of days
                                         outstanding to which the discount applies. These two
                                         fields occur twice.

NET FOR                             :    3 digits.
                                         Enter the number of days for net payment terms for
                                         example 60 days.




SU - Maintenance                               JULY 2006                                  4 - 137
FROM DOC OR
M/E DATE                         :     1 character.
                                       Enter a [D] for document or [M] for month end. This will
                                       determine the date from which settlement discount is to
                                       be calculated.
                                       For those items containing an [M] a statement date will
                                       be written to the file during the Accounts Receivable
                                       month-end routine.
                                       For those items containing a [D], the due date will be
                                       calculated as the records are written to the debtors
                                       transaction file. The following programs are involved in
                                       the calculation of the due date.
                                       AR10 - Invoice/Credit Note Input .
                                       AR20 - Batch Input.
                                       AR21 - Batch Update.
                                       SP91 - Interface to AR and SA.
                                       You may optionally print the due dates on statements
                                       using AR91 - Statement/Form Print, provided you
                                       have specified this field in SU35 - Customised Form
                                       Maintenance, form type 'ST'.


Press [F3] to update the description file with this detail. To return to the company/branch
selection prompt, press [F10]. Press [F8] to delete the code and description.




4 - 138                              JULY 2006        Systems Utilities - User Guide
FONTS - FN

These fonts may be used in all the soft forms set up in program SU35 - Customised Form
Maintenance, as well as in the Report Writer System.

DESCRIPTION TYPE                  :        2 characters.
                                           Scan the file for [FN] or enter it.

DESCRIPTION CODE                  :        4 characters.
                                           Enter the code or press [F1] to scan the Font codes on
                                           file. Press [Enter] to accept the selection.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - DESCRIPTIONS FILE MAINTENANCE                       SU31   11/002
     CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED
     BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN
     DESCRIPTION TYPE           [FN]                FONTS
     DESCRIPTION CODE           [0001]              NOT ON FILE

     DESCRIPTION                [OKI 520 IBM                       ]
     FONT HEX ESC SEQUENCE      [1B104108313030353130303000000000]




     F3 - UPDATE, F10 - TYPE, ESC - EXIT



FONT HEX
ESC SEQUENCE                      :        32 characters
                                           Enter the hexadecimal escape sequence for the font
                                           relating to your printer. You will find these sequences in
                                           your printer manual.




SU - Maintenance                                 JULY 2006                                  4 - 139
INSTALMENT SALES ARREAR INTEREST - IS
This description type is used by the Instalment sales system to calculate interest on overdue
contracts.

DESCRIPTION TYPE                    :       2 characters.
                                            Enter or scan the file for [IS].

DESCRIPTION CODE                    :       4 characters.
                                            Enter the code or press [F1] to scan the codes already
                                            on file and press [Enter] to accept the selection.

DESCRIPTION                         :       30 characters.
                                            Enter the representative's name and press [Enter] to
                                            accept.

ARREARS INTEREST RATE               :       3.4 digits.
                                            Enter the rate to be used to calculate arrears interest
                                            on contracts.

FINANCE CHARGE RATE                 :       3.4 digits
                                            Enter the rate to be uses by the system for calculating
                                            finance charges.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - DESCRIPTIONS FILE MAINTENANCE                          SU31   11/004
     CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED
     BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN
     DESCRIPTION TYPE           [IS]                 CONTRACT RATES - INSTALMENT SL
     DESCRIPTION CODE           [1      ]

     DESCRIPTION                [1988/89 BOND RATE                  ]
     ARREARS INTEREST RATE      [       20.0000 %]
     FINANCE CHARGE RATE        [       0.0000 %]




     F3 - UPDATE, F6 - LONG DESC, F8 - DELETE, F10 - TYPE, ESC - EXIT




4 - 140                                 JULY 2006            Systems Utilities - User Guide
OCCUPATION DESCRIPTION - OC
This description type is used on the Weekly Payroll system to clarify report details.

DESCRIPTION TYPE                  :     2 characters.
                                        Enter or scan the file for [OC].

DESCRIPTION CODE                  :     4 characters.
                                        Enter the code or press [F1] to scan the codes already
                                        on file and press [Enter] to accept the selection.

DESCRIPTION                       :     30 characters.
                                        Enter a description relevant to this code and press
                                        [Enter] to accept.

PATTERSON
GRADE NUMBER                      :     5 characters.
                                        This number is used for Union reporting and is optional.
                                        This same field is also available on the employee
                                        masterfile as entered in program WP30 - Masterfile
                                        Maintenance.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - DESCRIPTIONS FILE MAINTENANCE                  SU31   11/001
     CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED
     BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN
     DESCRIPTION TYPE            [OC]            OCCUPATION CODES
     DESCRIPTION CODE            [0001]
     DESCRIPTION                [LABOURER                      ]
     PATTERSON GRADE NUMBER     [00000]




     F3 - UPDATE, F8 - DELETE, F10 - TYPE, ESC - EXIT




SU - Maintenance                              JULY 2006                                4 - 141
PRODUCT GROUP DESCRIPTION - PG
These codes are held on individual Inventory Masterfile records. As it forms part of a key, all
inventory reports may optionally be printed in product group sequence. Sales may also be
analysed by product group.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - DESCRIPTIONS FILE MAINTENANCE                   SU31   11/001
     CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED
     BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN
     DESCRIPTION TYPE           [PG]             PRODUCT GROUPS
     DESCRIPTION CODE           [0010]
     DESCRIPTION                [ASSORTED TAPS                    ]
     SALES TARGET               [30000.00   ]
     TARGET GP%                 [ 37.50 %




     F3 - UPDATE, F8 - DELETE, F10 - TYPE, ESC - EXIT



DESCRIPTION TYPE                  :      2 characters.
                                         Enter or scan the file for [PG].

DESCRIPTION CODE                  :      4 characters.
                                         Enter the code or press [F1] to scan the rep. codes
                                         already on file and press [Enter] to accept the
                                         selection.

DESCRIPTION                       :      30 characters.
                                         Enter the product group description and press [Enter]
                                         to accept.

SALES TARGET                      :      7.2 digits.
                                         This is an optional field which is not used by the
                                         system. It may however be accessed with the Report
                                         Writer system to be used on user-defined reports.

TARGET GP%                        :      3.2 digits.
                                         This is an optional field which is not used by the
                                         system. It may however be accessed with the Report
                                         Writer system to be used on user-defined reports.




4 - 142                               JULY 2006          Systems Utilities - User Guide
PAYMENT METHOD - PM
Any one of these codes may be entered on order and invoice headers in the Sales Order
Processing system. You may also enter a default payment method for each individual debtor
in the Accounts Receivable system.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - DESCRIPTIONS FILE MAINTENANCE                         SU31   11/006
     CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED
     BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN
     DESCRIPTION TYPE           [PM]               PAYMENT METHOD
     DESCRIPTION CODE           [CSH    ]            CASH

     DESCRIPTION                [                                   ]
     CASH ANALYSIS              [ ]               BLANK-ACCOUNT
                                                      1-MULTIPLE
     SU32 REFERENCE CODE        [ ]                   2-CASH
                                                      3-CHEQUE
     ROUND DOWN TO NEAREST       [      0.00]         4-CREDIT
                                                      5-BUYAID
                                                      6-OTHER (EFT)
                                                      M-MANUAL EFT




     F3 - UPDATE, F10 - TYPE, ESC - EXIT



DESCRIPTION TYPE                    :      2 characters.
                                           Enter or scan the file for [pm].

DESCRIPTION CODE                    :      4 characters.
                                           Enter the code or press [F1] to scan the Payment
                                           Method codes already on file and press [Enter] to
                                           accept the selection.

DESCRIPTION                         :      30 characters.
                                           Enter the description and press [Enter] to accept.




SU - Maintenance                                 JULY 2006                                    4 - 143
CASH ANALYSIS         :     1 digit
                            [ ] this blank default indicates on account
                            [1] Multiple
                            [2] Cash
                            [3] Cheque
                            [4] Credit Card
                            [5] Buy Aid
                            [6] Other (EFT)
                            [M] Manual EFT
                            If this is non-blank, the Sales Order Processing system
                            will allow you to enter an amount tendered for the
                            payment method selected for a customer. If you
                            selected option [1] - Multiple, the customer will be able
                            to pay with a combination of these methods. For more
                            information on Point-of-Sale features, please refer to
                            Appendix A4 in the Sales Order Processing manual.
                            If you select option [6] then SP10 and SP14 will
                            automatically fill in the amount and no manual override
                            will be allowed.
                            If you have created an EFT type, then enter an [M].
                            This will cause SP10 - Order Entry to ask for the EFT
                            amount. The difference between this and the total of
                            the invoice, will be posted ‘ON ACCOUNT’.

SU32 REFERENCE CODE   :     1 digit
                            This enables you to have a range of invoice numbers
                            for different payment methods.
                            If you leave this blank, the system will use the normal
                            invoice range.
                            However, you may enter any code from 1 to 9 to
                            indicate a different range. If you do so, you must go to
                            SU32 - Numbers File Maintenance, and enter the
                            relevant details for the reference that you enter here.

ROUND DOWN TO NEAREST :     6.2 digits
                            If you wish programs SP10/14 to round all cash
                            payments down and add the difference to the discount,
                            then you should enter the amount here. For instance, if
                            payments should be rounded down to the nearest 5
                            cents, you will enter .05.




4 - 144                   JULY 2006        Systems Utilities - User Guide
PREFIX – PR
These prefixes are used to link to a specified numbering sequence. This numbering
sequence will then be used by the relevant programs.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - DESCRIPTIONS FILE MAINTENANCE                         SU31   11/008
     CO - 01 - SEAGULL SOFTWARE CC
     BR - 01 - MAIN BRANCH
     DESCRIPTION TYPE           [PR]               PREFIXES
     DESCRIPTION CODE           [IS    ]           NOT ON FILE

     DESCRIPTION                [ITERNAL REQUISITIONS             ]


     SU32 REFERENCE CODE        [W]




     F3-UPDATE, F6-LONG DESC, F10-TYPE, ESC-EXIT



DESCRIPTION TYPE                  :        2 characters.
                                           Enter or scan the file for [PR].

DESCRIPTION CODE                  :        4 characters.
                                           Enter the code or press [F1] to scan the prefix codes
                                           already on file and press [Enter] to accept the
                                           selection.

DESCRIPTION                       :        30 characters.
                                           Enter the description and press [Enter] to accept.

SU32 REFERNCE CODE                :        1 character.




SU - Maintenance                                 JULY 2006                                    4 - 145
PURCHASE ORDER AUTOMATIC SELLING PRICE MARKUP - PS
These codes refer to the first part of the inventory number (when it is specified as [PS] in
IV00 - System Record Maintenance. Any inventory code starting with a code within this
description type will have selling prices automatically updated according to this mark-up
percentage, if the option determining this is set in the Purchase Order Parameter File.

DESCRIPTION TYPE                  :     2 characters.
                                        Enter or scan the file for [PS].

DESCRIPTION CODE                  :     4 characters.
                                        Enter the code or press [F1] to scan the inventory
                                        category codes already on file and press [Enter] to
                                        accept the selection.

DESCRIPTION                       :     30 characters.
                                        Enter the description and press [Enter] to accept.

INVENTORY
CATEGORY % MARK UP                :     2.3 digits.


Press [F3] to update the description file with these details and press [F10] to return to the
company/branch selection or press [F8] to delete the code and description.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - DESCRIPTIONS FILE MAINTENANCE                   SU31 11/001
     CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED
     BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN
     DESCRIPTION TYPE            [PS]            AUTOMATIC SELLING PRICE MARKUP
     DESCRIPTION CODE            [1200]
     DESCRIPTION                [HAMMER                         ]
     STOCK CATEGORY % MARK UP   [40.00 ] %




     F3 - UPDATE, F8 - DELETE, F10 - TYPE, ESC - EXIT




4 - 146                               JULY 2006         Systems Utilities - User Guide
CUSTOMER SPECIAL CODES - P1 TO P4
These are only used in conjunction with the special customised module for piecework input
into the Weekly Wages Module.
For more information contact your Support Office.

ROUTE CODE - RC
A route code is normally associated with a specific delivery address. This may be printed on
invoices/delivery notes. It also allows the analysis of sales by route code in the Sales
Analysis module.

DESCRIPTION TYPE                  :     2 characters.
                                        Enter or scan the file for [RC].

DESCRIPTION CODE                  :     4 characters.
                                        Enter the code or press [F1] to scan the route codes
                                        already on file and press [Enter] to accept the
                                        selection.

DESCRIPTION                       :     30 characters.
                                        Enter the route description press [Enter] to accept.

ROUTE
ACCOUNT NUMBER                    :     5.4 digits.
                                        This is a memorandum field and is not used by the
                                        system.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - DESCRIPTIONS FILE MAINTENANCE                      SU31   11/001
     CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED
     BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN
     DESCRIPTION TYPE            [RC]            ROUTE CODE
     DESCRIPTION CODE            [0010]
     DESCRIPTION                [SOUTHERN SUBURBS              ]
     ROUTE ACCOUNT NUMBER       [H.T. ]




     F3 - UPDATE, F8 - DELETE, F10 - TYPE, ESC - EXIT




SU - Maintenance                              JULY 2006                                    4 - 147
SALESMEN'S NAMES AND COMMISSION RATES - RP
These codes are held on individual customer masterfile records. As it forms part of a key, all
customer reports may optionally be printed in representative number sequence. Sales may
also be analysed by representative and commission will be calculated by the Sales Analysis
system according to the commission rate held.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - DESCRIPTIONS FILE MAINTENANCE                       SU31   11/001
     CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED
     BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN
     DESCRIPTION TYPE           [RP]              SALESMEN NAMES AND COMM. RATES
     DESCRIPTION CODE           [0010]

     DESCRIPTION                [JACK WALTERS                    ]
     REPS COMMISSION RATE       [50.0000     %]
     COMMISSION PAYABLE FROM    [        0.00 ]
                          TO    [999999999.00 ]




     F3 - UPDATE, F8 - DELETE, F10 - TYPE, ESC - EXIT



DESCRIPTION TYPE                  :      2 characters.
                                         Enter or scan the file for [RP].

DESCRIPTION CODE                  :      4 characters.
                                         Enter the code or press [F1] to scan the salesmen.
                                         codes already on file and press [Enter] to accept the
                                         selection.

DESCRIPTION                       :      30 characters.
                                         Enter the representative's name and press [Enter] to
                                         accept.

REPS COMMISSION RATE              :      5.4 digits.
                                         Enter the rate applicable for this salesman for this value
                                         range.




4 - 148                                JULY 2006         Systems Utilities - User Guide
The values entered below are memorandum items and are not used by the normal
programs. They are available to you in the Report Writer system, where you may use or
manipulate them as required.


COMMISSION
PAYABLE FROM                      :    7.2 digits.

COMMISSION
PAYABLE TO                        :    7.2 digits


Press [F3] to update the description file with these details and press [F10] to return to the
company/branch selection or press [F8] to delete the code and description.




SU - Maintenance                             JULY 2006                               4 - 149
RANGE SIZE DESCRIPTIONS - RS
These codes are held on individual inventory masterfile records in the "packing reference"
field. It is used on all user-defined forms in the Inventory, Sales and Purchase ordering
systems.
It is also used in the Purchase Ordering system when capturing free range format orders.
     SYSTEM UTILITIES - DESCRIPTIONS FILE MAINTENANCE                       SU31   11/001
     CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED
     BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN
     DESCRIPTION TYPE            [RS]            RANGE OF SIZES
     DESCRIPTION CODE            [0001]

     SIZES   : [28   ]   [42   ]
               [30   ]   [44   ]
               [32   ]   [46   ]
               [34   ]   [48   ]
               [36   ]   [50   ]
               [38   ]   [52   ]
               [40   ]   [54   ]




     F3 - UPDATE, F8 - DELETE, F10 - TYPE, ESC - EXIT



DESCRIPTION TYPE                   :     2 characters.
                                         Enter or scan the file for [RS].

DESCRIPTION CODE                   :     4 characters.
                                         Enter the code or press [F1] to scan the range codes.
                                         codes already on file and press [Enter] to accept the
                                         selection.

SIZES                              :     3 characters.
                                         Fourteen sizes of three characters each may be
                                         entered for each code. All unused sizes must be filled
                                         with blanks.

 If you leave these blank, the system will set up headings automatically when
 printing. These will then only pertain to the actual sizes sold and will not include
 the whole range of sizes.
Press [F3] to update the description file with these details and press [F10] to return to the
company/branch selection or press [F8] to delete the code and description.

 If any size description is greater than three characters, any number prefixed by
 an "R" may be entered in any of the 14 fields. The system will then look up the
 description under type [RT] for that code, for example if [R23] is entered in any of
 the fields, the system will look up code [R23] under description type "RT" to find
 the description.




4 - 150                                JULY 2006         Systems Utilities - User Guide
RANGE SIZE DESCRIPTIONS - RT
This description type is used where type RS described previously provides insufficient space
for size descriptions. A link between an RS type description and an RT type will be
established.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - DESCRIPTIONS FILE MAINTENANCE                    SU31   11/001
     CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED
     BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN
     DESCRIPTION TYPE            [RT]            RANGE SIZE DESCRIPTIONS
     DESCRIPTION CODE            [R23 ]
     DESCRIPTION                 [HATS 6 3/4 TO 7 1/2              ]




     F3 - UPDATE, F10 - TYPE, ESC - EXIT



DESCRIPTION TYPE                  :        2 characters.
                                           Enter or scan the file for [RT].

DESCRIPTION CODE                  :        4 characters.
                                           Enter the code or press [F1] to scan the range codes.
                                           Codes already on file and press [Enter] to accept the
                                           selection.

 All the codes must start with an "R".

DESCRIPTION                       :        30 characters
                                           You may enter a description of up to 30 characters to
                                           describe the size.


Press [F3] to update the description file with these details and press [F10] to return to the
company/branch selection or press [F8] to delete the code and description.




SU - Maintenance                                 JULY 2006                               4 - 151
SUNDRY CHARGES - SC
Sundry charges are used by the Sales Order Processing system. Any of these codes may
be entered on the invoices. Under certain circumstances the value of the charge will be
calculated by the system.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - DESCRIPTIONS FILE MAINTENANCE                         SU31   11/001
     CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED
     BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN
     DESCRIPTION TYPE           [SC]               SUNDRY CHARGES
     DESCRIPTION CODE           [1     ]

     DESCRIPTION                [RAILAGE                            ]
     SUNDRY CHARGE              [     10.0000 ]
     MULTIPLY BY                [N] GROSS/NET/QUANTITY
     TAX RATE                   [0]
     SUNDRY CHARGE %? (Y/N)     [Y]
     INCLUSIVE OF TAX (Y/N)     [ ] N - EXCLUSIVE




     F3 - UPDATE, F8 - DELETE, F10 - TYPE, ESC - EXIT



DESCRIPTION TYPE                  :        2 characters.
                                           Enter or scan the file for [SC].

DESCRIPTION CODE                  :        4 characters.
                                           Enter the code or press [F1] to scan the sundry
                                           charges already on file and press [Enter] to accept the
                                           selection. If this code has not already been set up in
                                           AR32 - Category File Maintenance, the code will not
                                           be accepted and the operator will be required to go to
                                           that program and enter the code there first.

DESCRIPTION                       :        30 characters.
                                           Enter the representative's name and press [Enter] to
                                           accept.

SUNDRY CHARGE                     :        7.2 digits.
                                           This may either be an absolute value or a percentage
                                           of [G]ross, [N]et or [Q]uantity total of the order/invoice.

MULTIPLY BY                       :        1 character.
                                           The value above will either used in a calculation using
                                           the gross or net value or the quantity of the order, or, if
                                           this field is left blank, the value entered will be used as
                                           an absolute but may be altered at invoicing stage.




4 - 152                                JULY 2006           Systems Utilities - User Guide
TAX RATE                 :   1 digit.
                             This refers to the rates set up on program AR31 - Tax
                             category Maintenance. The value entered here will
                             determine the tax rate applicable to the specific sundry
                             charge.

SUNDRY CHARGE %          :   Y/N
                             If you enter [Y] this indicates that the sundry charge is
                             a percentage and not a fixed amount.

INCLUSIVE OF TAX (Y/N)   :   Y/N
                             This will be used by program SP10 - Order Entry
                             when capturing orders/invoices and the required
                             calculations will be made accordingly.




SU - Maintenance                  JULY 2006                                 4 - 153
SALES ANALYSIS CODE 1 - S1
This description type is user-defined and may be entered on any invoice header in order to
provide a level of analysis additional to the normal product and customer groups.
The details entered on each code will override normal defaults such as price and discount
codes and normal tax parameters held on the customer and inventory masterfiles.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - DESCRIPTIONS FILE MAINTENANCE                         SU31   11/023
     CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED
     BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN
     DESCRIPTION TYPE           [S1]               SALES ANALYSIS CODE 1
     DESCRIPTION CODE           [0001]             NOT ON FILE

     DESCRIPTION                [                                  ]
     PRICE #                    [09]
     TAX RATE                   [%]      % - DEFAULTS TO CUSTOMERS TAX CATEGORY
     DISC/SURCHARGE #           [09]
     OVERALL DISC #             [09]
                                    9 - DEFAULTS TO CUSTOMERS PRICE
                                        AND DISCOUNT/SURCHARGES


     F3 - UPDATE, F10 - TYPE, ESC - EXIT



DESCRIPTION TYPE                    :      2 characters.
                                           Enter or scan the file for [S1].

DESCRIPTION CODE                    :      4 characters.
                                           Enter the code or press [F1] to scan the sales analysis
                                           codes already on file and press [Enter] to accept the
                                           selection.

DESCRIPTION                         :      30 characters.
                                           Enter the representative's name and press [Enter] to
                                           accept.

PRICE #                             :      2 digits.
                                           Enter the default price to be used when this analysis
                                           code is used on the order/invoice header.
                                           A [9] entered here will cause the record to have no
                                           effect on any of the normal defaults.

TAX RATE                            :      1 character.
                                           If a [%] sign is entered here, the customer tax category
                                           will be taken as the default. Any other character should
                                           be as set up in program AR31 - Tax category
                                           Maintenance.




4 - 154                                 JULY 2006          Systems Utilities - User Guide
DISC/SURCHARGE #                  :    2 digits.
                                       Enter the default discount/surcharge number to be
                                       used when this analysis code is used on the
                                       order/invoice header. This is read from the records
                                       entered in SP32 - Discount/Price Matrix.
                                       A [9] entered here will cause the record to have no
                                       effect on any of the normal defaults.

OVERALL DISCOUNT #                :    2 digits.
                                       Enter the default overall discount number to be used
                                       when this analysis code is used on the order/invoice
                                       header. This is read from the records entered in SP32 -
                                       Discount/Price Matrix.
                                       A [9] entered here will cause the record to have no
                                       effect on any of the normal defaults.

Press [F3] to update the description file with these details and press [F10] to return to the
company/branch selection or press [F8] to delete the code and description.




SU - Maintenance                             JULY 2006                               4 - 155
Sales analysis code 2 - S2
This is a user-defined description type, allowing an additional analysis code to be entered at
invoicing stage. For instance it could be used to distinguish special promotion invoices from
normal ones.
It may also be used to suppress the use of messages in the Sales Order Processing and
Inventory Systems.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - DESCRIPTIONS FILE MAINTENANCE                     SU31   11/006
     CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED
     BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN
     DESCRIPTION TYPE           [S2]               SALES TYPE
     DESCRIPTION CODE           [S     ]

     DESCRIPTION                [SAMPLE SALES                     ]

     IV MESSAGE 1               [I]
     IV MESSAGE 2               [I]




     F3 - UPDATE, F8 - DELETE, F10 - TYPE, ESC - EXIT



DESCRIPTION TYPE                  :        2 characters
                                           Scan the file for code ‘S2’.

DESCRIPTION CODE                  :        4 characters
                                           Enter a new code of press [F1] to scan the codes
                                           already on file. Press [Enter] to accept the selection.

DESCRIPTION                       :        30 characters
                                           Enter a description for this code.

IV MESSAGE 1                      :        1 character
                                           Enter an ‘I’ in this field if you want the message system
                                           in the Sales Order Processing and Inventory Systems
                                           to ignore message 1 on an order where this code is
                                           entered on the header.

IV MESSAGE 2                      :        1 character
                                           Enter an ‘I’ in this field if you want the message system
                                           in the Sales Order Processing and Inventory Systems
                                           to ignore message 2 on an order where this code is
                                           entered on the header.
Press [F3] to update the file with the new information.




4 - 156                                JULY 2006           Systems Utilities - User Guide
TRANSACTION TYPES - TT

There are 3 default transaction types set up when running CB00 - System Record
Maintenance, namely CHQ, DEP and JNL. These may be edited to suit the user.
If you use the Bank Link system in conjunction with the Cash Book, the banks will provide
you with a list of existing statement codes and their descriptions. You must enter ALL of
these.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - DESCRIPTIONS FILE MAINTENANCE                        SU31   11/107
     CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED
     BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN
     DESCRIPTION TYPE            [TT]             TRANSACTION TYPES
     DESCRIPTION CODE            [DEP ]

     DESCRIPTION                 [DEPOSITS                       ]
     TRANSACTION TYPE            [1]              1-dep,2-pay,3-jrn
     SIGN (+/-)                  [+]
     BANK REF                    [         ]
     TOTAL FOR MONTH             [       500.00 ]
     NUMBERING                   [1]              0 - Manual
                                                  1 - Next Deposit
     (NB MATCH STRING:                            2 - Next Cheque
      a) amt + typ = mandatory                    3 - Next Journal
      b) doc only for Trans type 2      )         4 - System Numbering
     MATCH STRING                [NYNY]           (Y)es,(N)o
                                   1234           1-doc,2-amt,3-date,4-typ
     AUTO POST BL TO CB? (Y/N)   [Y]         CATEGORY [0022] BATCH? [N]
     F3 - UPDATE, F8 - DELETE, F10 - TYPE, ESC - EXIT



DESCRIPTION TYPE                  :       2 characters.
                                          Enter or scan the file for [TT].

DESCRIPTION CODE                  :       4 characters.
                                          Enter the code (i.e. BCH - Bank Charges) or press [F1]
                                          to scan the transaction type codes already on file and
                                          press [Enter] to accept the selection.

DESCRIPTION                       :       30 characters.
                                          Enter the description, for example BANK CHARGES.

TRANSACTION TYPE                  :       1 digit
                                          [1] Deposit
                                          [2] Payment
                                          [3] Journal)
                                          This is required to link a bank-defined transaction on
                                          the incoming flat file to an actual reconciliation
                                          transaction which may be posted to the Cashbook as
                                          a transaction.




SU - Maintenance                                JULY 2006                                    4 - 157
SIGN (+/-)                         :     1 digit.
                                         Enter a plus or minus sign to indicate whether this
                                         transaction type should increase or decrease the Cash
                                         Book balance.

BANK REF                           :     4 characters.
                                         Enter a bank reference/special reference as supplied
                                         by your bank. This will automatically appear as a cross
                                         reference in the Input programs. If you are using the
                                         Banklink interface, you MUST enter the interface type
                                         here, for instance CATS, CAMS or BEST. If the system
                                         detects that the reference you enter here has been
                                         entered in program SU31 - Descriptions File
                                         Maintenance, type 'BI', then a new screen will
                                         automatically be called. (See below)

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - DESCRIPTIONS FILE MAINTENANCE                UTBREF11/002
     CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED                               ttyp3
     BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN
     DESCRIPTION CODE   DD
     BANKLINK INTERFACE CAMS
     BANK REF    [3522    ] START POS [23] LENGTH [13]        ZEROES IF UNUSED
     +----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
     |SUPPLIER REFERENCE                                       CATEGORY            |
     |   [26800780 0006                                   ]    [1000]              |
     |                                                                          |
     |                                                                              |
     |                                                                             |
     |                                                                             |
     |                                                                             |
     |                                                                              |
     |                                                                             |
     |                                                                      <x     |
     |                                                                              |
     |         <x                                                                  |
     |                                                                             |
     |F1 - SCAN, F3 - UPDATE, F8 - DELETE, F10 - PREV.SCRN                        |
     +----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
     F1 - SCAN, F3 - UPDATE, F8 - DELETE, F10 - PREV.SCRN



BANK REF                           ;   8 characters
                                       This new screen will require you to enter the bank
                                       references relating to the interface type you selected.
In addition, the bank download file may contain speedpoint transactions. These are deposits
made by credit card. Depending on the supplier's reference, these transactions may be
allocated automatically to different GL account numbers.
The file BLSUPP holds, by interface type (for example CAMS,) and by bank reference for
example. 3522, the supplier's reference and it's associated CB32 category code.

START POS                          :     2 digits




4 - 158                                JULY 2006          Systems Utilities - User Guide
LENGTH                             :    2 digits
The supplier's reference may be selected as a portion of the 50 character narrative
available. For example, for interface type CAMS, bank reference 3352, the supplier
reference or card number starts at position 23 of the description for a length of 13. The
portion of the description selected as the supplier reference will be passed to the
transactions as a narrative. If no supplier reference is specifically selected that is START
POS 0 and LENGTH 0, then the complete 50 character description (or smaller, depending
on the interface type) will be passed to the transaction narrative.
If a starting position and length are entered, a new window pops up which allows a category
code to be attached to this supplier reference. This category code must be entered in CB32
- Cashbook Analysis Category Maintenance, and a valid CO/BR and GL account #
attached to it. This category will then override the category entered on the first screen of this
SU31 option.

 Each bank reference code must refer to only ONE transaction type (e.g. CHQ),
 but each transaction type may have more than one bank reference.
Press [F3] after every reference entered and [F10] when you have entered all the
references to take you back to the previous screen.
Continue as described below.

TOTAL FOR MONTH                   :     5.2 digits.
                                        This is automatically adjusted by the Input programs.

NUMBERING                         :     [0] Manual - user enters first document number and the
                                        system will increment numbering from there.
                                        You enter first document number for the following types
                                        in program CB30 - Bank Master File Maintenance. If
                                        you use options [1] to [3] below, the system will read
                                        that record, allocate the next number to the transaction
                                        and increment the masterfile record by one.
                                        [1] Next Deposit
                                        [2] Next Cheque
                                        [3] Next Journal
                                        [4] System Numbering - displays the system date as
                                        the document number.




SU - Maintenance                             JULY 2006                                4 - 159
MATCH STRING                :     4 characters
                                  The four positions correspond to four possible
                                  components on which reconciliation items from the
                                  bank statement may be matched to transactions. Enter
                                  a [Y] or [N].
                                  Note that only 3 transaction types will allow you to enter
                                  a [Y] for document number. These are 'CHQ', 'TJK' and
                                  'ACB'. No other incoming transactions held on bank link
                                  files possess a uniquely identifying number. If you wish
                                  to match on document number you will have to enter
                                  the above as description types.
                                  The minimum you may enter as match string is a [Y]
                                  for amount and type.

AUTO POST TO CB (Y/N)       :     1 character
                                  [Y] - will automatically write the incoming transaction
                                  from the bank link files to the reconciliator as well as
                                  create a cashbook transaction where no corresponding
                                  entry can be found in the cashbook.
                                  The numbering of these cashbook transactions depend
                                  on the SU31 - Descriptions File Maintenance option
                                  for that transaction type and will be as follows for
                                  bank Link items. If numbering method is;
                                  [0] - the document number from the flat file will be used.
                                  [1], [2] or [3] - the next appropriate document number
                                  will be taken from CB30 - Bank Master File
                                  Maintenance.
                                  [4] - the document date from the flat file will be used as
                                  document number.

CATEGORY                    :     4 characters
                                  This prompt will only be displayed if you answered [Y]
                                  above. Enter the Cashbook analysis category to which
                                  this transaction type should be posted.

 Remember that if you use supplier references as described above, that this code
 will be overwritten by the one attached to the suppliers reference.




4 - 160                         JULY 2006        Systems Utilities - User Guide
BATCH?                            :    Y/N
                                       If [Y] program BL10 - Bank Link Input will post the
                                       statement entries to a Cash Book batch. You will
                                       therefore be able to amend transactions via CB22 -
                                       Batch Input. For instance you will be able to change
                                       the General Ledger CO/BR, or split the transaction
                                       across different categories, or add a narrative to the
                                       transaction header.
                                       A separate batch will be captured for Deposits,
                                       Payments and Journals using the next batch numbers
                                       captured in BL00 - System Record Maintenance. In
                                       order to allow review of batches in CB22 - Batch
                                       Input, a valid customer/supplier code has to be
                                       entered. BL10 - Bank Link Interface to Cashbook
                                       uses the bank method e.g. "BEST", "CAMS", "CATS"
                                       etc. as the customer/supplier. These must therefore
                                       be captured in CB33 - Limited Customers File and
                                       CB34 - Limited Suppliers File.
                                       If [N] statement transactions will be posted directly to
                                       the Cash Book Reconciler.

Press [F3] to update the description file with these details and press [F10] to return to the
company/branch selection or press [F8] to delete the code and description.




SU - Maintenance                             JULY 2006                               4 - 161
WAREHOUSES - WH
These are used by the Inventory, Sales Order Processing and Purchases Ordering
Systems.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - DESCRIPTIONS FILE MAINTENANCE                      SU31   11/003
     CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED
     BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN
     DESCRIPTION TYPE             [WH]             WAREHOUSES
     WAREHOUSE #                  [01]

     DESCRIPTION                  [CENTRAL                        ]
                                  XFERS OUT       ADJUSTMENTS
     INCLUDE IN USAGE             [N]             [N]
     STOCK ISSUE VOUCHER #        [000144]
     INVOICE #                    [000001]     TO [999999] THEN [202020]
     CREDIT NOTE #                [000001]     TO [999999] THEN [202020]

     ALLOCATE STOCK IN PO (Y/N)   [N]


     F3-UPDATE, F6-LONG DESC, F8-DELETE, F10-TYPE, ESC-EXIT



WAREHOUSE #                        :       2 digits
                                           Enter any value between 1 and 99.

DESCRIPTION                        :       30 characters
                                           Enter the name of the warehouse.


The following two prompts are used when you wish to do invoicing and credit note
numbering by warehouse. This option is set in SP00 - System Record Maintenance.
You enter in sequence the next document number, the last number in the range and then
the number to which it reverts when it reaches the end of the range. For instance, next
number is 002245, last number in range is 100000 and then when it reaches this end-of-
range it will restart at 002000.


INVOICE #                          :       6 digits x 3
                                           Enter the next invoice number, the last invoice number
                                           in the range and the new starting number.

CREDIT NOTE #                              6 digits x 3
                                           Enter the next credit note number, the last credit note
                                           number in the range and the new starting number.

ALLOCATE STOCK IN PO               :       Y/N
                                           If this option is set to [Y] and the same option in PO00 -
                                           System Record Maintenance, to [W], then raw
                                           material stock will be updated and allocated to a
                                           designated customer in PO10 - Order Input.



4 - 162                                  JULY 2006         Systems Utilities - User Guide
INCLUDE IN USAGE

Usage figure may be viewed in program IV50 - Enquiries. The usage quantity is always
updated by all issues captured in program IV10 - Issues/Receipts/Adjustments/Transfers,
and all invoices and credit notes captured in the Sales Order Processing system. In addition
you may select to update the usage quantity by transfers out and/or stock count
adjustments.


XFERS OUT                       :     Y/N
                                      [Y] indicates that all transfers out captured via IV10 -
                                      Issues/Receipts/Adjustments/Transfers, and SP20 -
                                      Branch Order Entry, must also update the usage
                                      figure.
                                      [N] indicates that only the defaults above must be used.

ADJUSTMENTS                     :     Y/N
                                      [Y] indicates that stock adjustments as updated via
                                      program IV84 - Inventory-Count Variance Update, as
                                      well as normal adjustments captured in IV10 -
                                      Issues/Receipts/Adjustments/Transfers, must also
                                      update the usage figure.
                                      [N] indicates that only the defaults must be used.

STOCK ISSUE
VOUCHER NUMBER                  :     6 digits
                                      This is the next stock issue number for this warehouse
                                      and is incremented automatically for each issue. It is
                                      additional to the present issue voucher printed in JC10
                                      - Job Cost Input, and JC22 - Job Cost Input - Fast
                                      Materials Input.
                                      This number is used by IV10 - Issues/Receipts/
                                      Adjustments/Transfers, JC10 - Job Cost Input and
                                      UTJC10 which automatically get the next SIV# for each
                                      stock issue and update NUMBWH. In addition to input
                                      audit trails, the following programs also print this SIV#.
                                      JC10 - Job Cost Input (if the option is set in JC00 -
                                      System Record Maintenance), JC73 - Requisition
                                      Notes, JC80 - Audit Trail, JC92 - PO Updates to
                                      Job, IV77 - Movements Report and JC76 - Work
                                      Centre Analysis.




SU - Maintenance                           JULY 2006                                4 - 163
USER DEFINED TYPES - X, Y, Z

All description types starting with X,Y or Z are used for user defined purposes.

The screen below gives an example of the fields available for entry.


     SYSTEM UTILITIES - DESCRIPTIONS FILE MAINTENANCE                      SU31   11/106
     CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED
     BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN
     DESCRIPTION TYPE           [XS]                NAMIBIAN TIMESHARE SCHEMES
     DESCRIPTION CODE           [A      ]

     DESCRIPTION                [MOKUTI LODGE NAMIBIA              ]
                                [                                  ]
     A1                         [ ]
     A2                         [ ]
     AMOUNT                     [       2300.00 ]
     N2                         [00]




     F3 - UPDATE, F8 - DELETE, F10 - TYPE, ESC - EXIT



DESCRIPTION TYPE                    :       2 characters
                                            Must start with X, Y or Z

DESCRIPTION                         :       30 characters

DESCRIPTION CODE                    :       4 characters
                                            The code for this description type.

DESCRIPTION                         :       60 characters
                                            You have two fields of 30 characters each

A1                                  :       1 character
                                            This field is user defined

A2                                  :       1 character
                                            This field is user defined

AMOUNT                              :       7.2 digits
                                            This is the value associated with the code.

N2                                  :       2 digits
                                            This is a user defined numeric field.




4 - 164                                 JULY 2006           Systems Utilities - User Guide
4.4.   NUMBERS FILE MAINTENANCE - SU32
Various sequential numbering systems are maintained in this module, for example next
Accounts Receivable audit number, next invoice number etc.
The numbering is extremely flexible allowing for different sequences for various
Company/Branch combinations and is entirely under your control.
The following is a list of references used by the system.
  REF             DESCRIPTION
   1 to 9        Alternate invoicing sequence by Payment Method defined in SU31.
   A             Accounts Receivable audit number.
   B             General Ledger batch number.
   b             BM77 Reference Number
   C             Sales Order Credit note number.
   c             Job Costing Credit note number.
   D             Inventory transaction audit number.
   E             Inventory Interface error number.
   F             Accounts Payable internal reference number.
   f             Foreign currency payment reference number for Accounts Payable.
   G             General ledger audit number.
   H             Next Standing Purchase Order number.
   I             Sales Order Invoice number.
   i             Job Costing Invoice number.
   J             Job Costing audit number.
   K             Claim number for Purchase Orders
   m             Batch number for Cashbook (CB22)
   N             Delivery Note Number
   n             Next order number for SP20
   O             Order number.
   o             Used internally by SP for an internal order number.
   P             Purchase order number.
   p             Cashbook temporary customer number.
   Q             Recommended purchase order number.
   R             Accounts Payable audit number.
   r             Cash Book audit number.
   s             Next Cash Book standing entry audit number.
   T             Next Temporary Stock number.
   t             Next Cash Book reconciliation transaction audit number.
   V             Purchase order GRV number.
   v             Internal Requisition number (Purchase Ordering System)
   W             Purchase Order transaction number.




SU - Maintenance                            JULY 2006                              4 - 165
   REF               DESCRIPTION
   x                 Automatic payments via bank transfer in the Accounts Payment
                     system. Used by AP82 - Remittance & Bank Transfer if set in AP00 -
                     System Record Maintenance. Five (5) digits long and prefixed by ‘T’.
                     Set up a different sequence per CO/BR.
   Y                 Reserved for Customer Specials
   Z                 Reserved for Customer Specials
The individual User Guides indicate which references are required by each system.
Enter SU32 from the Maintenance module menu to select this program.


REFERENCE CODE                        1 character.
                                      :
                                      Press [F1] to scan the reference codes already on file.
                                      The reference codes are displayed together with the
                                      next available number.
The system now displays the description field, the present number value and the next
available number. Press [Enter] to accept the display or enter [N] to update the display.
Enter a new description or press [Enter] to move to the next available number field.

       SYSTEM UTILITIES - NUMBERS FILE MAINTENANCE                               SU32   11/004
       CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED
       BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN
       REFERENCE CODE             [3]

       DESCRIPTION                [CHEQUE                               ]
       NUMBERS VALUE                       2
       NEXT AVAILABLE #           [        2]      TO [999999] THEN [       1]


       DETAILS OK? (Y/N)          [Y]




       F3-ACCEPT, F8-DELETE, F10-CO/BR, ESC-EXIT



DESCRIPTION                           :        30 characters.
                                               The description is normally system created but may be
                                               altered.

NUMBERS VALUE                         :        6 digits.
                                               This field is not available for entry and represents the
                                               next available number for this type.




4 - 166                                   JULY 2006            Systems Utilities - User Guide
NEXT AVAILABLE #           :    6 digits.
                                Enter the new number. This number will be
                                incremented by the various programs that make use of
                                the numbers file. Press [F3] to update the file or enter
                                [Y]. Press [F8] to delete the number file reference
                                code.

TO                         :    6 digits
                                You may optionally set an end to the range and then
                                restart at the number entered in the ‘THEN’ prompt
                                below.

THEN                       :    6 digits
                                You need not restart the sequence from 1 but may
                                select a different restart number.


 CAUTION should be used when deleting a reference code, as the systems that
 use this code will not function without the code and number sequence.




SU - Maintenance                     JULY 2006                               4 - 167
4.5.    NARRATIVE FILE MAINTENANCE - SU33
This is a general purpose narrative file used by various systems. Refer to the individual User
Guides.

       SYSTEM UTILITIES - NARRATIVE FILE MAINTENANCE                    SU33   11/001
       NARRATIVE CODE              001
       DESCRIPTION                [OUT OF PRINT                           ]
       TYPE                       [1]        (1-3 for SP00)




       F3 - UPDATE, F8 - DELETE, F9 - PRINT, F10 - PREV



NARRATIVE CODE                      :     3 characters.
                                          Enter a three character description type or press [F1] to
                                          scan the file of types and their descriptions on file.

DESCRIPTION                         :     40 characters.
                                          Enter a description corresponding to the narrative code
                                          and press [F3] to update.

TYPE                                :     1 digit
                                          Entries allowed 1 -3.
                                          This is only for use in the Sales Order Processing and
                                          Inventory systems. See SP00 - System Record
                                          Maintenance and Appendix A1 in the Sales Order
                                          Processing User Guide, and IV30 - Company
                                          Inventory Maintenance in the Inventory User Guide.
The status line provides the prompts. Press [F3] to update, [F8] to delete a narrative code,
[F9] to print all narratives on file and [F10] to return to the previous screen.




4 - 168                                 JULY 2006         Systems Utilities - User Guide
4.6.     CAPTURE USER DEFINED SCANS - SU34
This program captures user-defined scans. It uses RWDICT Report Writer definitions.
Capturing is as per RW30 - Report Maintenance. There is a limit of 8 fields for each scan. If
the scan is named the same as an existing Titan scan, then this user defined scan will be
used in stead of the normal Titan scan.. Program SU54 - Run User Defined Scans can be
used to preview all scans (those that will replace normal Titan scans and any other user
defined ones).
The available scans and programs which use them are listed at the end of this section.
Enter SU34 to select the program.

4.6.1.      SELECTING A SCAN

       SYSTEM UTILITIES - CAPTURE USER DEFINED SCANS                      SU34   11/003
       SCAN NAME       [CREDITORS ]
       SCAN NAME    DESCRIPTION                   FILE      USER     ACCESS KEY
       CREDITORS <>>CREDITORS MASTERFILE          PLMAST    SYSADMIN co/br/suppl#
       DEBTORS      SCAN OF DEBTORS MASTERFILE    SLMAST    SYSADMIN co/br/acc#




       *** NO MORE ITEMS ***
       F1-SCAN, F3-ACCEPT, F4-COPY, F5-ALT SCAN, ESC-EXIT




Enter the following fields;

SCAN NAME                             :   10 characters.
                                          Enter a unique name if creating a new scan or enter
                                          the name of an existing scan. If unsure of the name of
                                          an existing scan press [F1] to use the scan facility.

SCAN FACILITY
There are three ways of scanning for a name;
   Scan name sequence.
   User name (indicates which user the scan belongs to)
   File Name.
The above scans can be alternated by pressing [F5].




SU - Maintenance                                 JULY 2006                                4 - 169
SECURITY LEVELS
Various security levels are used by the system. Whenever a security violation is detected,
an appropriate message will be displayed, and access will be denied to the selected field,
file or scan. These security levels are set up in program SU38 - System Password
Maintenance. Please see the screen below and refer to the Systems Utilities User Guide for
more information.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - SYSTEM PASSWORD MAINTENANCE                       SU38   11/001
     USER NAME :                  MARINA
     USER DESCRIPTION            [DEBTORS CLERK                   ]
     REPORT DEFAULTS:         Destination      Printer#    Destinations:
      1                           [0]            [00]      1 = Report management system
      2                           [0]            [00]      2 = Direct to printer
      3                           [0]            [00]      3 = Direct to a file
                                                           4 = Direct to screen
                                                           5 = Mail recipient
     COMPANY ACCESS              [01]       TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED
     BRANCH ACCESS               [00]       ALL BRANCHES
     WAREHOUSE ACCESS            [00]       ALL WAREHOUSES
     SUPERVISOR                  [ *NONE* ]
     LEVEL                       [5]
     VIEW ACCESS (R/W/D)?        [D]             O/S ACCESS (Y/N)?         [N]




     F1 - SET ACCESS, F2 - USER DEFAULTS, F3 - UPDATE, F8 - DELETE, ESC - EXIT




The levels of security are;

SCAN SECURITY                      :        A user may only run or update their own scans, or
                                            those belonging to "PUBLIC". SYSADMIN has access
                                            to all reports. Permission is required to access another
                                            user's scan and then it must be copied over to the new
                                            user's name.

SYSTEM SECURITY                    :        Each file used by the Report Writer may be assigned to
                                            a particular system, such as AP, AR etc. (RW25 -
                                            Dictionary File Maintenance). Whenever the user is
                                            prompted for a file name the program will check
                                            whether the file belongs to a system to which the user
                                            has access and if not the access will be denied. This
                                            check will also be performed when trying to run a
                                            report.




4 - 170                                JULY 2006           Systems Utilities - User Guide
FILE SECURITY                :    Each file used by the Report Writer may have a
                                  security level of 0 - 9. (0 = No security, 9 = high
                                  security).
                                  Once a user has been cleared to use a file at system
                                  level, the program will check his security level against
                                  the level of the file. If his security level is lower than the
                                  file security level, he will be denied access to the file.


Security checking is performed by RW30 - Report Maintenance, RW50 - Report Enquiry,
RW70 - Report Print and RW71 - Create Disk File.




SU - Maintenance                        JULY 2006                                   4 - 171
4.6.2.    CREATING NEW SCANS

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - CAPTURE USER DEFINED SCANS                                SU34   11/003
     SCAN NAME         GEN. LEDG.                *** NEW SCAN ***
     USER NAME        [SYSADMIN]                 AUTHOR : SYSADMIN
     SCAN DESCRIPTION [GENERAL LEDGER SCAN                ] DISPLAY WIDTH        [ 80]
      FILE NAME    DESCRIPTION                   ACCESS #     DESCRIPTION
     [NLMAST ]




     FILE NAME        DESCRIPTION                           FILE TYPE   SYSTEM     SECURITY LVL
     LOGFILE                                                INDEX                       0
     LYFILE            GL   -   LAST YEAR'S ACCOUNT FILE    INDEX           GL          0
     MGTFIL            GL   -   MANAGE/REPORTS PARAM FILE   INDEX           GL          0
     MPNAR             MP   -   Narratives                  INDEX           MP          0
     NLBATCH           GL   -   BATCH INPUT FILE            INDEX           GL          0
     NLDIARY           GL   -   DIARISED JOURNAL FILE       INDEX           GL          0
     NLMAST       <--> GL   -   MASTER FILE                 INDEX           GL          0

     F1-SCAN, F2-BACK, F3-UPDATE, F4-VIEW, F7-FLD DETS




Level 1

SCAN NAME                               :     10 characters.
                                              Enter a meaningful scan name.

USER NAME                               :     8 characters.
                                              The program defaults to the USER NAME running the
                                              program. Accept the display or enter the user name to
                                              which the scan must belong.

AUTHOR                                  :     The author is the user who originally designed a scan.
                                              This field is not available for entry. If a scan is copied to
                                              another user, the Author Name stays the same.

SCAN DESCRIPTION                        :     30 characters
                                              Enter a meaningful description for the scan.

DISPLAY WIDTH                           :     3 digits
                                              Enter a value between 1 and 132 to indicate the display
                                              width of the scan.

FILE NAME                              8 characters.
                                        :
                                       Enter the file name to be used in the scan or press [F1]
                                       to access the dictionary file.
The display will show the system file name alongside the file description, file type, system
and security level.
Select the file to be used as the basis of the scan by pressing [Enter].




4 - 172                                     JULY 2006          Systems Utilities - User Guide
ACCESS NUMBER                    :    2 digits.
                                      Enter the access number (1 to 10) or press [F1] to scan
                                      the access numbers available for the selected file.
                                      The default display shows an access number of 0,
                                      which is not a valid access number. This is to ensure
                                      that a valid access number (between 1 and 10) is
                                      entered.
Each file in the pre-defined Report Writer dictionary has one or more access numbers
associated with it (access keys).
The access number is used to determine the sequence in which the scan will display. The
access number is also used to enable the setting of start and end ranges for enquiry and
reporting purposes. A further use of the access number is to indicate what data is required
when a look-up option is used in writing a scan.
After entering or selecting the access number for the file, the access description for the
selected access number, is displayed.
Press [Enter] to update the scan thus far.

FIELD DESIGNING
Level 1

FIELD NAME                       :     30 characters.
                                       Press [F1] to scan existing fields. If a new scan is being
                                       created, no records will be displayed.
                                       Press [F6] to add fields to the scan or enter a new field
                                       name.
Level 2

START POSITION                   :     3 digits.
                                       Accept or enter the starting position of the first field in
                                       the scan, the default is 1.


The program now displays the following data. The data displayed is derived directly from the
pre-defined dictionary for the selected file.

FIELD NAME                       :     The names of the fields, in the selected file as supplied
                                       by the Dictionary, that may be used in the scan.

HEADING                          :     The default column heading that will appear in the
                                       scan.




SU - Maintenance                             JULY 2006                                  4 - 173
FORMAT                            :     The nature of the field's contents (ALPHA = alpha-
                                        numeric data, NUM = numeric data and PACK =
                                        packed numeric data).
                                        A packed numeric data field enables twice as much
                                        numeric data to be stored in a numeric field.
                                        Calculations may be performed on NUM and PACK
                                        fields.

LENGTH                            :     The number of characters in the field.

TYPE                              :     Files that use record typing carry a transaction type
                                        indicator against each field that is subject to record
                                        typing (1, 2, 3 etc.).
                                        A blank transaction type field indicates that record
                                        typing is not applicable to that field.


Record typing is used when a file is required to accommodate a number of different types of
records, which might not have common data fields, in a single record layout.
An example of record typing would be in the Accounts Receivable transaction file
(SALENQ). As there are 11 different Accounts Receivable transaction types (invoices, cash
payments, credit notes etc.), a 2 digit record type or transaction type (0 through 10) is used
to identify each of the 10 transaction types from the other.
In practical terms, record typing is used when a particular type of record is required to be
selected from a file and used in a scan.
If, as an example, a scan is needed listing invoice, payment and credit note data, the scan
would be written using file SALENQ (the Accounts Receivable transaction file) and
transaction types 1, 2 and 3 to select the three types of data required from a file that holds
several other transaction types.

 Please remember: only 8 fields may be selected for each scan.
Select or flag the fields to be used in the scan by moving the pointer (<-->) to the field
required and pressing [F5].
A three digit number is allocated to the field selected (001, 002, 003 etc.). This indicates the
order in which the field will be displayed in the scan. The top right-hand corner of the display
indicates the position status of the scan so far.
Packed numeric fields when used in a scan are expanded to their full size (a field of 7 digits
packed numeric will appear as a 14 digit scan field). A scan may consist of a maximum of 8
fields.
After selecting all the fields required in the scan, press [F3] to update the scan so far.
The program adds the selected fields to the scan and returns to the field name.
Press [F1] to scan the scan field names selected and flagged for this scan.




4 - 174                               JULY 2006         Systems Utilities - User Guide
      SYSTEM UTILITIES - CAPTURE USER DEFINED SCANS                       SU34   11/003
      SCAN :   GEN. LEDG.   FILE   : NLMAST
      FIELD NAME     [General Ledger #                ]
      FIELD NAME                                      POS   LEN   END   FRMT   TYPE
      General Ledger #              <-->                1    30    30   ALPH   DICT
      Description                                      31    30    60   ALPH   DICT
      Type of Record (B/S, P&L, H,T)                   61     1    61   NUM    DICT




      *** NO MORE ITEMS ***
      F1-SCAN, F6-ADD FLDS, F10-BACK




The display indicates a number of field parameters for each scan field flagged. The
parameters are as follows;

POSITION                           :       The starting position of the scan field in the scan.

LENGTH                             :       The length of the scan field in digits or characters.

END                                :       The ending position of the scan field in the scan.

FORMAT                             :       The format of the scan field (NUM, PACK or ALPHA).

TYPE                               :       A scan field type may be either a field supplied by the
                                           dictionary (DICT), a field in which calculation is taking
                                           place (CALC), a look-up field (LOOKUP), a field that is
                                           determined by the value of another field (VARIABLE) or
                                           a field that occurs more than once (SUBSCRIPT).




SU - Maintenance                                JULY 2006                                 4 - 175
At this point any of the scan fields may be accessed and re-defined if required.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - CAPTURE USER DEFINED SCANS                            SU34   11/003
     SCAN :     GEN. LEDG.    FILE   : NLMAST
                                                          FORMAT : NUMERIC
     FIELD NAME        Type of Record (B/S, P&L, H,T)       TYPE :
     COLUMN POSITION [ 61]
     INTEGERS         [01]     DECIMALS [00]    SIGN [N] (Y/N)
     COLUMN HEADING   [TYPE                           ]    POSITION   [000]
                      [                               ]               [000]




     F3-UPDATE, F8-DEL, F10-NEXTFLD

To access a scan field displayed, press [Enter]. A field definition screen is displayed. The
data displayed is derived directly from the dictionary.
The top part of the screen displays the scan name, the file being accessed and the field
name, format and type.

COLUMN POSITION                      :     3 digits.
                                           Indicates the starting position of the scan field. Enter a
                                           new starting position if required.

LENGTH                               :     2 digits.
                                           Accept the field length displayed or enter a field length
                                           less than the number displayed. Entering a field length
                                           less than the field length will cause the field to be
                                           shortened. This only displays for alpha fields.


Where fields are numeric or packed, four other fields are displayed in place of the length
field, with their default values retrieved from the dictionary.

INTEGERS                             :     2 digits.
                                           Accept the values displayed or enter new values into
                                           the integer (whole numbers).

DECIMALS                             :     2 digits.
                                           Accept the values or enter new values in the decimal
                                           place field.

SIGN                                 :     Y/N.
                                           If the field is to print a plus or minus sign, then accept
                                           the default [Y]. Enter [N] to select no +/- signs.



4 - 176                                  JULY 2006          Systems Utilities - User Guide
All other fields have the same value as for alpha-numeric fields.

COLUMN HEADING                   :     30 characters.
                                       The default column heading as supplied by the data
                                       dictionary is displayed. Accept the column heading or
                                       enter a new column heading. The column heading may
                                       cover two lines.


Press the right arrow key to move to the column heading positioning field.

POSITION                         :     3 digits.
                                       The default value for this field is the same as the field
                                       position. Enter a new column position if the column
                                       heading is to be offset above the data field.

After editing or accepting the data, press [F3] to update the changes made or press [F10] to
select the next scan field.




SU - Maintenance                            JULY 2006                                 4 - 177
SPECIAL FIELD TYPES
The field type dealt with so far is the dictionary type field (DICT).
There is another type of field, namely LOOKUP
To define such a field, enter a unique field name that does not exist in the dictionary.

 It is suggested that all non-dictionary fields (i.e. Calc. Lookup etc) be entered in
 upper case only. Dictionary fields should be in upper and lower case. If you use
 this technique you can easily identify the special type fields from Dict fields.
A LOOKUP field type is used to extract data from a particular field (Lookup field) on a
particular file (Lookup file). In order to do this a key must be constructed to access the
required data. This key is constructed from data extracted from the Report Writer file
currently being accessed and/or constants. In the example below ["2" ] and ["BT" ] form
the constants.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - CAPTURE USER DEFINED SCANS                      SU34   11/003
     SCAN :   GEN. LEDG.   FILE     : NLMAST
     FIELD NAME      BUDGET TOTAL FOR YEAR
     FIELD TYPE - Lookup
     LOOKUP FILE NAME   [BUDFIL ]
     LOOKUP FIELD NAME  [Budget Year (YYYY)              ]
     LOOKUP ACCESS #    [ 1]
     ACCESS #         DESCRIPTION
        01    <-->    co/br/acc_code/bud_yr/bud_code
        02            factor#
        03            CO/BR/YR/YYYY/CODE/GL




     *** NO MORE ITEMS ***
     F1-SCAN, F3-UPDATE, F10-BACK



FIELD NAME                          :     Enter a unique field name that is not defined in the
                                          dictionary.

FIELD TYPE                          :     Lookup. This is displayed by the system and you
                                          cannot change it.

LOOKUP FILE NAME                    :     Enter the look-up file name or press [F1] to scan the
                                          file.

LOOKUP FIELD NAME                   :     Enter the look-up field name or press [F1] to scan the
                                          file.

ACCESS #                            :     Enter the access number or press [F1] to scan the file.

Press [F3] to update this screen and to display the field definition screen.
Define the look-up field as required. Press [F3] to update the look-up definition.


4 - 178                                 JULY 2006        Systems Utilities - User Guide
After entering and defining the various fields, the scan is ready for either display via program
SU54 - Run User Defined Scans or if you redefined a Titan scan, for use in the programs
as listed at the end of this section.

4.6.3.     COPYING SCANS
Use this facility to copy one scan to another. This may be done for instance where two
scans are very similar and only a few minor changes are required on the second one.

SCAN NAME                          :        Select the scan that is to be copied to the new scan.

Press [F4] to initiate the copy function.

SCAN NAME TO COPY TO               :        Enter scan name.

USER NAME TO COPY TO               :  Show which user the scan must be copied to, the
                                      default will be the current user. If copying to another
                                      user, no access to that copied scan will be allowed
                                      except if it is SYSADMIN or if the user is PUBLIC.
After copying the scan, the program displays the first scan definition screen.
Proceed modifying the newly copied scan as detailed earlier in the User Guide.

4.6.4.     AMENDING SCANS
The program enables you to modify any of the details relating to the scan definition.
Refer to the earlier pages in this section as to the use and function of the various fields and
formats available.

4.6.5.     DELETING SCANS
Any scan may be deleted by pressing the [F8] key, once the scan has been selected you
will be asked to accept deletion. You have the choice of deleting the whole scan or only file
2.
Individual fields may be deleted in a scan by pressing [F8] once the field definition screen
has been selected.

4.6.6.      TITAN SCANS WHICH MAY BE USER DEFINED


                       TITAN SCANS WHICH MAY BE USER DEFINED
Scan Name                         File Read                          Programs using Scan
UTSLM                             SLMAST                             AR30, SP10, AR50




SU - Maintenance                                 JULY 2006                               4 - 179
4.7.   CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE - SU35
This program sets up the form templates used in various print programs. These templates
are used to determine what and where data is to be printed on pre-printed forms.
Templates may be set up at a company or an individual branch level. Form type templates
must be set up if using the following systems;


  System                             Type      Description
  Accounts Receivable                 ST       Statement/Labels
                                      IN       Debtors Invoices
  Accounts Payable                    RA       Remittance Advice
                                      CQ       Cheques
  Bill of Materials                   BM       Bill of Material Sub-assembly
  Cash Book                           CB       Remittance Advice
                                      CQ       Cheques
                                      DP       Deposit Slip
  General Ledger                      GL       Masterfile print with matrix
                                      MR       Management reporting
  Instalment Sales                    IS       Instalment sale form - statements
                                               Instalment sale form - invoices
  Inventory                           SF       Inventory form
                                      SI       Stock In -Transit
  Job Costing                         JC       Requisition note
  Monthly Payroll                     CQ       Cheques
                                      MP       Payslip
  Purchase Orders                     PO       Purchase Order
                                      P1       Redistribution of received order (this is
                                               user specific and falls outside the scope
                                               of this system.)
  Sales Order Processing              BO       Back Orders form
                                      IV       Invoice
                                      OA       Order analysis
                                      SP       Order confirmation/picking slip
  Weekly Payroll                      WP       Payslip


Enter SU35 to select the program. Press [Enter], to select the form type, for example IV -
Invoices.




4 - 180                            JULY 2006         Systems Utilities - User Guide
4.7.1.    ENTERING FORM TYPES
The form type that is to be created may be applied to;
   A unique company and branch combination
   A unique company and all branches in that company
   All companies in a system
During the printing of a document, such as an invoice, the actual form type description used
depends on the company and branch combination selected for the document print. If, as an
example, 01/01 is selected, the print program will look for the relevant form type for 01/01
and if found it uses it. If not, then the system looks for 01/00 (all branches).
Press [F6], to select all companies or [F7], to select all branches within in a specified
company.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE                   SU35   11/001
     CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED
     BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN
     SELECT FORM                 [GL ]      FORM NO
     FORM/CO/BR/NO      DESCRIPTION
       GL/00/00/   <--> GL70 MATRIX SPECIAL
       MR/00/00/        MANAGEMENT REPORT
       MR/00/00/NH      MR WITH NO SYSTEM HD
       CQ/01/01/        CHECK PRINT
       GL/01/01/01      GL MATRIX ON DEPT
       GL/01/01/02      MATRIX DEPT ALT-SEQ
       GL/01/01/CD      GL70 MATRIX SPECIAL
       GL/01/01/HD      GL70 MATRIX SPECIAL
       IS/01/01/        SOFT FORM FOR IS
       IS/01/01/01      SOFT FORM FOR IS
       IV/01/01/        INVOICE - STANDARD
       IV/01/01/01      INVOICE - MASS
       IV/01/01/02      INVOICE - STANDARD


     F1 - SCAN FORWARDS, ESC - EXIT




SU - Maintenance                               JULY 2006                              4 - 181
     SYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE                        SU35      11/001
     CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED
     BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN
     SELECT FORM                 [GL ]
     NO FORM FOR THIS COMPANY AND BRANCH EXISTS
     ENTER SELECTION               [1]   1   Use An Existing Form As A Template
                                         2   Create The New Form Using No Template




     F10 - NEXT FORM, ESC - EXIT




To enter an individual company and branch combination, accept the default or enter a new
combination.
If no form template exists for this combination, the program will prompt as above. It is
possible to use an existing form template [1] as the basis for the new form to be created or
create a new form [2].
Should Option [2] be chosen, the program will then present screens that have no data
entered.
Press [Enter] to accept the default of using an existing template.
Enter the company/branch to be used as the template and press [Enter] to accept the
display and access the Form Specification file.




4 - 182                                  JULY 2006          Systems Utilities - User Guide
USER DESIGNED FORM FORMATS
Most of the forms are very simple to design. All fields which could possibly be printed on the
form are presented to the operator on the screen with a line and column position to be
entered. All the fields are optional and each user may decide which ones to use.
Most of the forms contain a header area, a body area and a trailer area.
Certain form types allow for a more complex form to be designed. This is referred to as a
matrix type form. If a matrix type form is selected, it allows the printing of header, detail and
total information within the body of a document, and allows columns to be printed across the
page.
An example of the use of matrix type forms could be as follows;
If a company holds a range of items in different colours and sizes, they might wish to print a
header for a certain style of product, listing all the possible sizes across the page. The
individual products of different colours will then be printed underneath this heading. After all
products of that style has been printed, a total will be printed showing the total per size and
per style.
This User Guide will describe in detail how such a matrix form is to be designed.


             MATRIX TYPE FORMS
             Invoices                                 Form type IV
             Order confirmation/Picking list          Form type SP
             Purchase orders                          Form type PO
             Redistributed Orders                     Form Type P1
             User-defined Inventory report            Form type SF
             General Ledger Masterfile print          Form type GL
             Order Analysis                           Form type OA
             Back Orders                              Form Type BO




SU - Maintenance                             JULY 2006                                4 - 183
The first form set up screen is displayed.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE                     SU35   11/001
     GENERAL DATA - GENERAL LEDGER MASTERFILE FORM
     DESCRIPTION                               [GL70 MATRIX SPECIAL ]
     FORM LENGTH (Lines):                      [066]
     FORM WIDTH (Columns):                     [132]
     START OF BODY:                            [005]
     END   OF BODY:                            [065]
     SUMMARY:        HEADER:         Line 001 to 004
                     BODY:           Line 005 to 065
                     TRAILER:        Line 066 to 066
     IS THE ABOVE INFORMATION CORRECT? (Y/N)    [Y]




     F1 - NEXT, F3 - ACCEPT, F8 - DELETE, F9 - PRINT, F10 - NEXT FORM, ESC - EXIT


FORM IDENTIFICATION AND SIZE PARAMETERS
Either accept the default display or enter new data into the following fields;


DESCRIPTION                       :     20 characters.
                                        Enter the form description.

FORM LENGTH
(Lines)                           :     3 digits.
                                        Enter the number of lines on the form, for example 66
                                        lines for an 11" form that will be printed at 6 lines to the
                                        inch.

FORM WIDTH
(Columns)                         :     3 digits.
                                        Enter the number of columns across the form (120
                                        columns for a 12" form printing at 10 characters to the
                                        inch).

START OF BODY                     :     3 digits.
                                        Enter the starting line number on which the body of the
                                        document begins, for instance in the case of invoices,
                                        the line on which the first invoice detail line must be
                                        printed.




4 - 184                               JULY 2006         Systems Utilities - User Guide
END OF BODY                       :    3 digits.
                                       Enter the ending line number on which the body of the
                                       document ends, for example in the case of invoices,
                                       the line on which the last invoice detail line must be
                                       printed.


Most form types present their fields in an identical manner with, however, a slight variation in
the statement form, type (ST).
ST enables forms to be printed four-up (one statement alongside the other for different
customers) in which case the "NUMBER OF FORMS" field on the first page of the statement
form type (ST) must contain a two, three or four.
MP allows 4 up
RA allows 4 up
WP allows 4 up
Certain formtypes allow the same field to be printed more than once by presenting two sets
of line/columns. This may be used for example for a tear off portion to be used as a
remittance advice.
For one-up forms use only the first set of line/columns.
Forms IV, SP, BM, and PO allow a duplicate form alongside the first.

 Please note that the maximum printer width should therefore be twice the width
 of 1 form.
The program then calculates the HEADER SIZE (where name and address details etc. are
printed), BODY SIZE (item lines details etc.) and TRAILER SIZE (totals and messages) of
the form.
After completing the screen, press [Enter] to accept the screen as correct or enter [N] to re-
enter the details. Enter [N] to take the cursor to the topmost field. Press the [Up arrow] to
take the cursor to the lowest field.




SU - Maintenance                             JULY 2006                               4 - 185
HEADER DETAILS
Header detail screens will be presented until all header details have been entered.
When header detail entry is complete, the screens for input of relevant body and trailer
detail lines will be available.
In each case below, we give you the maximum length of the field to be printed. We display
this immediately after the prompt.
You will notice that there are two fields next to each numeric field, namely DGT and DEC,
depicted for instance as [07][02]. The first figure represents the size of the whole number
and the second the size of its decimal. These indicate the default field size the program will
use when printing the forms. You may change these if you wish. Remember that if you
specify the size as 7.2, this field will use 11 characters when it is printed as it includes a
decimal and a sign.
The DGT field is also used on alpha fields where you wish to print less than the maximum
number of characters of a field. The default is zero (0) which indicates the maximum should
be printed, if you wish to print fewer characters, enter the number in his field.
Each line also has a 1 character field where you may enter a font number. This corresponds
to the hexadecimal escape sequences entered for different fonts in program SU01 -
Terminal and Printer Setup.

 Please note that only the first occurrence of a font specification will be used for
 each line of print. Any subsequent specifications will be ignored.
Where you do not have enough space on your stationery for the total size of the field,
decrease this to the maximum you will hold on file.
     SYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE                         SU35    11/001
     HEADER 1 - GENERAL LEDGER MASTERFILE FORMFONT      LINE   COLMN DGT/DEC LINE   COLMN
     CO/BR REPORT HEADER (3 LINES)              [ ]     [001] [001]
     REPORT NAME                                [ ]     [   ] [   ]




     IS THE ABOVE INFORMATION CORRECT? (Y/N)          [Y]
     F1-NEXT, F2-PREVIOUS, F3-SAVE, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-NEXT FORM, ESC-EXIT



CO/BR REPORT
HEADER (3 LINES)                     :     3 digits each for line and column.
                                           If a line/column position is entered here the normal
                                           TITAN report heading will be printed. It always takes up
                                           3 print lines.




4 - 186                                  JULY 2006          Systems Utilities - User Guide
REPORT NAME                       :     3 digits each for line and column.
                                        A line/column position will normally only be entered
                                        here if the normal TITAN report heading must NOT be
                                        printed, in which case the 20 character form description
                                        entered on the previous screen will be printed on the
                                        report in the positions specified here.

There is a column (T#) which enables you to specify a title number next to a value field. If
you do his, it means that that title will only print when there is a value present.

BODY DETAILS
This section presents you with two options, to either complete details for a matrix type form
or for a normal type. If a normal form type is selected, only the column positions on the far
right hand side need be entered. In each case below, we give you the maximum length of
the field to be printed. We display this immediately after the prompt.
You will notice that there are two fields next to each numeric field, namely DGT and DEC,
depicted for instance as [07][02]. The first figure represents the size of the whole number
and the second the size of its decimal. These indicate the default field size the program will
use when printing the forms. You may change these if you wish. Remember that if you
specify the size as 7.2, this field will use 11 characters when it is printed as it includes a
decimal and a sign (minus or plus).
The DGT field is also used on alpha fields where you wish to print less than the maximum
number of characters of a field. The default is zero (0) which indicates the maximum should
be printed, if you wish to print fewer characters, enter the number in his field.
Where you do not have enough space on your stationery for the total size of the field,
decrease this to the maximum you will hold on file.
On non-matrix type forms each line also has a 1 character field where you may enter a font
number. This corresponds to the hexadecimal escape sequences entered for different fonts
in program SU01 - Terminal and Printer Setup.
On matrix type forms, you will use the 3rd position of the Matrix column to indicate the font
number.
In addition there is a field on non-matrix type forms which allows you to specify whether you
want currency formatting on value fields, that is, whether you wish to see the currency
indicator such as R, $, and so forth to print. If so, you will enter [Y] in this field.
On matrix type forms this feature is activated by entering [Y] in the fourth (4th) position of the
matrix field for specified values.

 Please note that only the first occurrence of a font specification will be used for
 each line of print. Any subsequent specifications will be ignored.




SU - Maintenance                              JULY 2006                               4 - 187
     SYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE                                SU35   11/004
     BODY 4 - GENERAL LEDGER MASTERFILE FORM     MATRIX   LINE COLMN DGT/DEC BODY         COLMN
     MASTERFILE VALUES -   BROUGHT FORWARD AMT   [    ]   [   ]   [   ]   [   ][   ]      [   ]
                       -   CURRENT PERIOD        [    ]   [   ]   [   ]   [   ][   ]      [   ]
                       -   YEAR-TO-CURRENT PER   [    ]   [   ]   [   ]   [   ][   ]      [   ]
                       -   YEAR-TO-DATE VALUE    [    ]   [   ]   [   ]   [   ][   ]      [   ]
     USER FIELD 1                                [   ] [      ] [     ]                   [   ]
     USER FIELD 2                                [   ] [      ] [     ]                   [   ]
     USER FIELD 3                                [   ] [      ] [     ]                   [   ]




     COLUMN HEADING IN MATRIX                 [    ] [   ] [   ]                          [   ]
     HORIZONTAL TOTAL OF COLUMNS IN MATRIX    [    ] [   ] [   ] [ ][ ]                   [   ]
     IS THE ABOVE INFORMATION CORRECT? (Y/N)      [Y]
     F1-NEXT, F2-PREV, F3-SAVE, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-FORM, ESC-EXIT




If a matrix type form is selected there are three possible fields requiring entry.


MATRIX                              :     4 characters.
                                          H,B, or T in the first position
                                          Q in the second position.
                                          Font number in the 3rd position.
                                          [Y] in the 4th position to indicate currency formatting
                                          required, else blank.
                                          Enter an [H] in the FIRST position of the matrix field if
                                          this refers to a heading in the matrix heading.
                                          Enter a [B] in the FIRST position of the matrix column if
                                          this is represents repeated body lines in the matrix.
                                          Enter a [T] in the FIRST position of the matrix column if
                                          trailer information is to be printed after each group of
                                          body lines in a matrix.
                                          A [T] is used to print repetitive information such as
                                          `price' on a trailer. However provision has been made
                                          to total such fields as GROSS value and COST.
                                          Enter a [Q] in the SECOND position of the matrix field
                                          (only after a B in the first column) if this field is the value
                                          to be printed in columns for a matrix.




4 - 188                                 JULY 2006             Systems Utilities - User Guide
LINE                              :     3 digits.
                                        This field is mandatory if a matrix is to be printed as it
                                        determines the spacing between header, body and
                                        total information for each matrix.
                                        An [H] type line must be less than a [B] type, which in
                                        turn must be less than a [T] type.
                                        The first [H] type line number should be the line
                                        number on which the first body line of the document is
                                        to be printed.
                                        If a line space is required between the matrix headers
                                        and the first matrix body line, the body line should be
                                        two more than the last header line.
                                        Total type records should NOT have line numbers as
                                        these will be calculated automatically.

COLUMN                            :     3 digits.
                                        If a normal form type is selected only column positions
                                        need be entered.


In order to obtain a matrix print, the very last page of the form, which will also be described
in detail, MUST be completed.
Enter these details until the document has been fully formatted.




SU - Maintenance                             JULY 2006                                 4 - 189
DOCUMENT TITLES
The title section of the form contains a number of optional fields, each thirty characters long,
which may be used for messages or for headings for un-domiciled forms. All forms have 999
such fields.
These titles may be printed in the body of the document for a matrix type document. If this is
required, an [H], [B] or [T] must be entered in the MATRIX column, as well as the
appropriate line number.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE                      SU35    11/002
     TITLES 1   - SALES ORDER                   MATRIX LINE   COLMN       LINE   COLMN
     1 [CODE                           ]        [    ] [027] [001]
     2 [ITEM                           ]        [    ] [027] [017]
     3 [UNIT                           ]        [    ] [027] [050]
     4 [ORDERED                        ]        [    ] [027] [058]
     5 [DELIVERED                      ]        [    ] [027] [073]
     6 [ON B/O                         ]        [    ] [027] [088]
     7 [EXCL SELL                      ]        [    ] [027] [118]
     8 [NET                            ]        [    ] [027] [125]
     9 [O/S                            ]        [    ] [027] [103]
     10 [TRAILER                       ]        [    ] [040] [001]
     11 [                              ]        [    ] [   ] [   ]
     12 [                              ]        [    ] [   ] [   ]
     13 [                              ]        [    ] [   ] [   ]
     14 [                              ]        [    ] [   ] [   ]
     15 [                              ]        [    ] [   ] [   ]
     16 [                              ]        [    ] [   ] [   ]
     17 [                              ]        [    ] [   ] [   ]
     18 [                              ]        [    ] [   ] [   ]
     IS THE ABOVE INFORMATION CORRECT? (Y/N)        [Y]
     F1-NEXT, F2-PREV, F3-SAVE, F5-MORE TEXT,   F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-FORM




There is a column (T#) on all Header and Trailer lines which enables you to specify a title
number next to a value field. If you do his, it means that that title will only print when there is
a value present.




4 - 190                               JULY 2006           Systems Utilities - User Guide
DOCUMENT TRAILER
The document trailer requires no special entries for matrix printing except for the last screen.
Press [F2] to go to a previous screen or [F3] to accept the screen.
There is a column (T#) which enables you to specify a title number next to a value field. If
you do his, it means that that title will only print when there is a value present.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE                     SU35    11/001
     TRAILER 1 - INVOICE                              LINE   COLMN       LINE   COLMN
     H/O ACCOUNT NUMBER                             [    ]   [   ]
     REFERENCE #                                    [    ]   [   ]
     X-REFERENCE #                                   [   ]   [   ]
     SALESMAN (NUMBER CODE "RP")                    [    ]   [   ]
              (NAME)                                [    ]   [   ]
     METHOD OF DELIVERY                             [    ]   [   ]
     METHOD OF PAYMENT                              [    ]   [   ]
     TERMS (CODE "DT")                              [    ]   [   ]
           (DESCRIPTION)                            [    ]   [   ]
     DELIVERY DATE                                  [    ]   [   ]
     SALES TAX NUMBER                               [    ]   [   ]
     SA#1 (CODE "S1")                               [    ]   [   ]
          (DESCRIPTION)                             [    ]   [   ]
     SA#2 (CODE "S2")                               [    ]   [   ]
          (DESCRIPTION)                             [    ]   [   ]
     IS THE ABOVE INFORMATION CORRECT? (Y/N)     [Y]
     F1-NEXT, F2-PREVIOUS, F3-SAVE, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-NEXT FORM, ESC-EXIT


MATRIX PRINT DETAILS
This section MUST be completed if a matrix type form is required.
Enter the following details;

MANY LINES IN BODY
(Y/N/C)                           :     Y/N/C.
                                        [Y] - if you require a matrix type form.
                                        [N] - no further entries are required.
                                        [C] - consolidation will take place.

NEXT HEADING ON
CHANGE OF                         :     1 digit.
                                        Enter the part of the code which will determine whether
                                        a new heading must be printed. A [0] will cause no
                                        break. Any other entry will refer to the code part.

NEXT HORZ. LINE
ON CHANGE OF                      :     1 digit.
                                        Enter the part of the code which will determine whether
                                        a new detail line must be printed. A [0] will cause no
                                        break. Any other entry will refer to the code part.

 The number entered here may not be lower than the one entered for the heading
 above.



SU - Maintenance                               JULY 2006                                 4 - 191
NEXT COLUMN
ON CHANGE OF                        :       1 digit.
                                            Enter the part of the code which will determine whether
                                            a new column must be printed on the detail line. A [0]
                                            will cause no break. Any other entry will refer to the
                                            code part.

If an entry other than [0] is entered here, the details on the next screen MUST be completed.

 The number entered here may not be lower than the one entered for the
 horizontal line above.


     SYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE                        SU35   11/001
     MATRIX PRINT DETAILS
     MANY LINES IN BODY? (Y/N/C) [Y]
     NEXT HEADING ON CHANGE OF   [6]           0 - NO CHECK
                                             1-8 - SEQUENCE ACCOUNT CODE PARTS 1 TO 8
     NEXT HORZ. LINE ON CHANGE OF[6]           9 - PERIOD VALUES/BUDGETS
     NEXT COLUMN ON CHANGE OF    [9]
     ENTER COLUMN DETAILS ON NEXT SCREEN

     VERTICAL COLM TOTALS? (Y/N)   [N]
     OVERSCORE TOTALS? (Y/N)       [N]
     UNDERSCORE TOTALS? (Y/N)      [N]
     COLUMN WIDTH?                 [13]

     IS THE ABOVE INFORMATION CORRECT? (Y/N)       [Y]



     F1-COLUMNS, F2-PREVIOUS, F3-SAVE, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-NEXT FORM, ESC-EXIT



VERTICAL COLM
TOTALS                              :       Y/N.
                                            Enter a [Y] here if totals are to be produced for vertical
                                            columns.

OVERSCORE TOTALS                    :       Y/N.
                                            Enter a [Y] if overscoring is required.

UNDERSCORE TOTALS                   :       Y/N.
                                            Enter a [Y] if underscoring is required.

COLUMN WIDTH                        :       2 digits.
                                            Enter the required width for each vertical column.

UPDATE (Y/N)                        :       1 character.

After entering all the fields, press [Enter] in response to the update request or enter [N] and
re-enter the details.




4 - 192                                   JULY 2006         Systems Utilities - User Guide
MATRIX COLUMN DETAILS


     SYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE                       SU35   11/001
     MATRIX COLUMN DETAILS
     ENTER 'TYPE/PERIOD RANGE/DR-CR/BUDGET' PER COLUMN :
     COLUMN 01       [          ]           TYPE (POSITION 1) :
            02       [          ]                C - CURRENT YEAR ACTUALS
            03       [          ]                P - PREVIOUS YEAR ACTUALS
            04       [          ]                L - LAST YEAR BUDGETS
            05       [          ]                T - THIS YEAR BUDGETS
            06       [          ]                N - NEXT YEAR BUDGETS
            07       [          ]
            08       [          ]           PERIODS : FROM (POS 2,3) TO (POS 4,5)
            09       [          ]               00 - BROUGHT FORWARD BALANCE
            10       [          ]            01-13 - PERIODS 1-13
            11       [          ]              'C '- CURRENT PERIOD
            12       [          ]
            13       [          ]           SCOPE : DEBIT OR CREDIT (POS 6)
            14       [          ]
            15       [          ]           BUDGET CODE : (POS 7,8,9,10)
            16       [          ]
            17       [          ]
            18       [          ]           UPDATE? (Y/N)    [Y]
     F2-PREVIOUS, F3-SAVE, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT, F10-NEXT FORM, ESC-EXIT




This screen must be completed if columns are to be printed across the page. The system
displays the following ;

ENTER CODES PER COLUMN FOR PART `X'
'X' represents the part of the code specified for column change on the previous screen.

COLUMN 01                         :    8 characters.
                                       This entry occurs 18 times and represents the actual
                                       part of the specified code for which values are to be
                                       specified in the stated column.
The screen clearly indicates the valid entries for each position.

4.7.2.    UPDATING FORM TYPES
Select the form type, and company and branch to be updated.
Using the [F1] and [F2] keys select the screen page to be updated.
Using the cursor keys, move the cursor to the field to be updated. Enter the amendment.
Press [F3] to update the file.

4.7.3.    DELETING FORM TYPES
Select the form type, and company and branch to be deleted.
Press [F8] to delete the form type for that company and branch combination.




SU - Maintenance                              JULY 2006                                   4 - 193
4.8.    CUSTOMISED TERMINOLOGY – SU351
This program allows you to change screen prompts. This may be used to either translate
terminology to a different language, or just to change items such as CUSTOMER to
DEBTOR.

 At any alpha prompt you may enter 3 question marks, this will display the
 internal name of the field you wish to validate. Alternately, you can use the key
 (value 46) set up in your config file for determining the prompt name.


       SYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED TERMINOLOGY                                  11/001
       CO - 01 - SEAGULL SOFTWARE CC
       BR - 01 - MAIN BRANCH
       USER [        ] PROGRAM [      ] FIELD [***   NO MORE ITEMS   ***      ]
       TRANSLATION SCAN
       USER     PROG   INTERNAL FIELD                     TRANSLATION
                       *** NO MORE ITEMS ***          <-->*** NO MORE ITEMS ***
                       -                                  -
                       - Create System Files              - Create System Files
                       - File Utility Programs            - File Utility Programs
                       - Verify IO Modules                - Verify IO Modules
                       /                                  /
                       <-->                               <-->
                       BR -                               BR -
                       CALLING ...                        CALLING ...
                       CO -                               CO -
                       CREATE FILES FOR SYSTEM            CREATE FILES FOR SYSTEM
                       CREATING...                        CREATING...
                       DESCRIPTION                        DESCRIPTION
                       END OF PROCESSING                  END OF PROCESSING
                       ENTER OPTION :                     ENTER OPTION :
       F1-FWD, F3 – UPDATE, F5-TOGGLE, F10-PREV

In addition, you may toggle to another screen where you will find SUHTML names for use on
the Web. Attribute 1 indicates whether the input will be upper or lower case. [Y] will force
upper case. Attributes 2 and 3 are used to limit entries to valid values or 2 disallow invalid
values. Attribute 2 is for valid values and attribute 3 is used to check for invalid values.

       SYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED TERMINOLOGY                                  11/002
       CO - 01 - SEAGULL SOFTWARE CC
       BR - 01 - MAIN BRANCH
       INTERNAL FIELD                         [INCUST                         ]
       ATTRIBUTES SCAN
       INTERNAL FIELD                    EXTERNAL FIELD                    ATTR
       INCUST                        <-->accno                             YHJ
       INDEL                             deladdrno                         N
       INDELREQ                          deldate                           N
       INKEY-NAM                         deladdrname                       N
       INKEY-NUM                         deladdrno                         N
       INORD-N                           ordno                             N
       INREP                             rep                               N
       INSA1                             sa1                               N
       INWH                              WH                                N
       INXREF                            xref                              N
       O-PART                            partno                            Y
       O-PRICE                           price                             N
       O-QTY-DISCPER                     disc2                             N
       O-QTYORD                          qty                               N
       O-TIME-DISCPER                    disc1                             N
       Uppercase Y/N;Valid type;Invalid type
       F3-UPDATE, F8-DELETE

For instance, in the above example, an H will be used to enter valid entries and attribute J
for invalid entries. Press [F3] to update and then [F5] to toggle to the new screen where you
can enter valid and invalid values as shown on the next screen.



4 - 194                                JULY 2006           Systems Utilities - User Guide
     SYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED TERMINOLOGY                         11/002
     CO - 01 - SEAGULL SOFTWARE CC
     BR - 01 - MAIN BRANCH
     TYPE (I/V) [I] ATTR [J]         VALUE [000000                 ]
     VALIDATION SCAN
     TYPE     ATTR   VALUE
     I        J <-->000000
     I        J      000001
     V        H      400001
     V        H      400003




     *** NO MORE ITEMS ***
     F1-SCAN, F5-TOGGLE, F10-PREV

In the above example there are two valid and two invalid values.




SU - Maintenance                                 JULY 2006                      4 - 195
4.9.    CURRENCY FILE MAINTENANCE - SU36
This information is used in a multi-currency environment. It is mandatory to set up at least
the default currency. The code for this consists of 4 blank characters.

       SYSTEM UTILITIES - CURRENCY FILE MAINTENANCE                          SU36   11/001
       CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED
       BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN
       CURRENCY LONG DESCRIPTION     [SA RAND             ]       LOCAL CURRENCY
       CURRENCY SHORT DESCRIPTION    [RAND]
       CURRENCY SIGN                 [R]
       COIN SYMBOL                   [C]
       FACTOR                 R1 =   [ 100]C
       DENOMINATIONS:          (R)   [         ]         (C) [     200]   HIGHEST
                                     [         ]             [     100]
                                     [       50]             [      50]
                                     [       20]             [      20]
                                     [       10]             [      10]
                                     [        5]             [       5]
                                     [         ]             [       2]
                                     [         ]             [       1]    LOWEST




       F3 - UPDATE, F8 - DELETE, F9 - PRINT, F10 - CODE, ESC - EXIT



CURRENCY CODE                         :      4 characters.
                                             Enter a unique code to define the currency.

CURRENCY LONG
DESCRIPTION                           :      20 characters.
                                             Enter a description for this currency.

CURRENCY SHORT
DESCRIPTION                           :      4 characters.
                                             Enter a short description for example, [RAND].

CURRENCY SIGN                         :      1 character.
                                             Enter the sign used for this currency i.e. [R]

COIN SYMBOL                           :      1 character.
                                             Enter the sign used for the coins i.e. [C]

FACTOR                                :      4 digits
                                             Enter the number of units (coin symbol) in each
                                             currency, such as 100 cents to the Rand.




4 - 196                                   JULY 2006           Systems Utilities - User Guide
The following applies only to the local currency which is accessed by enter a blank code.


DENOMINATIONS (R)                :     8 digits
                                       There are eight fields for possible Rand denominations,
                                       for example;
                                       100, 50, 20, 10, 5, 1.
                                       These run from the highest to the lowest.

DENOMINATIONS (c)                :     8 digits.
                                       There are eight fields for possible cent denominations,
                                       for example;
                                       50, 20, 10, 5, 2, 1.
                                       These run from the highest to the lowest.

You may enter values in either of the two sections. For instance R2.00 may either be
entered as 2 in the Rand section, or 200 in the cents section.

 Not all eight fields need to be used. However, the field used will determine the
 position when the value is eventually printed on the payslip.


The following only relates to a foreign currency, that is a non-blank code.

CURRENT EXCHANGE
RATE #                           :     2 digits.
                                       Enter the current exchange rate.

EXCHANGE RATE #                  :     2 digits.
                                       Occurs 31 times and refers to the day of the month.
                                       Enter the exchange rates as required.


The status line provides the prompts. Press [F3] to update, [F9] to print all currency details
on file, [F10] to return to the previous screen and [Esc] to exit the program.




SU - Maintenance                             JULY 2006                              4 - 197
4.10. SYSTEM FORMULA MAINTENANCE - SU37
This program allows formulae to be created that can be used throughout the various
systems. Versions of certain standard formulae may be user-defined that will then override
the standard formulae.
The formulae to be set up in this program are as follows ;

INVENTORY SYSTEM

Hash totals may be used in program IV10 - Issues/Receipts/ Adjustments/Transfers. You
may specify the fields which should be used to determine the hash totals. The formulae are
specified in program IV00 - System Record Maintenance and must start with `IV'.
Further formulae may be specified in program IV00 - System Record Maintenance. These
refer to the formulae to be used by the Purchase Ordering System to calculate average and
standard costs. Formulae should be set up in SU37 for both Company and Branch updates.
The naming convention is, for example, IV09 for branch update and IVC9 for the
corresponding company update. This convention pertains ONLY to cost updating via the
Purchase Ordering module.
Both IV36 - Selling Price Update and IV92 - Standard/Average Cost Update may
optionally use a formula set up in this program.
Both the Danger level and the Reorder level used in IV75 - Inventory/Danger/Re - Order
Level are calculated using these soft formulae.
A formula for smoothed usage may also be specified in program IV00 - System Record
Maintenance. The Inventory Month-end program IV90 - Month-end Update, will then use
this formula to update the smoothed usage field on all branch records.

PURCHASE ORDERS
`Standard order quantity' may also be calculated using a specified formula. This calculation
is used by the Purchase Ordering system in program PO40 - Create Recommended
Purchase Orders.




4 - 198                            JULY 2006         Systems Utilities - User Guide
ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE

The Accounts receivable system also allows you to specify a formula in program AR00 -
System Record Maintenance, which will determine the `Top 20' ranking of customers. This
formula will be used every time the Accounts Receivable Month-end program (AR92) is run.
A formula consists of;
1. THE FORMULA NAME
This is a four character variable consisting of two characters identifying the system to which
the formula relate and a two character number, for example;
IV01, AR05, ARAA, MP1X etc.
2. A DESCRIPTION OF THE FORMULA
A twenty five character description that identifies the formula, for example;
"IV REORDER QTY - ex PO40"
3. FORMULA VARIABLES
The variables that make up the formula. Variables have an identifier which is an alphabetic
value from `A' - `Z' and a description which identifies which actual system variable this letter
refers to. Variables may be of two types;
      a.    A field from a TITAN FILE. The user types F1 to scan the list of
            available fields and enters the number corresponding to the
            field, for example;
            A     [Br; Physical Inventory]
            B     [Br; Maximum Inventory ]
            C     [Br; Minimum Inventory ]
      b.    A constant value. The constant value is enclosed in quotes, for
            example;
            D   ["55.5"        ]
            E   ["3100"            ]




SU - Maintenance                             JULY 2006                               4 - 199
4.THE FORMULA
The formula is made up from the variables defined in (3) above. It follows normal rules of
precedence and bracketing, for example;
A+(B-(C*A)/A)-D*(D/E)
Enter SU37 to select the program.

4.10.1.   SETTING UP THE FORMULA
Level 1

FORMULA NAME                      :     4 characters.
                                        Enter the name of the formula to be created.

Refer to the individual User Guides to determine the correct pre-fixes. For example, either
IVxy for a branch formula, or IVCy for a company formula.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - FORMULA MAINTENANCE                            SU37   11/001
     FORMULA NAME    IV01
     DESCRIPTION                  [BR AVE COST GRV/REC      ]
     DIVISION BY ZERO ACTION      [ ]            Enter Variable A - Z
     A [BR:PHYSICAL QUANTITY          ]      N [                              ]
     B [BR:AVERAGE COST               ]      O [                              ]
     C [TR:TRANSACTION QUANTITY (PO1) ]      P [                              ]
     D [TR:TRANSACTION UNIT COST(PO1) ]      Q [                              ]
     E [                              ]      R [                              ]
     F [                              ]      S [                              ]
     G [                              ]      T [                              ]
     H [                              ]      U [                              ]
     I [                              ]      V [                              ]
     J [                              ]      W [                              ]
     K [                              ]      X [                              ]
     L [                              ]      Y [                              ]
     M [                              ]      Z [                              ]
     ----------------------------------- FORMULA ------------------------------------
     ((A*B)+(C*D))/(A+C)
     ------------------------- Example: (A+B+C)/(D*(A-B)) ---------------------------
     F3 - UPDATE, F6 - EXPAND FORMULA, F8 - DELETE, F10 - NEXT FORMULA, ESC - EXIT




Level 2

DESCRIPTION                       :     25 characters.
                                        Enter the description of the formula, for example New
                                        Total Cost.

DIVISION BY ZERO
ACTION                            :     1 character.
                                        Enter any variable from A to Z in this field.

(If the variable entered here is a blank, the answer to any calculation resulting in a `divide by
zero' will be zero. However, if the variable is not blank, then when a `divide by zero' condition
is found the result will be the value of the specified variable. This may be either a constant,
for example Z ["1"], or a field, for example Z [Br; Average Cost]).




4 - 200                               JULY 2006         Systems Utilities - User Guide
SELECTING THE FORMULA VARIABLES
Allocate variables to the letters A to Z displayed on the screen. This is done by positioning
the cursor alongside the letter required and pressing [F1]. The following will appear;

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - FORMULA MAINTENANCE                              SU37   11/103

     SELECT VARIABLE NUMBER       [ 69]
     069   CO:MONTHLY USAGE-4                  086 BR:PRODUCT CODE PART 2 (NUM)
     070   CO:MONTHLY USAGE-5                  087 BR:PRODUCT CODE PART 3 (NUM)
     071   CO:MONTHLY USAGE-6                  088 SY:NO.WEEKS CURRENT MTH (IV00)
     072   CO:PREVIOUS HALF YEAR               089
     073   CO:YEAR-TO-DATE USAGE               090
     074   BR:WEIGHTED FACTOR (WS)             091
     075   BR:DEMAND FACTOR                    092
     076   BR:SEASONAL FACTOR                  093
     077   BR:SUPPLY FACTOR                    094
     078   TR:TRANSACTION QUANTITY (PO1)       095
     079   TR:TRANSACTION UNIT COST(PO1)       096
     080   TR:TRANSACTION TOTAL COST(PO1)      097
     081   TR:TRANSACTION QTY (IV10/RA10)      098
     082   TR:TRANSACTION AVE COST (IV10)      099
     083   TR:TRANSACTION TOT COST (IV10)      100
     084   TR:TRANSACTION PRICE    (IV10)      101
     085   BR:PRODUCT CODE PART 1 (NUM)        102
     F2 - PREVIOUS PAGE, F10 - FORMULA,     ESC - EXIT




Select the variables by using the and  keys to highlight the required one and press
[Enter]. For a company formula, select the variables with the prefix CO; and for a branch
formula, select the variable with the prefix BR;
Repeat the variable selection until all the required variables have been chosen. Constant
values such as 1, can be entered alongside the letters in inverted commas.

ENTER THE FORMULA
Enter the formula at the bottom of the Level 2 screen using the letters corresponding to the
required variables.
Press [F3] to update the system.

“WHAT IF” SCENARIO
You may also use a “what if” scenario by using the “<” to indicate lowest and “>” to indicate
highest value. For instance, set A=average cost and B=standard cost. Set the formula to
A<B. The calculation will be the lowest of A or B.




SU - Maintenance                                 JULY 2006                               4 - 201
EXPAND THE FORMULA

Use the [F6] key to expand the formula. This means that the formula must be displayed in
words (as below) rather than in symbols.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - FORMULA MAINTENANCE                             SU37 11/001
     FORMULA NAME    IV01 BR AVE COST GRV/REC
     ------------------------------- EXPANDED FORMULA -------------------------------
     ((BR:PHYSICAL QUANTITY * BR:AVERAGE COST) + (TR:TRANSACTION QUANTITY (PO1) * TR:
     TRANSACTION UNIT COST(PO1))) / (BR:PHYSICAL QUANTITY + TR:TRANSACTION QUANTITY (
     PO1))
     --------------------------------------------------------------------------------




     *** EXPANDED FORMULA REQUEST                                 *** PRESS RETURN




4.10.2.   ALTERING AN EXISTING FORMULA
Call up the already existing formula and alter it as if it were a new one.

4.10.3.   DELETING AN EXISTING FORMULA
Call up the existing formula and press [F8] to delete it from the system.




4 - 202                              JULY 2006          Systems Utilities - User Guide
4.11. SYSTEM PASSWORD MAINTENANCE - SU38
The unique password facility which exists in the system secures company data and enforces
system and user restrictions.
If the user is not SYSADMIN, only the users own password may be altered. SYSADMIN (the
Systems Administrator) may amend and update all user records.
After running SU38 you are automatically logged off and must log on to test the access
permission.

THE "SYSADMIN" USER NAME
The SYSADMIN User Name has special capabilities - one of these being its ability to gain
access to the Password Maintenance and Installation Maintenance program. Individual sets
of access permissions for each user may be set up, alternatively, set up a global profile of
access permissions applicable to all users.
SYSADMIN permissions should be set to access all programs.
Enter SU38 to select the program.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - SYSTEM PASSWORD MAINTENANCE                   SU38    11/103
     USER/TEMPLATE NAME          [MR JAY   ]

     USER        TEMPLATE    GRP/DESCRIPTION                     LOCATION
     MR JAY   <--> N         PAYROLL CLERK                   PAYROLL OFFICE
     SANDRA         N        DEBTORS CLERK                   RECEPTION
     SYSADMIN       N        SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR




     ***   NO MORE ITEMS   ***

     F1-SCAN, F5-TOGGLE, F9 - PRINT




Use [F5] to toggle the display sequence between User name and description.
You may print the details using [F9]. This may be for a selected user or for all users if no
user name is entered.
In addition when selecting the print option, you may optionally create a comma delimited
output file which contains USER, NAME, PROGRAM, NAME and ACCESS of access
permissions.




SU - Maintenance                               JULY 2006                               4 - 203
The following options are available;

USER/TEMPLATE NAME                :        8 characters.
                                           [F1] can be used to scan the existing users by User
                                           Name, and the [F5] key will list users in description
                                           sequence. SYSADMIN can add/delete/or update a user
                                           record. Please see note under 'IS THIS A
                                           TEMPLATE' prompt.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - SYSTEM PASSWORD MAINTENANCE                         SU38     11/001
     NAME :                      SYSADMIN
     TEMPLATE? (Y/N)             [N]
     GROUP (4) / DESCRIPTION                     [SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR          ]
     REPORT DEFAULTS:        Destination        Printer#     Destinations:
      1                          [0]              [00]       1 = Report management system
      2                          [0]              [00]       2 = Direct to printer
      3                          [0]              [00]       3 = Direct to a file
                                                             4 = Direct to screen
                                                             5 = Mail recipient
     MEMORANDUM                 [                                   ]
     FORCE PASSWORD CHANGE      [N]
     SUPERVISOR                 [           ]
     LEVEL                      [9]
     VIEW ACCESS (R/W/D)?       [W]                  O/S ACCESS (Y/N)?       [Y]
     MAXIMUM LOGINS             [999]                MAX QUICK ACCESS LOGINS [999]
     CURRENT LOGINS             [023]                CURR QUICK ACCESS LOGINS[   ]



     F1-ACCESS, F2-DEFAULTS, F3-UPDATE, F4-CBW/RANGE, F8-DEL, F9-PRT




OPTION 1 - MAINTAIN USER DETAILS

USER NAME                         :        8 characters.
                                           Each user on the system may be allocated a User
                                           Name (up to eight characters). To find existing User
                                           Names on the system press [F1] to scan by User
                                           Name, and [F5] to scan by description, and press
                                           [Enter] to accept the code.

GROUP (4) / DESCRIPTION           :        30 characters.
                                           Press [Enter] to accept the details displayed or enter
                                           new details.
                                           The first 4 characters is regarded as a user group by
                                           the system. This may be used for instance in SU30 -
                                           Installation Maintenance Option 6, to set a user
                                           group which is allowed to access reports generated by
                                           a specific program.




4 - 204                                JULY 2006            Systems Utilities - User Guide
TEMPLATE? (Y/N)      :   Y/N
                         If you enter [Y], you may use the [F5] key to copy all
                         the details entered here when setting up a new user
                         belonging to this group. This includes passwords and
                         Company/ Branch Warehouse information. Once
                         copied you may change any or all of the parameters.
                         Please note that you will never be able to use the
                         User Name of a template to log in to TITAN.

REPORT DESTINATION   :   1 digit.
                         Default print options for the user. The options override
                         all other report defaults.

MEMORANDUM           :   30 characters
                         This is a memorandum field but you may leave it
                         blank.

FORCE
PASSWORD CHANGE      :   Y/N
                         If you enter [Y] you will be forced to change your
                         password after a specified number of log-ins. When
                         this number has been reached and you log on to
                         TITAN, a warning will be given and you will be
                         prompted to enter a new password. Please ensure
                         that you write this down and keep it in a secure
                         place.

FORCE PASSWORD
AFTER TIMES          :   2 digits
                         Enter the number of times this user may log on before
                         having to change his password. This prompt will only
                         display if you answered [Y] above.

SUPERVISOR           :   8 characters.
                         Certain programs and functions optionally require
                         supervisor permissions. If this facility is required for this
                         user enter the supervisor password here.

LEVEL                :   1 digit.
                         The Report Writer system and a few other programs
                         use access permission levels. Levels run from 0 (no
                         checking) up to 9 (the highest level of security). If for
                         instance a 5 is entered here, this specific user will have
                         access to all files, fields and programs with a security
                         level of 5 and lower.




SU - Maintenance               JULY 2006                                  4 - 205
VIEW ACCESS         :     R/W/D.
                          The View key which was set up in program SU01 -
                          Terminal and Printer Setup may give a user full
                          access to any of the TITAN files. This may be
                          undesirable.
                          [R] will allow a user to view any views set up by other
                          users.
                          [W] will allow a user to set up his own views.
                          [D] will deny a user all access to the View facility.

O/S ACCESS (Y/N)?   :     Y/N.
                          The Hot Key set up in program SU01 - Terminal and
                          Printer Setup allows users access to the operating
                          system. This may be undesirable.
                          [Y] will allow a user access to the operating system.
                          [N] will deny a user all access to the operating system.

MAXIMUM LOGINS      :     3 digits
                          A single operator can log in on more than 1 screen.
                          The number may be limited by the entry you make
                          here. If you enter 999 then the system will not check
                          and this number may be exceeded.

CURRENT LOGINS      :     3 digits
                          This is the number of times this user is currently logged
                          in.

MAXIMUM QUICK
ACCESS LOGINS       :     3 digits
                          A single operator can have more than one QUICK
                          ACCESS logins. The number may be limited by the
                          entry you make here. If you enter 999 then the system
                          will not check and this number may be exceeded.

CURRENT QUICK
ACCESS LOGINS       :     3 digits
                          This is the number of times this user is currently logged
                          in via a QUICK ACCESS login.




4 - 206                 JULY 2006        Systems Utilities - User Guide
Accept or make the necessary changes to the fields, the screen will now prompt for;

SET PASSWORD?                    :     Y/N.
                                       Enter [Y] to set passwords for the System
                                       Administrator. It is strongly recommended that they are
                                       set immediately as the new system has no passwords
                                       implemented and is not secure until this is done.

NEW PASSWORD                     :     8 characters.
                                       Enter the new password and the new control password
                                       (each up to eight characters in length). The chosen
                                       passwords must be at least five characters long.


 Write down the two passwords you selected before proceeding. Keep this
 information in a secure place. The passwords are now entirely under the users'
 control and act as the keys to the system.
 Should the SYSADMIN passwords be lost then only the Distributor or Dealer will
 be able to assist and a written authority to "unlock" the passwords must be
 provided. A charge is levied for "unlocking" the system.


If passwords have been previously entered, press [F10] to leave them unaltered. If you wish
to have no password, where you previously did have one, say [Y] to 'SET PASSWORD' and
press [Enter] in the password field. This will display '*NONE*' and you can press [F3].
Press [Enter] to accept the details as correct or enter [N] and re-enter the data.




SU - Maintenance                             JULY 2006                               4 - 207
OPTIONS FOR PASSWORD CONTROL
The following options are available;
  1.      No password              Answer [N] to the set password prompt.
          implemented
  2.      One password             Answer [Y] to the prompt, enter the password and then
                                   press [Enter] to bypass the control password entry.
  3.      One password and a       Answer [Y] to the prompt and enter the password
          control password         followed by the control password.


Enter [F1] to set USER ACCESS PERMISSIONS, [F2] to set USER DEFAULTS or [F4] to
set Company/Branch/Warehouse options.




4 - 208                                JULY 2006    Systems Utilities - User Guide
SELECT ACCESS PERMISSIONS

Enter [F1] to select the set access permission function or press [Esc] to leave the Password
Maintenance program.
Set up the access permissions for all the systems and programs for the user name selected.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - SYSTEM PASSWORD MAINTENANCE                   SU38 11/001
     SYSTEM NAME                 [AB]       Setting access for :   SYSADMIN
     SYSTEM   DESCRIPTION                                          SYSTEM ACCESS
     AB <--> APPLICATION BUILDER                                   All Access
     AP       ACCOUNTS PAYABLE                                     All Access
     AR       ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE                                  All Access
     BM       BILL OF MATERIALS                                    All Access
     CB       CASH BOOK                                            All Access
     CU       CONVERSION UTILITIES                                 All Access
     CV                                                            All Access
     DU       DEALER UTILITIES                                     All Access
     FA       FIXED ASSETS                                         All Access
     GL       GENERAL LEDGER                                       All Access
     IS       INSTALMENT SALES                                     All Access
     IV       INVENTORY                                            All Access
     JC       JOB COSTING                                          All Access
     MP       MONTHLY PAYROLL                                      All Access
     OP       OPTIMISATION                                         All Access

     F1 - SCAN, F3 - ALL ACCESS, F8 - DENY ALL, ESC - EXIT



SYSTEM NAME                       :     2 characters.
                                        The system prompts for the system code to which
                                        access permission is to be set.


Enter the system code or press [F1] to scan forwards through the systems available.
The [F3] key gives the user access to all systems/programs and the [F8] key denies access.
It is possible to set access to individual programs within a system.




SU - Maintenance                              JULY 2006                             4 - 209
The access permission levels are;
READ DATA
By defining a system or program as having read data access, will restrict the user to
accessing data from that system or program in a read data mode only. You will not be
permitted to update the data. for example;
A user with a read data access permission only may inquire into the Accounts Receivable
masterfile (using program AR30 - Customer File Maintenance). Should you attempt to
update a field in the masterfile, a message is displayed.
READ AND WRITE
The system or program may be defined to allow a user read and write access permission.
This is the highest level of access permission with no restrictions - enabling a user to read
and write data within a system or program, for example;
A user can enquire into and amend Customer masterfile data.
DENIED
Should a user be denied all access permission to a system or program, then the latter
cannot be loaded and run by that user, for example;
If a user enters program number AR30 (which has access denied to him) the program will
not load and a message to the affect will be displayed.


Programs within a system are displayed in an automatic scan. The function keys perform as
follows;


 [F3]     ACCEPT VALUES         The access permissions will be accepted as displayed.
 [F4]     SUPERV                This indicates that a supervisor password will be required to
                                access this program.
 [F5]     TOGGLE                Change the permission on a program from WRITE to READ
                                to DENY to WRITE.
 [F6]     ALL READ              All the programs displayed will be changed to the all read
                                access permission.
 [F7]     ALL WRITE             All the program access permissions will be changed to the
                                read/write access level.
 [F8]     ALL DENIED            All programs will be set to an access denied state.


Press [F6] to change all the programs in this system to an all read access permission status.
Press [F7] to change the status to all read/write, and [Esc] to return to the system logon
menu.
As it may not be necessary to give a user all read or all write or all denied access permission
for every program, some will be set to read, others to write, and yet others to access denied
status.




4 - 210                             JULY 2006          Systems Utilities - User Guide
To set individual programs to a specific access permission status, proceed as follows;
1. Scan to the program and select keys.
2. Enter [F5] to toggle permission until the correct permission is displayed.
3. Continue through the system customising the access permissions required.
Press [F3] when all the access permissions for the system are set.
After pressing [F3], the program returns to the system name scan.
Continue entering access permissions until a profile for all systems to be used by this user
has been set up.
On completion, press [Esc] to leave the program. The system will return logon menu.




SU - Maintenance                            JULY 2006                              4 - 211
SELECT USER DEFAULTS


     SYSTEM UTILITIES - SYSTEM PASSWORD MAINTENANCE                       SU38   11/103
     USER NAME :                 SYSADMIN
     DEFAULT COMPANY            [00]        SYSTEM DEFAULT
     DEFAULT BRANCH             [00]        SYSTEM DEFAULT
     DEFAULT WAREHOUSE          [00]        SYSTEM DEFAULT
     Company/Branch control at start of program:
      SUPPRESS CO/BR SCREEN?     [Y]    Y=Yes N=No     Space=System default
      RESET TO DEFAULT CO/BR?    [N]    Y=Yes N=No     Space=System default
     CLEARING OF SU61;SU60 ACCESS[Y]    Y=Yes   N=No   U=SU60 access to own report




     F3 - UPDATE, F8 - DELETE, ESC - EXIT




The defaults selected here will override those entered in program SU30 - Installation
Maintenance, option 1.

DEFAULT COMPANY #                 :      2 digits
                                         This will be the number of the company most often
                                         accessed by the user. This company number will
                                         appear in all programs as the default company and will
                                         be pre-loaded into the company number field.

DEFAULT BRANCH #                  :      2 digits.
                                         The number of the branch most often used in
                                         conjunction with the default company for this user. This
                                         number will appear together with the company number
                                         as the default company and branch in all programs.
                                         This combination will be pre-loaded into all the
                                         company/branch fields, for example if company 01 and
                                         branch 01 have been entered as the default
                                         combination, the company number prompt will read
                                         COMPANY/BRANCH # 01/01).




4 - 212                                JULY 2006          Systems Utilities - User Guide
DEFAULT WAREHOUSE        :   2 digits.
                             The number of the warehouse most often used in
                             conjunction with the default the branch for this user.
                             This number will appear together with the
                             company/branch number as the default warehouse in
                             all programs where warehouse is relevant. The use of
                             warehouses must be specified in program IV00 -
                             System Record Maintenance.

COMPANY BRANCH CONTROL AT START OF PROGRAM

SUPPRESS CO/BR SCREEN? :     Y/N
                             If suppressed, this user will not be prompted to enter
                             Co/Br defaults on every program entered, but will have
                             to use the [F10] key to access that screen.

RESET TO DEFAULT CO/BR   :   Y/N
                             If set to "Yes" the Co/Br defaults are reset to the initial
                             defaults for this user after exiting the program.

CLEARING OF SU61;
SU60 ACCESS                  : Y/N
                             If this is set to [Y], the system will automatically call
                             SU61 - Report Management Maintenance at logout
                             and this user may delete all reports in the Spooler.
                             Normally only 'SYSADMIN' may perform this function.
                             If this is set to [N] then SU61 - Report Management
                             Maintenance will not be called automatically at
                             logout.
                             If it is set to [U] and the user does not have access to
                             SU61 - Report Management Maintenance, he will
                             only be able to access his own reports in SU60 -
                             Report Management System.




SU - Maintenance                   JULY 2006                                 4 - 213
SELECT COMPANY/BRANCH/WAREHOUSE AND RANGE ACCESS
This screen allows you to specify which company and branches this user may access. You
may set as many combinations as required. The default is all Companies, Branches and
Warehouses. In all cases '00' indicates all. If for instance a user may access all branches
and warehouses in Company 03, you will enter 03,00,00. If the user may only have access
to warehouse 01 and 03 in Company/Branch 01/02, you must make two entries, that is
01,02,01 and 01,02,03.
In addition, there is a feature which allows the access of users to s specified range of items.
At present this relates only to customers. In order to enable this option, you must enter a
range code in SU31 - Descriptions File Maintenance type RN. Customers, must be
CUST.
The [F1] key provides a scan of all the combinations that this user may access.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - SYSTEM PASSWORD MAINTENANCE                     SU38   11/012
     CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED
     COMPANY/BRANCH/WH ACCESS FOR ABBY
      COMPANY              [ 1] (00 = ALL COMPANIES)
      BRANCH               [00] (00 = ALL BRANCHES)
      WAREHOUSE            [00] (00 = ALL WAREHOUSES)
     CO        BR        WH
     01 <-->   00        00
     02        01        01
     02        01        02
     03        00        00




     *** NO MORE ITEMS ***
     F1-SCAN, F2-RANGES, F3-UPDATE, F8-DELETE, F9-PRINT



COMPANY ACCESS                    :     2 digits.
                                        Enter the required company number or '00'.

BRANCH ACCESS                     :     2 digits.
                                        Enter the required branch number or '00'.

WAREHOUSE ACCESS                  :     2 digits.
                                        Enter the required warehouse number or '00'.


Press [F3] after entering each combination and [F10] on completion to return to the previous
screen. You may also use the [F8] key to delete a specific combination.
Press [F2] to enter ranges of items such as customers to which this user will have access.




4 - 214                               JULY 2006           Systems Utilities - User Guide
RANGE ACCESS

The screen below shows a range selection for CUST. This code was entered in SU31 -
Descriptions File Maintenance type RN.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - SYSTEM PASSWORD MAINTENANCE                    SU38   11/012
     CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED
     ACCESS RANGE FOR ABBY
      COMPANY   - 00
      BRANCH    - 00
      WAREHOUSE - 00
      RANGE TYPE       [CUST]    CUSTOMER FILE
      MINIMUM RANGE    [901000                        ]
      MAXIMUM RANGE    [909999                        ]




      F1-Scan, F3-Update, F10-Return



RANGE TYPE                        :     4 characters
                                        Enter the range type as entered in SU31 -
                                        Descriptions File Maintenance or scan for the
                                        available types.

MINIMUM RANGE                     :     Dependent on code structure
                                        Enter the lower limit of the range required.

MAXIMUM RANGE                     :     Dependent on code structure
                                        Enter the upper limit of the range required.

Press [F3] to update the details and [F10] to return to the previous screen.




SU - Maintenance                              JULY 2006                                4 - 215
4.12. MAXIMUM RANGEBATCH PROCESSING - SU39
Batch Processing is the ability to create and submit a job, which is made up of a normal
sequence of system operations, so that the job may be run a number of times without the
presence of an operator.
The process is twofold;
   Create a job by describing the keystrokes and programs desired for the job.
   Enter the job into either a queue to run in the background at a later stage OR run directly
    in the foreground.
Key concepts are;
   Jobs.
   Creating and running a job.
   Background and foreground.
   Queues - background jobs are entered into a queue
Set-ups;
   Files SUJOB and SUQUE (created in SU00 - Create System Files).
   HOME key setup (SU01 - Terminal and Printer Setup).
   bTITAN available for background job processing.


Enter SU39 to select the program.

      SYSTEM UTILITIES - JOB PROCESSING                                      SU39   11/001

      SELECT FUNCTION             [1]     1   -   Capture a Job
                                          2   -   Run a Job/Task
                                          3   -   Job Maintenance
                                          4   -   Queue Status




      F9 - PRINT OPTIONS, ESC - EXIT




4 - 216                                 JULY 2006              Systems Utilities - User Guide
The following options are available;
Level 1

SELECT FUNCTION                  :     [1] Capture a job.
                                       [2] Run a job/task.
                                       [3] Job Maintenance (SYSADMIN usage only).
                                       [4] View the queue status.


In order for jobs to be run in the background, the following scripts with the required
keystrokes must be used. This script starts up a job scheduler which runs in the background
polling the job queue for jobs to run. Use btitan.
Correct the script to invoke UT00B instead of UT00. The same applies to DOS. UT00B is
invoked instead of UT00. This will invoke UTMN with a parameter which indicates
background processing. When processing in background the system will find the specified
job in SUQUE. If there is no job the system will wait for 30 seconds and try again. The
system will require the keystrokes from a specific job name e.g. AGANAL.INP.




SU - Maintenance                            JULY 2006                           4 - 217
OPTION 1 - CREATING A JOB
Select Option [1] and the system presents a standard scan of the jobs currently available.
Use the arrow key or type the name of a new job.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - JOB PROCESSING                                   SU39   11/001

     JOB NAME                    [ACUFILE ]
     DESCRIPTION                 [Creates BSEQ files for ACU     ]
     ACCESS INDICATOR            [0] Level 1 - 9
     SINGLE USER ONLY?           [Y]
     CAPTURE STATUS              OFF
     RUN STATUS                  IDLE
     CAPTURE DATA                ON FILE




     F3 - UPDATE, F5 - TOGGLE, F8 - DELETE, F10 - NEXT JOB, ESC - EXIT




Level 2

JOB NAME                          :      8 characters
                                         The name or ID of the job.

JOB DESCRIPTION                   :      30 characters
                                         A description of the job's contents.

ACCESS INDICATOR                  :      1 digits
                                         This refers to the 'level' entered for each user in
                                         program SU38 - System Password Maintenance,
                                         and determines which users will be able to run this
                                         job.

SINGLE USER ONLY?                 :      1 characters
                                         Job may be Multi or Single user. If single user then only
                                         one user may run the job at a time.




4 - 218                               JULY 2006          Systems Utilities - User Guide
The following fields provide information regarding the status of the job.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - JOB PROCESSING                                 SU39   11/001

     JOB NAME                    [ACUFILE ]
     DESCRIPTION                 Creates BSEQ files for ACU
     ACCESS INDICATOR             0
     RUN RESTRICTIONS            SINGLE USER
     CAPTURE STATUS              OFF
     RUN STATUS                  IDLE
     CAPTURE DATA                ON FILE




     F3 - RESET RUN/CAPTURE FLAG, F10 - NEXT JOB, ESC - EXIT



CAPTURE STATUS                    :      Is ON if the job is being captured, otherwise OFF.
                                         The same job may not be captured by another user if
                                         the CAPTURE STATUS is ON.

RUN STATUS                        :     Is ON if the job is being run, otherwise IDLE.
                                        The same job may not be run by another user if the
                                        JOB was captured in SINGLE user.
                                        A job may not be run if;
                                        - The job is currently being run and it was created in
                                  single user.
                                        - The job is currently being captured.
                                        - There is no captured data on file.

CAPTURE DATA                      :      Displays ON FILE if data for the job exists.




SU - Maintenance                              JULY 2006                                 4 - 219
TO CREATE A NEW JOB
Create the job by entering a new job as described in Option [1] and complete the attributes
(description, access, user mode). Use the [F3] key to save the entries.
Press the [F5] to begin the capture.
A message CAPTURING...JOBNAME will appear on line 24 and the system prompts at the
main menu for data to be entered. An indicator will appear in the top right hand side of the
screen to show the capture toggle (either ON, OFF or BYPASS). Initially it is ON therefore
data typed in will be captured.
This example creates a job to print in AR70 - Customer File Print.
Enter AR70 and enter [Enter], the toggle is ON therefore the keystrokes will have been
captured into the job.
The AR70 first screen appears prompting for [Y] or [N]. Enter return to proceed to the next
screen.
On the second screen the [F3] key will start the report with the default options, however,
please note the following;
If [F3] is pressed with the toggle ON - the keystroke will be captured, but the report will also
now be run immediately. To prevent the report from running the following procedure must be
followed;
Press the HOME key (set up in SU01 - Terminal and Printer Setup for the terminal) the
toggle will change to OFF, press HOME again and the toggle will show BYPASS. Press
HOME again and the toggle will be ON. Thus the capture toggle works in a circular manner;
   ON -> OFF -> BYPASS -|
   ON - implies capture to JOB and run in actual TITAN
   OFF - implies DO NOT capture to JOB, but run in TITAN
   BYPASS - implies CAPTURE in JOB, but do not run (bypass) in TITAN

 If your [HOME] key does not work, another Control key, for example CntrlR may
 be used provided you set it up in SU01 - Terminal and Printer Setup.
Therefore, to capture in JOB, but bypass TITAN, press the [HOME] key twice to set the
toggle that appears in the top right hand corner to BYPASS. Now press [F3]. Note that
nothing happens in TITAN, but the [F3] will have been captured.
To now escape from AR70 set the toggle to OFF in order to register the ESCAPE in TITAN,
but not to capture it to the job. Press HOME and [Enter] to toggle to OFF and then
ESCAPE. The system returns to the main menu with the toggle OFF.
Enter SU39 - Option [1] for Capturing and scan for the job being currently created. Note that
the CAPTURE STATUS is ON.
Use [F5] to toggle the CAPTURE STATUS to OFF.
The record will now appear with CAPTURE STATUS OFF, RUN STATUS IDLE and
CAPTURE DATA ON FILE.




4 - 220                             JULY 2006          Systems Utilities - User Guide
    SYSTEM UTILITIES - JOB PROCESSING                              On   SU39   11/001

    JOB NAME                    [CHEQUES ]
    DESCRIPTION                 [REMITTANCE ADVICE/PAYMENT RUN ]
    ACCESS INDICATOR            [0] Level 1 - 9
    SINGLE USER ONLY?           [Y]
    CAPTURE STATUS              OFF
    RUN STATUS                  IDLE
    CAPTURE DATA                ON FILE




    F3 - UPDATE, F5 - TOGGLE, F8 - DELETE, F10 - NEXT JOB, ESC - EXIT




 We recommend that for security reasons you use 'Q' to quit out of titan after the
 last job to be run is completed.




SU - Maintenance                             JULY 2006                                  4 - 221
OPTION 2 - RUNNING A JOB
Select Option [2] and a standard scan - including a partial scan - of the jobs currently
available is provided.
Use the arrow key or type the name of the job.

      SYSTEM UTILITIES - JOB PROCESSING                                On     SU39   11/001

      JOB NAME                     [CHEQUES ]
      JOB NAME       DESCRIPTION                   OWNER      ACCESS        STATUS
      CHEQUES <-->   REMITTANCE ADVICE/PAYMENT RUN SYSADMIN      0           IDLE
      STATE          STATEMENT PRINTT              SYSADMIN      0           IDLE
      TRANSFER       SP91 INV/CR NOTE RUN          SYSADMIN      0           IDLE




      *** NO MORE ITEMS ***
      F1 - SCAN, F10 - OPTIONS MENU, ESC - EXIT




The job may be run in the foreground or background.


 A JOB MAY NOT BE RUN...

     When the CAPTURE STATUS is ON.
     When the job was created in SINGLE USER mode and is currently being run.
     When there is no CAPTURE DATA on file.




4 - 222                               JULY 2006          Systems Utilities - User Guide
RUNNING IN THE FOREGROUND (In reactive mode)
Using the job created for AR70 in the above example, run the job in the foreground. Your
screen is locked and the keystrokes as entered in the capture are automatically followed so
that the report for AR70 can be seen running. The job run is logged in the System Log
(SU62 - Logging Maintenance).

RUNNING IN THE BACKGROUND (Batch Mode)
If the background option is selected you are prompted for a time that the job must be
scheduled.
The job is then assigned a QUEUE NUMBER and entered into the queue. The presence of
jobs in the queue can be viewed in option 4.
If bTITAN is not running the job will remain in the queue indefinitely.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - JOB PROCESSING                                SU39   11/001

     JOB NAME                     [STATE     ]
     DESCRIPTION                  [STATEMENT PRINTT            ]
     RUN STATUS                   IDLE
     EXECUTION MODE               [I] I - Interactive Mode
                                       B - Batch Mode




     DETAILS OK?                  [Y]
     F10 - NEXT JOB, ESC - EXIT




SU - Maintenance                             JULY 2006                                4 - 223
OPTION 3 - JOB MAINTENANCE

 Only SYSADMIN may use option [3].
SYSADMIN may selectively alter a CAPTURE STATUS from ON to OFF or terminate a job
running.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - JOB PROCESSING                                SU39   11/001

     JOB NAME                    [CHEQUES ]
     DESCRIPTION                 REMITTANCE ADVICE/PAYMENT RUN
     ACCESS INDICATOR             0
     RUN RESTRICTIONS            SINGLE USER
     CAPTURE STATUS              OFF
     RUN STATUS                  IDLE
     CAPTURE DATA                ON FILE




     F3 - RESET RUN/CAPTURE FLAG, F10 - NEXT JOB, ESC - EXIT




4 - 224                              JULY 2006          Systems Utilities - User Guide
OPTION 4 - QUEUE STATUS

The status of the queue will show jobs waiting to be run, jobs that have been completed
and jobs that had errors and can be scanned and maintained. A job may not be removed
from the queue once it is already running.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - JOB PROCESSING                                  SU39    11/100



     QUEUE #                          [0001]
     JOB NAME     QUE #     ENTERED      TIME AND DATE DUE COMPLETE   STATUS
     ACUFILE <--> 0001      070942       070937 on 93/09/20           WAITING




     ***   NO MORE ITEMS   ***
     F1 - SCAN, F8 - DELETE, F10 - OPTIONS, ESC - EXIT




NOTES ON "bTITAN"
"bTITAN" can be started by the SYSTEMS ADMINISTRATOR. The program cycles
indefinitely, polling the queue for jobs to be run.
You may press [Esc] when the system displays “CHECKING QUEUE” and the system
allows you to exit.
"bTITAN" may be run with (a) diagnostics on a screen or (b) unnoticed in the background.
Depending on the setup:
1.Set Background Display flag in SU30 - Installation Maintenance option 1 (screen 1) to "Y"
Start-up as : bTITAN
2.Set Background Display flag in SU30 - Installation Maintenance option 1 (screen 1) to "N"
Start-up as : bTITAN>/dev/null&
To terminate bTITAN must be killed.
Option 2 may not be used in DOS.




SU - Maintenance                                 JULY 2006                               4 - 225
                                          5. MISCELLANEOUS MODULE

5.1.   THE MISCELLANEOUS MODULE MENU
This module consists of the following programs which perform miscellaneous tasks.


  SU40       MEMORY/SPEED OPTIMISATION
  SU41       REFERENCE FILE MAINTENANCE
  SU42       COMMON CATEGORY INPUT/MAINTENANCE
  SU44       CUSTOMISED FILE LAYOUT MAINTENANCE




5 - 226                           JULY 2006        Systems Utilities - User Guide
5.2.   MEMORY/SPEED OPTIMISATION - SU40
SU40 is a special memory optimisation program that enables the SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATOR (SYSADMIN) to configure the TITAN system according to the needs of
his respective users.

 This program should NOT be used without expert knowledge of the product and
 if in any doubt whatsoever, please contact the Dealer or Distributor before using.
The concept of SU40 is to allow frequently used files to remain open and procedures to
reside in memory thus speeding up interactive use of the product, but at the same time
requiring larger memory capacity per user.
SU40 opens files by means of the I/O modules which are resident in the UT program
directory. There is an I/O module for each TITAN data file. When a user logs on to TITAN
and accesses a program for the first time during that session, the I/O modules specified in
SU40 are Initialised and loaded into SU40.
The SYSTEMS ADMINISTRATOR may specify which procedures are to be loaded and
which files are to be opened for all users (via [F3] for ALL USERS) and for individual users
(by selecting the users name). The only procedures that may be entered are the following ;
   UTHELP               online help
   UTLIB                RW/AB Applications only
   UTCALC               RW/AB Applications only
   UTSCAN               RW/AB Applications only
   UTPRT                Printer routines
   UTDATE               Date routines
   UTCOBR               Company/Branch routines
   UTHOT                HOT KEY functions
   UTPAINT              Screen repainter


And any relevant I/O module, for example FCODET, PROGSYS, PASSWD, ...


Entering ANY other procedures into the field could cause corruptions to the TITAN suite of
programs.

 NOTE 1 The general rule should be - any file in the UT directory except those
 beginning with UT which are not listed above.
 NOTE 2 Should incorrect routines or I/O modules be entered in SU40, the user
 may encounter error messages on initialising those routines. These errors may
 even crash the user out of TITAN. Should this occur, it may be best to remove
 CALLFILE from the data directory, re-enter TITAN, recreate and rebuild CALLFILE
 in SU40.




SU - Miscellaneous                       JULY 2006                                5 - 227
We recommend that the following I/O modules remain in memory by loading them in SU40
for all users (if sufficient memory is available);
 Recommended          Optional
 FCODET               UTCOBR
 PROGSYS              UTDATE
 PASSWD               UTPRT
 SYSCAP               DESCRIP
                      NUMBERS

If you wish to allow Help and Hot KEY functions then the following should be added either
for specific users or for all users (if sufficient memory available);
  UTHELP          UTHOT
  UTPAINT

Users of AB/RW may optimise operations by having the following procedures included in
SU40 for those specific users only;
  UTLIB        UTSCAN
  UTCALC       RWDICT
  RWVARS

Please ensure that these routines are NOT loaded for all users, as this will very quickly
overload your memory and slow the system down. They should be loaded only for the
relevant users.


Optimise memory by having the I/O modules for the relevant programs included in SU40 for
THOSE SPECIFIC users ONLY.
For example an operator using SP10 - Order Entry could have the following loaded in SU40
against his name;
  SLMAST       ORDERS
  DELADD       STKBAL
  STKMAS




5 - 228                             JULY 2006         Systems Utilities - User Guide
An operator using a different program could have a different set of I/O modules loaded
against his name.

 NOTE 1 It is very important that a user does not have I/O modules loaded in
 SU40 for systems which the user does not require, as this will seriously slow
 down performance. For example do not load General Ledger files when the user
 is only doing Sales Order Processing transactions.
 NOTE 2 Please note the statement "if sufficient memory is available". Should a
 system's memory be heavily utilised (e.g. 90% used), then it will be necessary to
 reduce the number of I/O modules per user in SU40. Heavy memory utilisation
 may be indicated by slow runtime or access time, by a warning message
 (dependent on the system) and by excessive disk activity, which indicates that
 memory is swapping back and forth from the disk. It may be useful to delete I/O
 modules from SU40 and start rebuilding step by step as described above, to
 determine the level at which no more routines may be usefully added in SU40.




SU - Miscellaneous                      JULY 2006                                5 - 229
5.3.    REFERENCE FILE MAINTENANCE - SU41
This program allows you to create Reference Types and associated codes. One of these
types may be linked via AR00 - System Record Maintenance to the debtors masterfile,
and one to debtors transactions.
These codes may also be included in alternate sequences set up via program AR33 -
Alternate Sequence - User Defined.
If the types are specified in program AR00 - System Record Maintenance, the program
AR30 - Customer File Maintenance will allow you to enter a code of the type specified on
each debtors masterfile record. In addition, all the SP1 programs in the Sales Order
Processing System, will ask for an entry which will then be transferred via SP91 - Interface
to AR and SA to the Accounts Receivable system where reporting may be done in
alternate sequences.

 If you wish to make any of these codes mandatory in the SP1 programs, add the
 type to SU31 - Descriptions File Maintenance with a code “-MAN”. In AR30 -
 Customer File Maintenance, add this code via [F7] to mark a debtor as having to
 have this mandatory code. The SP1 programs will check to see if a “-MAN” code
 exists for the debtor when a blank code is entered.
SP33 - Alternate Sequence also allows the inclusion of these codes in an alternate
sequence.
Enter SU41 to access the program.
To create new reference types enter the following when the screen shown below displays.

       SYSTEM UTILITIES - REFERENCE FILE MAINTENANCE                       SU41   11/001
       CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED
       BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN
       REFERENCE TYPE      [   ]


       DESCRIPTION                 [MOTIVATION CODES               ]
       SHORT DESCRIPTION           [MOTIVE    ]




       F3 - UPDATE, F8 - DELETE, F10 - TYPE, ESC - EXIT




Level 1

REFERENCE TYPE                      :        2 characters.
                                             Enter a two character reference type or press [F1] to
                                             scan the file of types and their descriptions on file.


5 - 230                                 JULY 2006           Systems Utilities - User Guide
 Please use only uppercase characters for reference types as lower case is
 reserved by the system for future use.




SU - Miscellaneous                  JULY 2006                           5 - 231
DESCRIPTION                       :      30 characters
                                         Enter a description for this reference type, for instance
                                         ‘MOTIVATION CODES’.

SHORT DESCRIPTION                 :      8 characters
                                         Enter a short description for this reference type. This
                                         will be used as a label in reports and on screens where
                                         you are required to enter codes for this reference type.

When you have created the reference type, you may enter codes for this type.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - REFERENCE FILE MAINTENANCE                      SU41   10/002
     CO - 01 - SEAGULL SOFTWARE CC
     BR - 01 - MAIN BRANCH
                   [A1   ]       WARDS
                                 A1

     DESCRIPTION                [E.N.T                          ]
     FOR ACCOUNT NO             [1010            ]




     F3-UPDATE, F8-DELETE, F10-TYPE, ESC-EXIT



REFERENCE CODE                    :      8 characters.
                                         Enter a reference code for the reference type.

DESCRIPTION                       :      30 characters
                                         Enter a description for the reference code.

FOR ACCOUNT NO                    :      15 characters
                                         If you enter an account number here, this reference will
                                         only be available for entry for the specified debtor. If
                                         you leave it blank it will relate to all debtors.

Press [F3] to update the file. Continue in this manner until you have entered all the codes for
this type.

TO DELETE A RANGE OF CODES FOR A TYPE
You may delete a range of codes for a type. Do this as follows:
When the code is blank press [F8], the prompt ‘[F8] – DEL RANGE’ will be displayed. Press
[F8] again and enter the range to be deleted.




5 - 232                               JULY 2006          Systems Utilities - User Guide
5.4.    COMMON CATEGORY INPUT/MAINTENANCE - SU42
Common categories are used across all systems. This means a duplication of effort in many
cases. For instance both AR32 - Category File Maintenance, and AP34 - Purchase
Analysis Maintenance, must be maintained. This program allows you to indicate which
systems must be updated. This will then update the relevant files such as DRANAL and
CRANAL.
When you call up this program and scan the categories, the details will display as per the
screen below. Use [F9] to print the details.
Enter SU42 to select the program.

       SYSTEM UTILITIES - COMMON CATEGORY INPUT/MAINTENANCE                    SU42   11/101
       CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED
       BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN
       CATEGORY         [0003]
       CODE   DESCRIPTION                                     AR AP IV JC CB
       0003<-->Sales - Shower/Cubicle set                     Y    N   N   N   N
               GL # 5100/20/100/00
       0020    Sales - Paint                                   Y   N   N   N   N
               GL # 5100/00/200/00
       0100    Sales - Shower/Cubicle set                     Y    Y   N   Y   N
               GL # 5100/20/100/00
       1000    Sales - Tools                                  Y    Y   Y   Y   Y
               GL # 5100/00/100/00
       1100    Purchases - Handshowers                         Y   Y   Y   Y   Y
               GL # 6100/20/100/00
       1125    Purchases - Miscellaneous                       Y   Y   Y   Y   Y
               GL # 6100/40/300/00


       F1 - SCAN FWDS, F6 – UPD ALL, F9 - PRINT, F10 - PREV.SCRN, ESC - EXIT




SU - Miscellaneous                           JULY 2006                                         5 - 233
To allow all codes to be updated to selected systems press [F6]. To enter details for a
category, enter the category. The screen below displays.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - COMMON CATEGORY INPUT/MAINTENANCE                 SU42   11/101
     CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED
     BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN
     CATEGORY          0100           DESCRIPTION   [Sales - Shower/Cubicle set
     GL ACCOUNT CODE   [5100/20/100/00]             Sales - Shower/Cubicle set
     UPDATE   AR       [Y]
     UPDATE   AP       [Y]
     UPDATE   IV       [N]
     UPDATE   JC       [Y]
     UPDATE   CB       [N]




     F1 - GL SCAN, F3 - UPDATE, F8 - DELETE, F10 - CATEGORY, ESC - EXIT




When you use this you enter the category, it's description and General Ledger code as
normal and then indicate which systems must be updated. Please note that the description
is defaulted from the General Ledger but you may change it. Both the SUANAL file as well
as the normal DESCRIP and category files are updated with the stated details


 Please note that this program only allows you to enter the code, its description
 and General Ledger code. Any additional information MUST be entered in the
 individual programs.




5 - 234                              JULY 2006          Systems Utilities - User Guide
5.5.    CUSTOMIZED FILE LAYOUT MAINTENANCE - SU44
This program allows you to define any input file and then to convert it to a new file which one
of the standard TITAN input programs can read and use to update files.
Enter SU44 to select the program.
Level 1

       SYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED IMPORT FILE LAYOUT MAINTENANCE        SU44   11/005


       ENTER IMPORT PROGRAM NAME    [CV03 ]
       IMPORT PROGRAM DESCRIPTION    AP - TRANSACTION TAKEON
       ENTER LAYOUT #               [ 1]
       IMPORT FILE NAME             [INFLAT ]
       IMPORT FILE TYPE             [FL]       FL = FIXED LENGTH
                                               CD = COMMA DELIMTED
       LAYOUT DESCRIPTION           [IMPORT CREDITORS MASTERFILE   ]




       F3-ACCEPT, F4-CONVERT, F8-DELETE, ESC-EXIT



ENTER IMPORT
PROGRAM NAME                         :     6 characters
                                           Enter the name of the TITAN import program

IMPORT PROGRAM
DESCRIPTION                          :     This is displayed by the system and cannot be
                                           changed.

ENTER LAYOUT #                       :     2 Digits
                                           You may have more than one input layout and thus
                                           need to specify the layout number.

IMPORT FILE NAME                     :     8 characters
                                           Enter the name of the file to be imported.

IMPORT FILE TYPE                     :     2 characters
                                           You may import two types of files. A Fixed length or a
                                           comma delimited file.

LAYOUT DESCRIPTION                   :     30 characters
                                           Enter a name for this layout.




SU - Miscellaneous                            JULY 2006                                    5 - 235
Level 2
     SYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED IMPORT FILE LAYOUT MAINTENANCE       SU44 11/005
              CV03   - IMPORT CREDITORS MASTERFILE
              LAYOUT # 01 INFILE NAME 08
     VARIABLE NAME           A/N DGT DEC POS POS     DEFAULT VALUE
     COMPANY                   N 02 00 0001 [ 1] [                                ]
     BRANCH                    N 02 00 0003 [ 2] [                                ]
     SUPPLIER #                A 06 00 0005 [ 3] [                                ]
     DOCUMENT DATE (CCYYMMDD) N 08 00 0011 [ 0] [******************************]
     TRANSACTION TYPE          N 02 00 0019 [ 0] [******************************]
     DOCUEMTN PREFIX           A 02 00 0021 [ 0] [******************************]
     DOCUMENT #                A 08 00 0023 [ 0] [******************************]
     LINE #                    N 04 00 0031 [ 0] [******************************]
     X-REFERENCE               A 08 00 0035 [ 0] [******************************]
     GL ACCOUNT #              A 30 00 0043 [ 0] [******************************]
     CATEGORY CODE             A 04 00 0073 [ 0] [******************************]
     DOCUMENT AMOUNT           S 09 02 0077 [ 0] [******************************]
     TAX AMOUNT                S 09 02 0089 [ 0] [******************************]
     DISCOUNT AMOUNT           S 09 02 0101 [ 0] [******************************]
     PAST ALLOCATION           S 09 02 0113 [ 0] [******************************]
     CURRENT ALLOCATION        S 09 02 0125 [ 0] [N                               ]
     AMOUNT MARKED             S 09 02 0137 [ 0] [******************************]
     DUE DATE                  N 08 00 0149 [ 0] [******************************]
     DETAILS OK? (Y/N)                      [Y]
     F1-NEXT, F2-PREV, F3-ACCEPT, F4-CONVERT, F5-FILL*, F8-DELETE, F10-PROG

Use the screen above to map your file (right) to the Titan file layout (left). You may either
specify the position on your file of the data, or a default value.
The [F5] will fill the default field with asterisks indicating that no file changes are required for
those fields.

 Please note that if you are using a Comma Delimited type file as input, the
 position (POS) is the field number, and when you are using a Fixed Length file,
 then it is the actual position in the file.
Level 3
     SYSTEM UTILITIES - CUSTOMISED IMPORT FILE LAYOUT MAINTENANCE        UTCVRT11/004


     CONVERT FILE FOR IMPORT PROGRAM :   CV03

     IMPORT FILE NAME              INFLAT
     IMPORT FILE TYPE              FL          FL = FIXED LENGTH
                                               CD = COMMA DELIMTED
     CONVERT TO FILE NAME         [CRIMPORT]




     F3-CONTINUE, ESC-EXIT

Once you have entered all the details, press [F4] to convert. You will be requested to enter a
new file name. This will be the name you enter when you run the program using the Titan
conversion program.




5 - 236                               JULY 2006            Systems Utilities - User Guide
5.6.    GENERAL CROSS REFERENCE MAINTENANCE - SU45
This program enables you to have general cross references, which do not relate or interface
to any other TITAN programs. These may be viewed in program SU55 - General Cross
Reference Enquiry.
Enter SU45 to select the program.
Level 1

       SYSTEM UTILITIES - GENERAL CROSS REFERENCE MAINTENANCE      SU45   10/002
       CO - 01 - SEAGULL SOFTWARE CC
       BR - 01 - MAIN BRANCH
        TYPE   XREF 1                             TYPE   XREF 2
       [XX ] [GGG                  ]             [YYYY] [GGGG        ]
       XREF/TYPE SEQUENCE
        XX     GGG                          <--> YYYY    GGGG




       *** NO MORE ITEMS ***
       F1-SCAN, F5-TOGGLE, F10-PREV




You can enter a type and description for both Cross Reference 1 and 2. There after a new
box pops up enabling you to enter a free-form attribute, a comment and a link. This latter
may be a link to a picture or a sound which will then display. You may enter a sound or a
picture in this field as follows <WAV=filename.wav> in which case the sound will play every
time the cross rference is displayed. For a picture it should be <JPG=filename.jpg>.
The [F5] key allows you to toggle between scans for Cross Reference types 1 anD 2.




SU - Miscellaneous                           JULY 2006                             5 - 237
                                                          6. ENQUIRY MODULE

6.1.   THE ENQUIRY & SCAN MODULE MENU
This module consists of the following programs;
 SU50 - COMPANY FILE ENQUIRY.
 SU51 - DESCRIPTIONS FILE SCAN.
 SU52 - NUMBERS FILE SCAN.
 SU53 - OBJECT VERSION NUMBER MAINTENANCE.
 SU58 - SYSTEM PASSWORD ENQUIRY
These programs enquire into and allow the System Utilities data to be viewed.
Enter SU5 to display the menu.
Enter SU to return to the System Utilities menu or M, to return to the main menu.




6 - 238                            JULY 2006         Systems Utilities - User Guide
6.2.    COMPANY FILE ENQUIRY - SU50
This program provides an enquiry facility into the company and branch file, showing which
systems are available to each company and branch combination.
Enter SU50 to select the program.
Level 1

COMPANY/BRANCH                      :       2 digits/2 digits.
                                            Enter the Company/Branch required for enquiry or scan
                                            using [F1]. The enquiry detail is displayed.


The enquiry shows which systems are active for the selected company/branch combination.
Press [Enter] when the enquiry is complete.

       SYSTEM UTILITIES - COMPANY FILE ENQUIRY                          SU50   11/001
       CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED
       BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN
       SYSTEM #                   [1 ]
       NO       SYSTEM   DESCRIPTION
       01     <-->GL     GENERAL LEDGER SYSTEM
       02         AR     ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE
       03         AP     ACCOUNTS PAYABLE
       04         SP     SALES ORDER PROCESSING
       05         IV     INVENTORY CONTROL
       06         PO     PURCHASE ORDERS SYSTEM
       07         SA     SALES ANALYSIS SYSTEM
       08         WP     WEEKLY PAY SYSTEM
       09         MP     MONTHLY PAY SYSTEM
       10         FA     FIXED ASSETS SYSTEM
       11         ES     ESTIMATING SYSTEM
       12         JC     JOB COSTING SYSTEM
       13         BM     BILL OF MATERIALS
       14         IS     INSTALMENT SALES

       F1 - SCAN, F10 - CO/BR, ESC - EXIT




SU - Enquiry                                      JULY 2006                             6 - 239
6.3.    DESCRIPTIONS FILE SCAN - SU51
The user may scan and view the description file record types on file.
Enter SU51 to select the program.
Level 1

STARTING RECORD TYPE                :     2 characters.
                                          Enter the starting record type or press [F1] to scan.


All the description types within the selected company/branch are displayed.

       SYSTEM UTILITIES - DESCRIPTIONS FILE SCAN                        SU51   11/001
       CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED
       BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN
       STARTING RECORD TYPE        [AS]
       TYPE    CODE   DESCRIPTION
       AS              GL ACCOUNTING SECTIONS
       AS      A1      Fixed Assets
       AS      A2      Current Assets
       AS      C1      Capital
       AS      C2      COST OF SALES
       AS      E1      Cost of Sales
       AS      E2      Admin Expenses
       AS      I1      Trade income
       AS      I2      Other Income
       AS      L1      Long Term Liabilities
       AS      L2      Current Liabilities
       AS      XX      ALL ACCOUNTS
       BL              LAST YEAR'S BUDGET

       F1 - SCAN FORWARDS, F10 - CO/BR, ESC - EXIT




The status line displays the available options. Press [F1] to scan forwards, [F2] to scan
backwards, [F10] to access the Company/Branch screen and [Esc] to exit the program.




6 - 240                                 JULY 2006        Systems Utilities - User Guide
6.4.    NUMBERS FILE SCAN - SU52
The program scans the NUMBERS file and displays the type, description and the next audit
number for each audit number series.
Enter SU52 to select the program.

       SYSTEM UTILITIES - NUMBERS FILE SCAN                         SU52   11/001
       CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED
       BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN
        TYPE                              NEXT NO.
        A NEXT DEBTORS AUDIT #              1399
        B NEXT GL BATCH #                    150
        C NEXT CREDIT NOTE #                 111
        D NEXT STOCK AUDIT #                 730
        E NEXT INSTALMENT SALE AUDIT #         1
        F NEXT CR INTERNAL REF. #            283
        G NEXT GL AUDIT #                    861
        I NEXT INVOICE #                    3380
        J JOB COST AUDIT NO                    1
        O NEXT ORDER #                      1683
        P NEXT PURCHASE ORDER #              164
        Q NEXT RECOMMENDED PUR/ORDER #       150
        R NEXT CREDITORS AUDIT #            2233
        S ESTIMATING REVISION NO               2
        V                                      5
        W TEST                                 7

       F1 - SCAN FORWARDS, F10 - CO/BR, ESC - EXIT




The status line displays the available options. Press [F1] to scan forwards, [F10] to access
the Company/Branch screen and [Esc] to exit the program.




SU - Enquiry                                    JULY 2006                           6 - 241
6.5.    OBJECT VERSION NUMBER MAINTENANCE - SU53
This program is supplied to provide the end user of TITAN with the simple means to display,
to report on, and to update records of the version numbers of the programs in use.
The user is able to display, to report on, and to update records of both the version numbers
of the most current programs and also a saved list.
In both instances a comparison is made against the program version numbers distributed by
the TITAN distributor in the file OBJDIST.

       SYSTEM UTILITIES - OBJECT VERSION ENQUIRY                          SU53   11/001
       SELECT VERSION FUNCTION:   [1]   1   EXTRACT CURRENT VERSIONS
                                        2   DISPLAY VERSION NUMBERS
                                        3   PRINT VERSION TABLE REPORT
                                        4   SAVE LATEST VERSION NUMBERS TO SAVE FILE
                                        5   LOAD NEW VERSION NUMBER FILE




       ESC - EXIT


MAIN FUNCTIONS

When starting in SU53 two files are always loaded; OBJVER, the default work file which
contains the most recently updated program version numbers, and OBJDIST, which
contains the program version numbers distributed by the TITAN Distributor.
While each file is loading the message PROCESSING..., and the numbers from 1 to 100 are
displayed on the last line of the screen. Should either file be inaccessible then a warning
message is displayed. This will not prevent you from using the program, as unavailable data
will be represented by omissions in the object version number report or omissions in the
screen display.
Once the work files have been loaded then the version function selections are displayed.
The functions are;

EXTRACT CURRENT VERSIONS
Update the work file i.e. OBJVER with the latest program version numbers. You may select
programs to update per program, per system, or all programs - all systems. The version
numbers of the selected programs are then extracted, and the work file is updated.
On entry to this selection the work file OBJVER is always loaded if it is not the current work
file (see below - selection LOAD NEW VERSION NUMBER FILE).




6 - 242                                 JULY 2006          Systems Utilities - User Guide
DISPLAY VERSION NUMBERS

Display the program version numbers of the current work file (see below - selection LOAD
NEW VERSION NUMBER FILE) alongside the program version numbers distributed by the
TITAN distributor. Where user program version numbers differ from those distributed it will
be marked with an asterisk (*).

PRINT VERSION TABLE REPORT

Print a program version number report on the current work file (see below - selection LOAD
NEW VERSION NUMBER FILE). The distributed program version numbers are also printed.

SAVE LATEST VERSION NUMBERS TO SAVE FILE

Facility to save the latest program object version numbers to the save file OBJSAVE. This
file may then be accessed at a later stage to both display and report on object version
numbers (see below - selection LOAD NEW VERSION NUMBER FILE).

LOAD NEW VERSION NUMBER FILE
Select a new program object version number file as the work file. The file to be loaded is
specified by the user but defaults to either OBJSAVE or OBJVER, depending on which file
is the current work file.
The display and report functions are performed on whichever file is the current work file.
The message ESC - EXIT is displayed in the message area. Press the [Esc] key or the
[F10] key to return to the last TITAN screen.




SU - Enquiry                                JULY 2006                              6 - 243
EXTRACT CURRENT VERSIONS

FLAG AND EXTRACTION OF SYSTEMS
Set extraction flags per system or program, and extract the version numbers of the
programs flagged.
A matrix of the abbreviations of the TITAN systems is displayed, with a cursor <, marking the
current system.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - OBJECT VERSION ENQUIRY                                 SU53   11/001
     FLAG AND EXTRACTION OF PROGRAMS                       GL<-- PO    PS    RW
                                                           AR<-- SA    JC    AB
                                                           AP    WP    BM    OP
                                                           SP    MP    IS    CB
                                                           IV    FA    SU
      PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:                                 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION:
     [SYSTEM RECORD MAINTENANCE                        ]   [ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE         ]
     AR00<-- AR10<-- AR20<-- AR30<--   AR40<--   AR50<--   AR60<-- AR70<-- AR80<--    AR90<--
     AR01<-- AR11<-- AR21<-- AR31<--   AR41<--   AR51<--   AR61<-- AR71<-- AR81<--    AR91<--
     AR02<-- AR12<-- AR22<-- AR32<--   AR42<--   AR52<--   AR62<-- AR72<-- AR82<--    AR92<--
     AR03<-- AR13<-- AR23<-- AR33<--   AR43<--   AR53<--   AR63<-- AR73<-- AR83<--    AR93<--
     AR04<-- AR14<-- AR24<-- AR34<--   AR44<--   AR54<--   AR64<-- AR74<-- AR84<--    AR94<--
     AR05<-- AR15<-- AR25<-- AR35<--   AR45<--   AR55<--   AR65<-- AR75<-- AR85<--    AR95<--
     AR06<-- AR16<-- AR26<-- AR36<--   AR46<--   AR56<--   AR66<-- AR76<-- AR86<--    AR96<--
     AR07<-- AR17<-- AR27<-- AR37<--   AR47<--   AR57<--   AR67<-- AR77<-- AR87<--    AR97<--
     AR08<-- AR18<-- AR28<-- AR38<--   AR48<--   AR58<--   AR68<-- AR78<-- AR88<--    AR98<--
     AR09<-- AR19<-- AR29<-- AR39<--   AR49<--   AR59<--   AR69<-- AR79<-- AR89<--    AR99<--




     RETURN - FLAG, F3 - EXTRACT THIS SYS, F6 - FLAG ALL, F8 - FLAG NONE, F10 - BACK




The description of the current system is displayed below the matrix. The message RETURN
- FLAG PROGRAMS, F3 - EXTRACT ALL, F6 - FLAG ALL, F8 - FLAG NONE, F10 -
BACK is displayed in the message area.
The direction keys will move the cursor within the matrix, selecting a new system as the
current system.
The [RETURN] or [Enter] key will flag the current system, and allow individual programs
within that system to be flagged. (See next section - FLAG AND EXTRACTION OF
PROGRAMS).
The [F3] key will extract the program version numbers of all flagged programs or systems.
The speed of extraction varies from machine to machine but may take as long as two
seconds for each program flagged. As a program version number is located the result is
displayed on the screen. When the extraction is complete the original matrix is redisplayed
on the screen.
The [F6] key will flag all programs of all systems for extraction; [F8] key will remove the flags
from all programs and all systems. The [F10] key will return you to the SELECT VERSION
FUNCTION screen, updating the work file (OBJVER) with any new version numbers
extracted.




6 - 244                                JULY 2006              Systems Utilities - User Guide
FLAG AND EXTRACTION OF PROGRAMS

The [RETURN] or [Enter] key on the FLAG AND EXTRACTION OF SYSTEMS screen
displays this screen, and allows the individual programs within the current system to be
flagged.
A matrix of the program numbers from 00 to 99 for the current system is displayed, with a
cursor [ marking the current program. The message RETURN - FLAG, F3 - EXTRACT
THIS SYS, F6 - FLAG ALL, F8 - FLAG NONE, F10 - BACK is displayed in the message
area.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - OBJECT VERSION ENQUIRY                         SU53   11/001
     EXTRACTION OF VERSION NUMBERS                   GL<-- PO    ES    RW
                                                     AR<-- SA    JC    AB
                                                     AP    WP    BM    OP
                                                     SP    MP    IS    CB
                                                     IV    FA    SU
                                                     SYSTEM DESCRIPTION:
                                                     [ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE     ]
     AR0010/001
     AR01
     AR02
     AR03
     AR04
     AR05




     PROCESSING - AR06




The direction keys will move the cursor within the matrix, selecting a new program as the
current program. The [RETURN] or [Enter] key will set an extraction flag for the current
program.
The [F3] key will extract the program version numbers of all flagged programs in the current
system. As a program version number is located the result is displayed on the screen. When
the extraction is complete the original system matrix is redisplayed on the screen.
The [F6] key will flag all programs in the current system for extraction. The [F8] key will
remove the flags from all programs in the current system, and the [F10] key will return to the
FLAG SYSTEMS screen, retaining any flags set for the current system. If the [F3] key is
subsequently pressed in the FLAG AND EXTRACTION OF SYSTEMS screen then these
flagged programs will be extracted.




SU - Enquiry                                     JULY 2006                             6 - 245
DISPLAY EXTRACTED VERSION NUMBERS
This selection allows you to display the program version numbers for each system.
A matrix of the abbreviations of the TITAN systems is displayed, with a cursor, <, marking
the current system. The description of the current system is displayed below the matrix.
The direction keys will move the cursor within the matrix, selecting a new system as the
current system.
The [RETURN] or [Enter] key will display the work file version numbers for the selected
system, along with the distributed version numbers. If the work file is the default OBJVER
then the work file versions will be those most recently extracted. Otherwise the work file
version numbers will be saved version numbers. If all the version numbers do not fit onto
one screen the message ENTER TO CONTINUE will be displayed in the message area.
The [RETURN] or [Enter] key will display the remaining version numbers on the screen.
If there are no version numbers for the current system then the message SYSTEM NOT
LOADED - CONTINUE [Y] will be displayed in the message area.
The [N] key will return to the DISPLAY EXTRACTED VERSION NUMBERS screen. The [Y]
key will display the distributed version numbers for the current system.
The [F10] key will return to the SELECT VERSION FUNCTION screen.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - OBJECT VERSION ENQUIRY                           SU53   11/001
     DISPLAY EXTRACTED VERSION NUMBERS                GL     PO   ES    RW
                                                      AR     SA   JC    AB
                                                      AP     WP   BM    OP
                                                      SP     MP   IS    CB
                                                      IV     FA   SU
                                                       SYSTEM DESCRIPTION:
                                                       [GENERAL LEDGER           ]
      EXTRACTED    DISTRIBUTED   EXTRACTED    DISTRIBUTED   EXTRACTED   DISTRIBUTED
      GL0041/001    GL0041/001   GL1041/024    GL1041/024   GL20         GL20
      GL01          GL01         GL11          GL11         GL21         GL21
      GL02          GL02         GL12          GL12         GL22         GL22
      GL03          GL03         GL13          GL13         GL23         GL23
      GL04          GL04         GL1441/007    GL1441/007   GL24         GL24
      GL05          GL05         GL1541/016    GL1541/016   GL25         GL25
      GL06          GL06         GL16          GL16         GL26         GL26
      GL07          GL07         GL17          GL17         GL27         GL27
      GL08          GL08         GL18          GL18         GL2841/004   GL2841/004
      GL09          GL09         GL19          GL19         GL29         GL29

     ENTER TO CONTINUE


PRINT VERSION NUMBER REPORT
Print a program version number report with an option to print to the management system or
direct to the printer.
While the report is being spooled the two character abbreviation of each system if displayed
on the message line.




6 - 246                               JULY 2006            Systems Utilities - User Guide
SAVE LATEST VERSION NUMBERS TO SAVE FILE.

Save the current work file to the save file OBJSAVE.
The message UPDATE SAVED OBJECT VERSION FILE? is displayed on the screen.
Accepting this option will write the current work file to the save file OBJSAVE.

LOAD NEW VERSION NUMBER FILE.
Load a new object version file as the current work file.
The message LOAD NEW FILE? is displayed on the screen. Accepting this option then
displays the messages ENTER NAME OF VERSION FILE, THE CURRENT FILE IS
XXXXX where XXXXX is either OBJVER (the default work file), or OBJSAVE, depending on
which work file has been loaded.
The work file name which is not the current work file is displayed in the accept field as the
default file to load. You may press [RETURN] or [Enter] to accept the file name or, should
you have another object version file to load, that file name may be specified.

 CAUTION - The format of the work file is operating-system dependant, and files
 may not be directly portable across operating systems. For example,
 transporting these files between the UNIX and DOS-based operating systems
 requires the standard newline/carriage-return conversion necessary for all text
 files.




SU - Enquiry                                 JULY 2006                              6 - 247
6.6.   RUN USER-DEFINED SCANS – SU54

This program allows you to view all user-defined scans created in program SU34 – Capture
User Defined Scans.
Enter SU54 to access the program.
Level 1
Enter the name or scan for the required scan.
Level 2
Enter the selection parameters presented on the screen. These are based on the access
code used. For instance, if you selected an access code containing Company and Branch,
you will be able to specify which Company/Branch combinations to use.
The results of the scan displays as shown below.




Use the scroll bars on the right hand side to scroll through the data.
The single arrows move you one record at a time and the double arrows, one page at a
time.




6 - 248                             JULY 2006          Systems Utilities - User Guide
6.7.   GENERAL CROSS REFERENCE ENQUIRY - SU55
This program enables you to view general cross references, which do not relate or interface
to any other TITAN programs. These are created in program SU45 - General Cross
Reference Maintenance.
Enter SU55 to select the program.




SU - Enquiry                               JULY 2006                             6 - 249
6.8.    SYSTEM PASSWORD ENQUIRY - SU58
The program holds program and user access in a file called SUMASPGM and dynamically
updates it as changes are made. It is only an enquiry program.
Enter SU53 to select the program.

       SYSTEM UTILITIES - SYSTEM PASSWORD ENQUIRY                               SU58   11/006
       USER NAME                   [ABBY         ] SYS/PROGRAM NAME [     ]


       USER       DESCRIPTION                PROGRAM DESCRIPTION                   ACCESS
       ABBY   <-->TEMPLATE FOR   GROUP   1   AB     APPLICATION BUILDER            Write
       ABBY       TEMPLATE FOR   GROUP   1   AP     ACCOUNTS PAYABLE               Write
       ABBY       TEMPLATE FOR   GROUP   1   AR     ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE            Write
       ABBY       TEMPLATE FOR   GROUP   1   BL     BANK LINK                      Write
       ABBY       TEMPLATE FOR   GROUP   1   BM     BILL OF MATERIALS              Write
       ABBY       TEMPLATE FOR   GROUP   1   CB     CASH BOOK                      Write
       ABBY       TEMPLATE FOR   GROUP   1   CS     CUSTOMER SPECIAL               Write
       ABBY       TEMPLATE FOR   GROUP   1   CU     CONVERSION UTILITIES           Write
       ABBY       TEMPLATE FOR   GROUP   1   CV     CONVERSION UTILITIES           Write
       ABBY       TEMPLATE FOR   GROUP   1   CW     CHART WRITER                   Write
       ABBY       TEMPLATE FOR   GROUP   1   DU     DEALER UTILITIES               Write
       ABBY       TEMPLATE FOR   GROUP   1   EI     ELECTRONIC DATA INTERCHAN      Write
       ABBY       TEMPLATE FOR   GROUP   1   FA     FIXED ASSETS                   Write
       ABBY       TEMPLATE FOR   GROUP   1   GL     GENERAL LEDGER                 Write

       F1-SCAN, F5-TOGGLE, F9-PRINT




Use the [F5] key to toggle the display sequence and layout.




6 - 250                                      JULY 2006         Systems Utilities - User Guide
                                                         7. PRINT MODULE

7.1.   THE PRINT MODULE MENU
This module consists of the following report programs;
 SU71 - DESCRIPTIONS FILE PRINT
Enter SU7 to display the Print Module menu.

 The programs in this module are pre-loaded with the most frequently used range
 selections. To change the selection criteria, answer N (No) to the "DETAILS OK?
 (Y/N)" prompt and move the cursor to the selection option or range to be
 changed.




SU - Print                                 JULY 2006                    7 - 251
7.2.   DESCRIPTION FILE PRINT - SU71
The program prints a report listing all descriptions on file. These descriptions are set up and
maintained by program SU31 - Descriptions File Maintenance.
Enter SU71 to select the program.
The program has three option levels.
Level 1

TYPE FROM-TO                     :     2 characters.
                                       Enter the required range of description types or press
                                       [Enter] in both fields to print all the description types on
                                       file.

DETAILS OK? (Y/N)                :     Y/N
                                       Accept the default or make the required change.




7 - 252                              JULY 2006                 Systems Utilities - User Guide
 COMPANY : 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED       DESCRIPTIONS FILE REPORT                    DATE : 20/11/91 @ 15:04        PAGE #   1
 BRANCH : 01 - CAPE TOWN                                                                          SU71 11/001
 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
       TYPE    CODE    DESCRIPTION                       DETAILS
 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
       CG             VENDOR GROUP

      CG     0000    MISCELLANEOUS VENDORS

      CG     0010    DISTRIBUTORS - TOOLS

      CG     0020    DISTRIBUTORS - TIMBER PRODUCTS

      CG     0030    DISTRIBUTORS - HOME IMPROVEMEN

      CG     0040    DISTRIBUTORS - AGRICULTURAL

      CG     0050    MANUFACTURERS - HARDWARE ITEMS

      CG     0060    MANUFACTURERS - LEISUREWARE




 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
       TYPE    CODE    DESCRIPTION                       DETAILS
 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
       CL             LOCAL CURRENCY

      CL     1000    DOLLARS




 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
       TYPE    CODE    DESCRIPTION                       DETAILS
 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
       CM             VENDORS ALTERNATE CATEGORY

      CM     10      DECRIP CODE

      CM     1000    ALTERNATES FOR PRODUCT/GROUP




                                              * * *   E N D   O F   R E P O R T   * * *




                                                    SU71 - Descriptions File Report




SU - Print                                                                JULY 2006                                                     7 - 253
                                                   8. REPORT MANAGEMENT

8.1.     THE REPORT MANAGEMENT AND LOGGING SYSTEM MENU
This module consists of the following programs;
 SU60 - REPORT MANAGEMENT PROGRAM
 SU61 - REPORT MAINTENANCE PROGRAM
 SU62 - LOGGING MAINTENANCE PROGRAM


The Report Management program provides the following functions;
      Displaying reports on the screen.
      Changing the status of reports.
      Deleting a single/range of reports.
      Printing a single/range of reports.
      Placing a range of reports on hold.
      Releasing a range of reports from hold.
The Report Maintenance program optimises the disk space used by the Report
Management system.
The Logging Maintenance program allows users to control the level of logging and to
interrogate the logfile.
Enter SU6 to display the menu.
Enter SU to return to the System Utilities menu or M, to return to the main menu.




8 - 254                                JULY 2006      Systems Utilities - User Guide
8.2.    THE REPORT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM - SU60
This is a multi-purpose program that provides a complete report management facility.
Most print programs route reports directly to a printer or to the report management system. If
the latter option is selected, reports can then be managed through this system.
The program consists of various options, all of which will be described on the following
pages.
Enter SU60 to select the program.

ENTER SELECTION                        :       1 digit
                                               Select the required option. Each of these options will
                                               be fully described on the following pages.

       SYSTEM UTILITIES - REPORT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM                            SU60   11/001


       ENTER SELECTION       [1]   1       Display/Alter Status/Delete/Print
                                   2       Place a Range of Reports on Hold
                                   3       Release a Range of Reports from Hold
                                   4       Print a Range of Reports
                                   5       Delete a Range of Reports
                                   6       Display a Range of Reports




       ESC - EXIT




SU - Report Management                                     JULY 2006                          8 - 255
8.2.1.    DISPLAYING A REPORT ON A SCREEN
Press [Enter] to select Option [1] and a blank page is displayed. The status line gives all the
available options.
Each report has a system generated number. These numbers are allocated and attached to
each report as it is routed to the report management system.
Press [F7] to scan to the last report.
Press [F1] to scan or enter a number from which the scan is to start. This action will start a
scan of all reports on file starting with the number entered or displayed.
Press [F4] to route the report to an email address. A box will display allowing you to enter an
email address, copy addresses and a subject,

 SYSTEM UTILITIES   - REPORT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM                          SU60   11/001
 REPORT NUMBER                 [1   ]
 REPORT    CO/BR    PGM    USERNAME    DATE   TIME PRT   FORM   PAGES   STATUS   COUNT
 000001<-->01/01    AP74   SYSADMIN 91/06/03 17:34 01    NORMAL     2    PRINT   01/0+
 000002    01/01    AP79   SYSADMIN 91/06/03 17:35 01    NORMAL     3    PRINT   01/0+
 000003    01/01    AP79   SYSADMIN 91/06/03 17:34 01    NORMAL     1    PRINT   01/0+
 000004    01/01    AP80   SYSADMIN 91/06/03 17:35 01    NORMAL     1    PRINT   01/0+
 000005    01/01    AP79   SYSADMIN 91/06/03 17:46 01    NORMAL     3    PRINT   00/0+
 000006    01/01    AP79   SYSADMIN 91/06/03 17:46 01    NORMAL     1    PRINT   00/0+
 000007    01/01    AP00   SYSADMIN 91/06/03 17:50 01    NORMAL     2    PRINT   00/0+
 000008    01/01    SP19   SYSADMIN 91/06/04 12:28 01    ORDER      2    PRINT   00/0+
 000009    01/01    SP12   SYSADMIN 91/06/05 15:58 01    NORMAL     1    PRINT   00/1+
 000010    01/01    SP13   SYSADMIN 91/06/05 16:00 01    INVOIC     2    PRINT   00/0+
 000011    01/01    SP74   SYSADMIN 91/06/05 16:03 01    NORMAL     3    PRINT   00/0+
 000012    01/01    SP74   SYSADMIN 91/06/06 13:51 01    NORMAL     3    PRINT   00/0+
 000013    01/01    SP74   SYSADMIN 91/06/06 13:59 01    NORMAL     4    PRINT   01/0+
 000014    01/01    SP14   SYSADMIN 91/06/06 14:02 01    NORMAL     4    PRINT   01/0+
 000015    01/01    SP70   SYSADMIN 91/06/06 14:03 01    NORMAL     6    PRINT   01/0+




 F1 - SCAN, F4 – EMAIL, F5 - TOGGLE, F6 - DISPLAY, F7 - END, F8 - DEL, F9 - PRT, F10 - OPTS




The scan displays the following;

REPORT NUMBER                       :     The sequential number allocated to each report sent to
                                          the system.

COMPANY/BRANCH                      :     The company and branch which generated the report.

PGM                                 :     The program number that generated the report.

USER NAME                           :     The name of the user that ran the program.

DATE                                :     The date the report was sent to the system.

TIME                                :     The time the report was sent to the system.

PRT                                 :     The default printer associated with the report.



8 - 256                                 JULY 2006           Systems Utilities - User Guide
FORM                               :     The type of form to be used to print the report, for
                                         example;
                                         NORMAL = normal continuous stationery;
                                         REMADV = remittance advice stationery;
                                         INVOIC = invoice stationery;
                                         STMNT = statement stationery and
                                         CRNOTE = credit note stationery.

PAGES                              :     The number of pages in the report. This will include any
                                         blank feed pages before and after the report.

STATUS                             :     [PRINT]
                                         Report is available for printing.
                                         [HOLD]
                                         Report is on hold.
                                         [BUSY]
                                         Report has not been completed or print program has
                                         been aborted halfway through.
                                         [EMPTY]
                                         Displays where no data was found to print.

COUNT                              :     00/0+.
                                         This indicator is made up of two components. The first
                                         shows the number of copies that have been printed, for
                                         example 02/ indicates that two copies have been
                                         printed. The second component shows whether a print
                                         is mandatory before a report may be deleted, (/1+)
                                         indicates that at least one copy of the report must be
                                         printed prior to deletion being permitted.


To scan forwards at this point press [F1] or press [F2] to scan backwards, if on a
subsequent page. Using the cursor keys, move the pointer to the report to be displayed and
press [F6] or [Enter].
If the first page is blank, press [Enter] to move to the second page. This is due to the
program having produced a blank form feed page prior to printing the first page.
How the report is displayed is determined automatically by the characteristics of the terminal
being used. The characteristics of the terminal are set up in program SU00 - Create System
Files.
If the terminal is capable of displaying 132 characters, the report will appear as if printed. If,
however, the terminal can only display 80 characters, then only the first 80 characters are
displayed. In this case, press [Right arrow] to move the display across to the next 80
characters, and again if the report is wider than 132 characters.




SU - Report Management                              JULY 2006                          8 - 257
The program displays 18 lines at a time. To view the next 18 lines, press [Enter]. Repeat
this to view the remainder of the page.
With displays that only show 80 characters, press [Left arrow] to move the display back to
the page margin.


  USING FUNCTION KEYS TO VIEW
  Press [F1] to view the next page or enter a page number and press
  [Enter].
  Press [F2] to view the previous page.
  Press [F7] to view the last page of the report.
  Press [F10] to return to the option menu.


8.2.2.     CHANGING THE REPORT STATUS
Press [Enter] to select this option [1].
Enter the report sequence number for which the status is to be altered or press [F1] to scan
the report file.
All reports are held by the report management system in a print state (available for printing).
To change this status to a hold state, press [F5].
If the User has read/write access permission the program will proceed. If, however, the User
has no read/write or denied access permission, the program will prompt with the message
"NO WRITE PERMISSION - Report may not be altered or deleted".
The User will not be able to alter the status.
If the User has access permission, the report selected will be placed on hold and all print
options relating to this report will be suspended.
Pressing [F5] will toggle the status from PRINT to HOLD. Pressing it a second time will
toggle the status back to print.

 The status may only be changed by the User who created the report or by the
 "Super User" SYSADMIN.
Press [F10] to return to the option selection.




8 - 258                              JULY 2006          Systems Utilities - User Guide
8.2.3.     DELETING A SINGLE REPORT
Press [Enter] to select this option [1].
Enter the report sequence number to be deleted and press [F8] or press [F1] to scan the
report file, select and press [F8].
If the User has read/write access permission the program will proceed. If, however, the User
has no read/write or denied access permission, the program will prompt with the message
"NO WRITE PERMISSION - Report may not be altered or deleted".
The User will not be able to delete the report.
If the User has access permission, the report selected will be deleted.

 Only reports that have a count of 01/01 or /00 may be deleted by normal users
 although SYSADMIN and Level 9 Users may delete unprinted reports. Deletion is
 only permitted by the User who created the report or by the "Super User"
 SYSADMIN and any Level 9 Users.
Press [F10] to return to the option selection menu.

 If you have deleted a report in error you may re-instate it, provided the details are
 still on file and you know the report number. Do this as follows:
 Enter the report number and press [F8] to undelete it. Enter all relevant header
 details.




SU - Report Management                            JULY 2006                      8 - 259
8.2.4.     PRINTING A SINGLE REPORT
Press [Enter] to select this option [1].
Enter the report sequence number to be printed and press [F9] or press [F1] to scan the
report file, select and press [F9].
The screen will now display the default options selected. Press [Enter] to accept the default
or enter new options.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - REPORT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM                          SU60   11/001

     PRINT REPORT # 0002                   FROM PAGE [0001]
     PRINTER      # 01
                                             TO PAGE [0003]
     NOTE: THE NUMBER OF PAGES TO BE PRINTED IS      0003
     NUMBER OF COPIES TO BE PRINTED                 [1]
     DO YOU WANT A TEST PRINT?                      [N]
     NUMBER OF TEST PRINT PAGES                     [0001]
     PRINT EVEN, ODD OR ALL (E,O,A)                 [A]
     ARE YOU SURE?   (Y/N)                          [Y]




     F3 - ACCEPT, F6 - ALTER PRINTER VALUES, F10 - OPTION MENU, ESC - EXIT


 Only the person who created the report, the Super User ‘SYSADMIN’ and Level 9
 Users may print reports.
The options are;

FROM PAGE                         :        4 digits.
                                           The program defaults to the first page number of the
                                           report. Accept the page number or enter another
                                           starting number.

TO PAGE                           :        4 digits.
                                           The program defaults to the last page number of the
                                           report. Accept the page number or enter another
                                           ending number.




8 - 260                               JULY 2006               Systems Utilities - User Guide
The program displays the number of report pages to be printed.

NUMBER OF COPIES TO BE
PRINTED                             :     1 digit.
                                          The program defaults to [1]. Accept the number of
                                          copies or enter another number of copies.

TEST PRINT                          :     Y/N
                                          The program defaults to [Y]. The program will print a
                                          test print before continuing. Enter [N] for no test print.

NUMBER OF TEST
PRINT PAGES                         :     4 digits.
                                          The program defaults to one page or in the case of
                                          longer reports to multiple pages. Accept the default or
                                          enter the number of test print pages required.

PRINT EVEN, ODD
OR ALL (E,O,A)                      :     1 character
                                          You may select whether to print even, odd, o all pages
                                          of a report.


At this point, pressing [Enter] will start report printing.
If you find that you wish to stop the printer while printing a report, press [Esc]. The following
message will display;
PRINTER INTERRUPTED - ENTER TO CONTINUE, ESC - EXIT
Press [Enter] to continue with the printing, or another [Esc] to stop the printing and mark
this report as ‘cancelled’. Use the [F5] toggle to un-cancel a report.
The mode of printing (compressed or standard font, number of lines per inch etc.) will be
determined by the printer options set up in SU01 - Terminal and Printer Setup.
To alter these printer options, press [F6].




SU - Report Management                                JULY 2006                           8 - 261
The screen now prompts for the report destination to be selected.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - REPORT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM                          SU60   11/001
     REPORT DEFAULTS:       Destination      Printer #     Destinations:
      1                         [2]            [01]        1 = Report management system
                                                           2 = Direct to printer
                                                           3 = Direct to a file
                                                           4 = Direct to screen
                                                           5 = Mail recipient
                                                           6 = Exel
                                                           7 = Word
                                                           8 = @Run
     DETAILS OK?   (Y/N)        [Y]




     ESC - EXIT




Level 2

PRINTER DESTINATION               :       [1] Report management System. (This option should
                                          not be used in SU60 - Report Management System
                                          as it will only result in the report being routed to the
                                          spooler for a second time)
                                          [2] Direct to the printer.
                                          [3] Direct to a file. If this option is selected, the report
                                          will be output to a file which is the same as the printer
                                          synonym.
                                          [4] Direct to screen. This option will display the report
                                          on the screen.
                                          [5] Mail recipient. This will display a dialog box
                                          allowing you to enter an e-mail address to which the
                                          current report should be routed.
                                          [6] Onwards.




8 - 262                               JULY 2006             Systems Utilities - User Guide
 From 6 onwards, you need first to create entries in your cblconfig file. These
 destinations can then be used to direct out put to other packages such as Exel
 and Word. The entries are as follows, using word as an example:
 TITAN-DEST6-NAME Word                           This contains an optional Name, here we
 used Word
 TITAN-DEST6-"C:\Program Files\Microsoft Office\Office\WINWORD.EXE" This is
 the command that executes the external package
 TITAN-DEST6-SUFFIX .txt             This is optional and is the extension given to the
 temporary print file. If this is omitted, the extension will be .prn
 TITAN-DEST6-DELETE N                     If you retain the default as N (no) then the
 temporary files will not be deleted on exiting the command. If you change this to Y,
 then the temporary file will be deleted and you ill have to save the file in the normal
 manner if you wish to retain this.

PRINTER #                        :     2 digits.
                                       If multiple printers have been set up on the system (via
                                       SU01 - Terminal and Printer Setup), then select the
                                       printer to use.
                                       Enter the printer number or use the [F1] key to scan
                                       the printers on file and select the one you require. The
                                       form indicator advises which form types may be
                                       printed on the printer, such as ALL = all types of
                                       forms.


Press [Enter] to accept the default or enter another option.




SU - Report Management                            JULY 2006                         8 - 263
Level 3

PRINT MODES
The program then displays the options available for this printer. The printer's characteristics
have been defined in SU01 - Terminal and Printer Setup.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - REPORT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM                        SU60 11/001
     SELECT THE DESTINATION PRINTER# [01] Our very first prt   Enabled Form=ALL
     SELECT ONE OF THE FOLLOWING PRINT MODES:      [C] Compressed Print Mode
                                                        Standard Print Mode
                                                        Expanded Print Mode
     SELECT ONE OF THE FOLLOWING PRINT FONTS:      [D] Draft Quality
                                                        Letter Quality
     SELECT ONE OF THE FOLLOWING PRINT DENSITIES: [6] 6 Lines / Inch
                                                        8 Lines / Inch
     PRINTER SYNONYM                                [PRINTER]. [   .]
     DETAILS OK?   (Y/N)                           [Y]




     F3 - ACCEPT, ESC - EXIT




Press [Enter] to accept the default or enter new options. The options available are;

PRINT MODES                       :     [C] compressed print mode
                                        [S] standard print mode
                                        [E] expanded mode.

PRINT FONTS                       :     [D] draft quality
                                        [L] letter quality.

PRINT DENSITY                     :     6 or 8 lines per inch vertical print spacing.

PRINTER SYNONYM                   :     8 characters.
                                        If the report is being routed direct to a printer, this field
                                        is not available for entry.
                                        However, if the report is to be printed to a file, this may
                                        be altered. The report will then be written to a file with
                                        the name of this synonym. The file will either be in the
                                        TITAN data file, or if you have an entry in the cblconfig
                                        file, it will be written to the directory specified.
                                        In this case the directory name will display above the
                                        PRINTER SYNONYM.




8 - 264                               JULY 2006               Systems Utilities - User Guide
                                      Include an entry: SU60-DIR name_of_directory
                                      The name must include the FULL pathname, for
                                      instance
                                      /usr/spool/uucppublic/ or
                                      C:\TITAN\TEMP\
                                      You may enter a suffix. Any files which use HTML as
                                      the extension, will have HTML embedded in the
                                      printout.

 The file name of 8 characters is appended to this pathname so it MUST include
 the end slash.

DETAILS OK? (Y/N)                :    Y/N.
                                      Before proceeding further, check that the printer is
                                      switched on and selected if relevant. Enter [N] if not.
                                      The program waits until [Y] is entered when the
                                      program proceeds to print the report.
Press [F10] to return to the option selection menu.




SU - Report Management                           JULY 2006                           8 - 265
8.2.5.     PLACING A REPORT RANGE ON HOLD
Enter [2] to select this option.

 Only the person who created the report, the Super User ‘SYSADMIN’ and Level 9
 Users may place reports on hold.
The screen will now show the following options available.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - REPORT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM                           SU60      11/001
     SELECT REPORTS TO BE PLACED ON HOLD BY       [1]   1   A Range of Reports
                                                        2   Company / Branch
                                                        3   Program Number
                                                        4   Username
                                                        5   Creation Date and Time
                                                        6   Form Type




     F10 - OPTION MENU, ESC - EXIT



SELECT REPORTS TO BE
PLACED ON HOLD BY                    :     [1] A Range of Reports
                                           [2] Company/Branch
                                           [3] Program Number
                                           [4] User Name
                                           [5] Creation Date and Time
                                           [6] Form Type


After completing the process, all reports selected will be in a hold state.


As all the options work in a similar way, only the first one will be described in detail.


SELECT REPORT RANGE
FROM/TO                              :     4 digits/4digits.
                                           Enter the starting number or press [F1] to scan the
                                           reports on file. Select the starting report number and
                                           press [Enter].
                                           Enter the last numbered report to be placed on hold or
                                           scan for the report number by pressing [F1]. Select the
                                           last report to be placed on hold and press [Enter].




8 - 266                                  JULY 2006            Systems Utilities - User Guide
Press [Enter] to accept the selection or re-enter the details.
The program will proceed to change all reports for the option selected to a hold status.
Any report which the logged-on user did not create will not be placed on hold. A message
NO WRITE PERMISSION - Report may not be altered or deleted will be displayed. These
reports will remain in a print state.
Press [Enter] to bypass these reports.

 SYSTEM UTILITIES - REPORT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM                        SU60     11/001


 SELECT REPORT RANGE:   FROM [0001] TO [11 ]
 REPORT CO/BR PGM       USERNAME   DATE   TIME PRT   FORM PAGES     STATUS    COUNT
 0001    01/01 AP74     SYSADMIN 91/06/03 17:34 01   NORMAL    2    PRINT    01/0+
 0002    01/01 AP79     SYSADMIN 91/06/03 17:35 01   NORMAL    3    PRINT    01/0+
 0003    01/01 AP79     SYSADMIN 91/06/03 17:34 01   NORMAL    1    PRINT    01/0+
 0004    01/01 AP80     SYSADMIN 91/06/03 17:35 01   NORMAL    1    PRINT    01/0+
 0005    01/01 AP79     SYSADMIN 91/06/03 17:46 01   NORMAL    3    PRINT    00/0+
 0006    01/01 AP79     SYSADMIN 91/06/03 17:46 01   NORMAL    1    PRINT    00/0+
 0007    01/01 AP00     SYSADMIN 91/06/03 17:50 01   NORMAL    2    PRINT    00/0+
 0008    01/01 SP19     SYSADMIN 91/06/04 12:28 01   ORDER      2   PRINT    00/0+
 0009    01/01 SP12     SYSADMIN 91/06/05 15:58 01   NORMAL    1    PRINT    00/1+
 0010    01/01 SP13     SYSADMIN 91/06/05 16:00 01   INVOIC    2    PRINT    00/0+
 0011<-->01/01 SP74     SYSADMIN 91/06/05 16:03 01   NORMAL     3   PRINT    00/0+
 0012    01/01 SP74     SYSADMIN 91/06/06 13:51 01   NORMAL    3    PRINT    00/0+
 0013    01/01 SP74     SYSADMIN 91/06/06 13:59 01   NORMAL    4    PRINT    01/0+
 0014    01/01 SP14     SYSADMIN 91/06/06 14:02 01   NORMAL     4   PRINT    01/0+
 0015    01/01 SP70     SYSADMIN 91/06/06 14:03 01   NORMAL    6    PRINT    01/0+


 F1 - SCAN, F10 - OPTIONS, ESC - EXIT




SU - Report Management                               JULY 2006                        8 - 267
8.2.6.     RELEASING A RANGE OF REPORTS FROM HOLD
Enter [3] from the first screen select this option.
The screen now shows the range of options available;

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - REPORT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM                           SU60      11/001
     SELECT REPORTS TO BE RELEASED FROM HOLD      [1]   1   A Range of Reports
                                                        2   Company / Branch
                                                        3   Program Number
                                                        4   Username
                                                        5   Creation Date and Time
                                                        6   Form Type




     F10 - OPTION MENU, ESC - EXIT



SELECT REPORT RANGE
FROM/TO                              :     4 digits/4 digits.
                                           Enter the starting number or press [F1] to scan the
                                           reports on file. Select the starting report number and
                                           press [Enter].
                                           Enter the last numbered report to be changed to print
                                           status or scan for the report number by pressing [F1].
                                           Select the last report to be changed to print status and
                                           press [Enter].

Press [Enter] to accept the selection or re-enter the details.


The program will proceed to change all reports for the option selected to a print status.
Any report which the logged-on user did not create will not be changed from hold. A
message NO WRITE PERMISSION - Report may not be altered or deleted will be
displayed. These reports will remain in a hold state.
Press [Enter] to bypass these reports.
The reports selected by report range will be released from hold.




8 - 268                                  JULY 2006            Systems Utilities - User Guide
8.2.7.      PRINTING A RANGE OF REPORTS
Enter [4] to select this option.

     SYSTEM UTILITIES - REPORT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM                           SU60   11/001


     SELECT REPORTS TO BE PRINTED BY              [1]   1   A Range of Reports
                                                        2   Company / Branch
                                                        3   Program Number
                                                        4   Username
                                                        5   Creation Date and Time
                                                        6   Form Type
                                                        7   Reports Not On Hold
                                                        8   Reports Not Yet Printed




         F5 - MULTIPLE SELECTION,   F10 - OPTION MENU, ESC - EXIT




The [F5] option on the status line allows you to select more than one range from the list
below. For instance you may select CO/BR, Program, User, Date/Time, with a reprint option
Y/N.
After each option has been entered, the cursor returns to select the next option until you
enter [Y] for the 'SELECTIONS COMPLETE' prompt.
Reports which match all the selections entered will be printed. All options in this selection
allow the printer status [F6] to be altered prior to printing.

SELECT REPORTS TO BE
PRINTED BY                           :     [1] A Range of Reports
                                           [2] Company / Branch
                                           [3] Program Number
                                           [4] Username
                                           [5] Creation Date and Time
                                           [6] Form Type
                                           [7] Reports Not On Hold
                                           [8] Reports Not Yet Printed

PRINTING REPORTS                     :     By range of reports
                                           Press [Enter] to print reports by report range. Enter the
                                           starting number or press [F1] to scan the reports on
                                           file. Select the starting report number and press
                                           [Enter].
                                           Enter the last numbered report to be printed or scan for
                                           the report number by pressing [F1]. Select the last
                                           report to be printed and press [Enter].



SU - Report Management                                  JULY 2006                          8 - 269
Press [Enter] to accept the selection or re-enter the details.


The reports selected by report range will be printed.

PRINTING REPORTS                  :     By company and branch range
                                        To print a range of reports by company and branch,
                                        enter [2], in response to the prompt. Accept the default
                                        company and branch displayed by pressing [Enter] or
                                        re-enter another combination.


Press [F7] to select all branches for a company.
The program will print the reports in the company/branch range.

PRINTING REPORTS                  :     By program number
                                        To print a range of reports by program number, enter
                                        [3], in response to the prompt and enter the program
                                        number. The program will print all reports for the
                                        program number entered.

PRINTING REPORTS                  :     By User name
                                        To print reports by User name, enter [4], in response to
                                        the prompt and enter the user name. The program will
                                        print all reports for the User name entered.

PRINTING REPORTS                  :     By creation date and time
                                        To print a range of reports by creation date and time,
                                        enter [5], in response to the prompt.
                                        Enter the date and time range.
                                        The default supplies the current system date and a
                                        time range of 00.00 to 23.59.
                                        The program will print all reports within the date and
                                        time range entered.

PRINTING REPORTS                  :     By form type.
                                        To print reports by form type, enter [6], in response to
                                        the prompt.
                                        Enter the form type for example, NORMAL, REMADV,
                                        INVOIC, STMT and CRNOTE.
                                        The program will print all reports with the form type
                                        entered.

PRINTING REPORTS                  :     Not placed on hold.
                                        To print a range of reports not placed on hold, enter [7],
                                        in response to the prompt.
                                        Enter [Enter] in response to the prompt.
                                        The program will print all reports not placed on hold.




8 - 270                               JULY 2006           Systems Utilities - User Guide
PRINTING REPORTS                  :     Not yet printed
                                        To print a range of reports not yet printed, enter [8], in
                                        response to the prompt.
                                        Enter [Enter] in response to the prompt.
                                        The program will print all reports not yet printed.

If you find that you wish to stop the while printing a report, press [Esc]. The following
message will display;
PRINTER INTERRUPTED - ENTER TO CONTINUE, ESC - EXIT
Press [Enter] to continue with the printing, or another [Esc] to stop the printing and mark
this report as ‘cancelled’. Use the [F5] toggle to un-cancel a report.




SU - Report Management                              JULY 2006                           8 - 271
8.2.8.     DELETING A RANGE OF REPORTS
Enter [5] to select this option.

SELECT REPORTS TO BE
DELETED BY                         :     [1] A Range of Reports
                                         [2] Company / Branch
                                         [3] Program Number
                                         [4] Username
                                         [5] Creation Date and Time
                                         [6] Form Type
                                         [7] Reports Not On Hold
                                         [8] Reports Not Yet Printed


 Reports with a mandatory print count, for example /1+, must normally be printed
 before deletion may take place - SYSADMIN and Level 9 Users may delete
 unprinted reports. Only the user who created the report (or the Super User
 "SYSADMIN") may delete that particular report.



 Where deletion of a report which has not yet been printed is requested, the
 system normally warns you of this, however if you respond with [N] to the
 PROMPT BEFORE DELETION IF UNPRINTED message displayed by the system,
 this warning will NOT be given.


DELETING REPORTS                   :     By range of reports
                                         Press [Enter] to delete a range of reports.
                                         Enter the starting number or press [F1] to scan the
                                         reports on file. Select the starting report number and
                                         press [Enter].
                                         Enter the last numbered report to be deleted or scan
                                         for the report number by pressing [F1]. Select the last
                                         report to be deleted and press [Enter].
Press [Enter] to accept the selection or re-enter the details. The reports selected by report
range will be deleted.


DELETING REPORTS                   :     By company and branch range.
                                         To delete a range of reports by company and branch
                                         enter [2].
Accept the default company and branch displayed by pressing [Enter] or re-enter another
combination.
Press [F7] to select all branches for a company.




8 - 272                                JULY 2006          Systems Utilities - User Guide
The program will delete the reports in the company/branch range.

DELETING REPORTS               :     By program number.
                                     To delete a range of reports by program number, enter
                                     [3]. Enter the program number.
                                     The program will delete all reports for the program
                                     number entered.

DELETING REPORTS               :     By User name.
                                     To delete reports by User name, enter [4].
                                     Enter the User name. The program will delete all
                                     reports for the User name entered.

DELETING REPORTS               :     By creation date and time
                                     To delete a range of reports by creation date and time,
                                     enter [5].
                                     Enter the date and time range, the default supplies the
                                     current system date and a time range of 00.00 to
                                     23.59.
                                     The program will delete all reports within the date and
                                     time range entered.

DELETING REPORTS               :     By form type.
                                     To delete reports by form type, enter [6].
                                     Enter the form type for example, NORMAL, REMADV,
                                     INVOIC, STMT and CRNOTE.
                                     The program will delete all reports with the form type
                                     entered.

DELETING REPORTS               :     Placed on hold.
                                     To delete a range of reports placed on hold, enter [7].
                                     Press [Enter] in response to the prompt and the
                                     program will delete all reports placed on hold.

DELETING REPORTS               :     Already printed.
                                     To delete a range of reports already printed, enter [8].
                                     Press [Enter] in response to the prompt and the
                                     program will delete all reports that have already been
                                     printed.




SU - Report Management                          JULY 2006                          8 - 273
8.2.9.     DISPLAYING A RANGE OF REPORTS ON A SCREEN
Enter [6] to select this option.


SELECT REPORTS TO BE
DISPLAYED BY                       :     [1] A Range of Reports
                                         [2] Company / Branch
                                         [3] Program Number
                                         [4] Username
                                         [5] Creation Date and Time
                                         [6] Form Type

DISPLAYING REPORTS                 :     By range of reports
                                         Press [Enter] to display a range of reports.
                                         Enter the starting number or press [F1] to scan the
                                         reports on file. Select the starting report number and
                                         press [Enter].
                                         Enter the last numbered report to be displayed or scan
                                         for the report number by pressing [F1]. Select the last
                                         report to be displayed and press [Enter].
Press [Enter] to accept the selection or re-enter the details. The reports selected by report
range will be displayed.


DISPLAYING REPORTS                 :     By company and branch range.
                                         To display a range of reports by company and branch
                                         enter [2].
Accept the default company and branch displayed by pressing [Enter] or re-enter another
combination.
Press [F7] to select all branches for a company.
The program will display the reports in the company/branch range.

DISPLAYING REPORTS                 :  By program number.
                                      To display a range of reports by program number, enter
                                      [3]. Enter the program number.
                                      The program will display all reports for the program
                                      number entered.
The program will display the reports selected.

DISPLAYING REPORTS                 :  By User name.
                                      To display reports by User name, enter [4].
                                      Enter the User name. The program will display all
                                      reports for the User name entered.
The program will display the reports selected.




8 - 274                                JULY 2006         Systems Utilities - User Guide
DISPLAYING REPORTS               :    By creation date and time
                                      To display a range of reports by creation date and time,
                                      enter [5].
                                      Enter the date and time range, the default supplies the
                                      current system date and a time range of 00.00 to
                                      23.59.
                                      The program will display all reports within the date and
                                      time range entered.
The program will display the reports selected.

DISPLAYING REPORTS               :    By form type.
                                      To display reports by form type, enter [6].
                                      Enter the form type for example, NORMAL, REMADV,
                                      INVOIC, STMT and CRNOTE.
                                      The program will display all reports with the form type
                                      entered.
The program will display the reports selected.




SU - Report Management                           JULY 2006                         8 - 275
8.3.    MANAGEMENT REPORT MAINTENANCE - SU61
The program optimises the Report Management file, disk space previously occupied by
deleted reports is re-cycled for use.
If the automatic backup facility is used the report maintenance option is automatically
invoked after backup has taken place. This is an optional facility.
It is recommended, however, that this program be run at the end of each day (either as part
of backup or as a separate run) to ensure that disk space used for reports is always
optimised.
Enter SU61 to select the module.

       SYSTEM UTILITIES - REPORT MANAGEMENT MAINTENANCE                 SU61   11/001

       RUN REPORT MAINTENANCE? (Y/N)              [Y]
       CLEAR ALL LOGFILE RECORDS? (Y/N)           [N]
       DELETE ALL REPORTS? (Y/N)                  [N]




       ESC - EXIT




Level 1

RUN REPORT
MAINTENANCE? (Y/N)                  :       Y/N
                                            Enter the appropriate response.

CLEAR ALL LOGFILE
RECORDS? (Y/N)                      :       Y/N
                                            Refer to program SU62 - Logging Maintenance for
                                            more information and enter the appropriate response.




8 - 276                                   JULY 2006         Systems Utilities - User Guide
If [N] is entered for both of the above prompts, the program will exit. If [Y] was entered for
the first prompt, the following will display;


DELETE ALL REPORTS                :     Y/N.
                                        If [Y] is entered ALL reports will be removed from the
                                        file.


 Under certain circumstances this program deletes and recreates files. For this
 reason it is essential that it is run in stand-alone mode, i.e. all other users
 should be logged off before the SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR runs this program.




SU - Report Management                             JULY 2006                          8 - 277
8.4.    LOGGING MAINTENANCE - SU62
The program allows maintenance to be performed on the logfile which captures system
logging information.

 The decision to log information depends on the user. This option is set in SU30 -
 Installation Maintenance Option 1, together with the level of logging desired. It is
 recommended that at least level 5 logging is performed.


       SYSTEM UTILITIES - LOGGING MAINTENANCE                            SU62   11/001
       CO - 01 - TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED
       BR - 01 - CAPE TOWN
       SELECT OPTION               [1]   1 - ALL LOGGING INFORMATION
                                         2 - SYSTEM ERRORS ONLY
                                         3 - FILE UPDATES ONLY
                                         4 - MESSAGES ONLY
                                         5 - SYSTEM ACCESS ONLY




       F9 - PRINT OPTIONS, F10 - CO/BR, ESC - EXIT



SELECT OPTION                       :     [1] All logging information.
                                          [2] System errors only.
                                          [3] File updates only.
                                          [4] Messages only.
                                          [5] System access only.


A higher level of logging also performs all lower levels, for example level 2 will also perform
level 1.




8 - 278                                 JULY 2006           Systems Utilities - User Guide
  FUNCTION KEYS FOR THESE OPTIONS
  [F1]      Scan on the date.
  [F8]      Clear the logfile.
  [F9]      Print the logging information.
  [F10]     Return to the options.
  [Enter]   Pressed on any entry and further information will be provided.
  [Esc]     Exit the program.

 The cleardown should be performed at least weekly to prevent the LOGFILE from
 growing too large. You may select the option at the point of logging out of the
 system and answering [Y] to the question 'IS THIS THE LAST RUN OF THE
 DAY?', or by running program SU61 - Report Management Maintenance.
The following information is logged;
  On every entry
      Company number
      Branch number
      Date
      Time
      Operator
      Diagnostic explaining type of logging
  Regarding system errors
      File name
      Error number, class and message
      Program error occurred in
      Operation causing error
  Regarding system access
      Programs accessed
  Regarding messages
      Destination or recipient of message
       The message itself




SU - Report Management                        JULY 2006                      8 - 279
                                                                 APPENDIX A

A1. INSTALLATION REGISTRATION FORM


 DEALER                                 INSTALLATION #
 INSTALLATION NAME (30)
 CONTACT NAME                           SIC CODE
 ADDRESS                                PHONE #
                                        FAX #
                                        MODEM #
                                        E MAIL
 APPLICATION              Y/N   #       APPLICATION                        Y/N   #
 INSTALLATION                           GENERAL LEDGER
 APPLICATION BUILDER                    INSTALMENT SALES
 ACCOUNTS PAYABLE                       INVENTORY
 ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE                    JOB COSTING
 BANK LINK                              MONTHLY PAYROLL
 BILL OF MATERIAL                       POS INTERFACE
 CHART WRITER                           PURCHASE ORDERS
 CASH BOOK                              REPORT WRITER
 CUSTOMER SPECIAL                       SALES ANALYSIS
 EDI                                    SALES ORDER
                                        PROCESSING
 FIXED ASSETS                           SYSTEMS UTILITIES
                                        WEEKLY PAYROLL
 ACUCOBOL SERIAL #                      OPERATING SYS:
 HARDWARE:




8 - 280                     JULY 2006           Systems Utilities - User Guide
                                                                          APPENDIX B

B1. DATA FILE UTILITIES

ACUCOBOL provides a useful routine with various functions. This routine is called vutil, and
can be used to examine files, extract data records and rebuild corrupted indexes. For
copyright reasons we cannot provide full documentation on this. Consult your support office
for more details.
Vutil File Manager
On AOS/VS, MS-DOS (including the Windows environment), OS/2, UNIX, MPE/iX, and
Windows NT systems, ACUCOBOL-85 uses the Vision indexed file system to manage its
indexed data files. For these systems, ACUCOBOL-85 comes with an indexed file utility
program called vutil that can be used to examine files, extract data records and rebuild
corrupted indexes. The .vutil utility is not supplied for VMS and AMOS systems.
Examining File Information
The “info” function of vutil returns basic information about Vision indexed files. The
command syntax is.
                                      vutil -info [-xp] [files]
Without files, standard input is read. If the “-p” option is used, then vutil pauses between
files and prompts the user for a “return” key. Otherwise all the reports are run together. The
“x” option causes vutil to report additional information.
This is the basic information provided by “info”:
 comment
 Vision version #
 # of records
 # of deleted records
 file size
 record size (min/max)
 # of keys
 user count




                                                                                 Appendix 281
If you request extended information with the -x option, you will also see:
 for each key: key size (total size and # of segments, if split); key offsets; are duplicates
    allowed
 block size
 blocks per granule
 tree height (max/min/avg)
 # of nodes
 # of deleted nodes
 total node space
 node space used
Testing File Integrity
The “check” option of vutil tests a file for internal consistency. The command is:
                                   vutil -check [ -afk keynum ] [files]
With no options, it reads a list of files from the standard input and tests each one for a non-
zero user count and other quickly tested errors. Files with errors or a non-zero user count
are listed. You may place the list of files to check on the command line instead of using the
standard input.
   -a             Test each file having a non-zero user count
   -f             Test all files
   -k keynum      Read the file sequentially in the order of the specified key; 1 means
                  first alternate and so forth.
Status returned from “vutil-check”
   0              File checked out fine.
   1              Check not fully performed because file in use.
   2              Non-zero count found.
   3              File is corrupt.
   255            Vutil fatal error or incorrect command line.


If more than one file is checked, the highest status value that applies is returned.




Appendix 282
Rebuilding Files
The “rebuild” option is used to rebuild or recreate an indexed file. The command is
vutil -rebuild [-b #] [-23] [-ac] [+ce] [-k keynum]
[-d dir] [-f factor] [ -s spoolfile] [-r] [-m size]
[-g ext_factor ] [files]
Each file listed on the command line is rebuilt. If no files are listed, then the standard input is
read for the list.
When a file is rebuilt, a temporary file is created and each record from the original file is
written to it. The temporary file has all of the characteristics of the original except that
deleted records are skipped. The command line arguments are:
  -b #              Blocking Factor; # may be either 1 or 2.
  -2                Use Vision version 2 format.
  -3                Rebuild in Vision version 3 format.
  -a                Automatic replacement of original file with new one.
  -c                Remove record compression.
  +c                Add record compression.
  +e                Add record encryption.
  -k keynum         Rebuild key in order; 0 means primary key, 1 means first alternate, and
                    so forth.
  -d dir            Place rebuilt file in named directory.
  -f factor         Compression factor.
  -s spoolfile      Use spooling
  -r                Recover interrupted build.
  -m size           Size of spool media in number of 1024-byte records.
  -g ext_factor     Extension factor in blocks.


Resetting User Counts
This option resets the user count of each named file to zero. The command is;
                                         vutil -zero [files]
The files may be listed on the command line, or may be read from the standard input. For
convenience in building scripts, non-Vision files are ignored.




                                                                                    Appendix 283
File Size Summary Report
The “size” option gives summary disk usage information for a set of Vision files.
                                                vutil -size [files]
Without files, standard input is read. The printed information includes the total size of the
file, the number of records, and the number of deleted records the file contains. It also
includes the percentage of records in the file which are not deleted records. This information
is useful when you are trying to find candidate files for rebuilding when disk space gets tight.
Non-Vision files are ignored by this command.
Vio File Transfer Utility
Vio is a file transfer utility similar to the UNIX program cpio. Vio allows you to collect a group
of files together into archives, and allows you to extract some or all of the files from these
archives. Vio is typically used to back up a set of files or to move files from one machine to
another.
Vio runs in two modes, the input mode (-I) and the output mode (-o). The syntax for each
mode, with all possible options, is shown here.

        vio -o [-b][-f file][-g][-h headerfile]
        [-k][-l listfile][-pr][-s blocks][-v]


        vio -I [-cd][-f file][-g][-h bytes]
        [-kmnstv2][files]



The input mode reads vio archives to extract files. The output mode creates new vio
archives.
In the output mode, vio reads its standard input for a list of files to place in the archive. The
archive is written to its standard output.
In the output mode, vio reads the archive from its standard input and extracts all the files.
The extracted files have the same names, permissions and owners that the had when the
archive was created. If files are specified, then only the named files are extracted. Note that
each file must exactly match the name of a file in the archive; no wild card characters are
allowed.




Appendix 284
ACUCOBOL-85 indexed files are treated in a special way. On output, vio saves certain
formatting information with each record; when vio inputs the records later, it uses that
information to create a new file with the proper indexed format for the new host system.
When it is archiving files other than indexed files or ACUCOBOL-85 object files, vio
assumes that the files are text files. It performs any conversions necessary to match the text
file conventions on the host machine. The “-p” option described below can cause these files
to be treated as binary files instead, in which case no translation occurs. If you are
transferring multiple files at one time, some ASCII and some binary, don’t use the “-p”
option. Instead, add a [space. followed by a “b” or a “B” after the name of each binary file in
the filename list; this prevents translation on an individual file.
ACUCOBOL-85 object files and indexed files are automatically detected and written out to
an archive as binary files, even if you fail to specify “-p”.


Vio Options
The following options can be used with the vio utility:
   -b                 Block archive with ten input records per output record.
   -c                 Place all files read from archive into current directory.
   -d                 Create directories as needed.
   -f file            Names archive file or a device name.
   -g                 Ring bell when new volume needed.
   -h number          Number of bytes to skip at beginning of each archive volume (input).
   h file             Add header to volume (output).
   -k                 Record size is 1024 bytes (not 512).
   -l file            file contains a list of file names to output.
   -m                 Restore file’s modification time.
   -n                 Assign current user as new owner of extracted files.
   -p                 Treat non-indexed files as binary (prevents text file conversion).
   -r                 Treat indexed files as raw data files (prevents conversion).
   -s size            Specifies size of media in records (of 512 or 1024 bytes).
   -t                 Print titles of files in archives rather than extracting files.
   -v                 Verbose mode - print file names.
   -2                 Produce Vision version 2 format (rather than 3).
Vio, when it is reading the names of files to be archived, recognises UNIX-style names on
non-UNIX environments. For example, if you specify the name “../demo/compfile” on a VAX,
vio will treat this name as “[-.DEMO]COMPFILE.”. For this reason, you should use UNIX-
style names if you want to move directory structures between machines with different
operating systems.




                                                                                        Appendix 285
MS-DOS Considerations
On MS-DOS machines, you may specify a diskette drive by using the fully-qualified file
name with the “-f” option. You may also specify the type of diskette by adding one of the
following letters immediately after the drive-name’s colon:
      H      1.2 MB High-density 5.25”
      3      1.44 MB High-density 3.5”
      9      720 KB, 9-sector, low density 3.5”
      8      320 KB, 8-sector, low density 5.25”
If you leave this letter off, then vio will assume a low density, 360 KB diskette (which can be
either 3.5” or 5.25”).
Vio Examples
Suppose that you have a list of files that you want to move to another machine using some
compatible media. You could use the following vio command to create the media.
                                    vio -ovblf listfile device
On the target machine, you can read this archive with:
                                       vio -ivndf device
Assuming that this archive was on a 1.2 MB floppy, you could read this on a MS-DOS
machine with:
                                         vio -ivndf a:h:
Now let us assume that you want to move a set of Vision indexed files to another machine,
but you do not have any common media. You plan to use a network or modem-transfer to
get the files to the target machine, but you have a problem because the indexed file format
on the two machines I different. You can use vio to help you in this case by writing the
archive to a disk file with this command;
                                   vio -ovbl listfile > diskfile

Then you move “diskfile” to the target machine and use vio to create new indexed files in
the correct format with this command:
                                       vio -ivnd <diskfile




Appendix 286
                                                                                                                                                             INDEX
A
A1........................................................................................................................................................................... 164
A2........................................................................................................................................................................... 164
ACCESS # ............................................................................................................................................................. 178
ACCESS INDICATOR .......................................................................................................................................... 218
ACCESS NUMBER ............................................................................................................................................... 173
ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE CONTROL ACCOUNTS - DC ................................................................................ 135
ACUVIEW INSTALLED ........................................................................................................................................ 101
ADDING A NEW PRINTER TYPE. ........................................................................................................................ 80
ADDING A NEW TERMINAL TYPE ....................................................................................................................... 78
ADDRESS 1 .................................................................................................................................................. 107, 109
ADDRESS 2 .................................................................................................................................................. 107, 109
ADDRESS 3 .................................................................................................................................................. 107, 109
ADJUSTMENTS.................................................................................................................................................... 163
ALLOCATE STOCK IN PO ................................................................................................................................... 162
AMENDING SCANS ............................................................................................................................................. 179
AMOUNT ............................................................................................................................................................... 164
ARE YOU SURE? (Y/N).......................................................................................................................................... 90
ARREARS INTEREST RATE ............................................................................................................................... 140
ARROW SIZE? (3-5)............................................................................................................................................. 103
ASSIGN TERMINAL TYPES TO TERMINAL NUMBERS .................................................................................... 69
AUTHOR ............................................................................................................................................................... 172
AUTHORISATION CODE
AUTHORITY CODE ...................................................................................................................................... 108, 110
AUTO POST TO CB (Y/N).................................................................................................................................... 160
AUTO-CALL MENU TEXT .................................................................................................................................... 120
AUTO-CALL PROMPT ......................................................................................................................................... 120
AUTO-CALL TO PROGRAM ................................................................................................................................ 120
B
BACKGROUND DISPLAY? .................................................................................................................................. 100
BACKUP .................................................................................................................................................................. 51
BACKUP - MS-DOS SYSTEMS ............................................................................................................................. 54
BACKUP - UNIX SYSTEMS ................................................................................................................................... 56
BACKUP DISKS/TAPES......................................................................................................................................... 52
BANK REF............................................................................................................................................................. 158
BANKLINK INTERFACE TYPES - BI ................................................................................................................... 131
BANKREF.............................................................................................................................................................. 131
BASE CURRENCY DESCRIPTION CODE ......................................................................................................... 132
BATCH PROCESSING ......................................................................................................................................... 216
BATCH? ................................................................................................................................................................ 161
BODY DETAILS .................................................................................................................................................... 187
BRANCH ............................................................................................................................................................... 104
BRANCH # ............................................................................................................................................................ 109
BRANCH ACCESS ............................................................................................................................................... 214
BRANCH NAME .................................................................................................................................................... 109
C
CALCULATOR ........................................................................................................................................................ 35
CALL AS ................................................................................................................................................................ 121
CALLED SYNONYM ............................................................................................................................................. 118
CAPTURE DATA .................................................................................................................................................. 219
CAPTURE STATUS.............................................................................................................................................. 219
CAPTURE USER DEFINED SCANS ................................................................................................................... 169
CASH ANALYSIS .................................................................................................................................................. 144


                                                                                                                                                      Appendix 287
CATEGORY .......................................................................................................................................................... 160
CENTRE MENUS? ............................................................................................................................................... 103
CENTURY ............................................................................................................................................................. 105
CHANGING THE REPORT STATUS .................................................................................................................. 258
CHARACTERS/LINE .............................................................................................................................................. 75
CLEAR ALL LOGFILE RECORDS? (Y/N) ........................................................................................................... 276
CO ......................................................................................................................................................................... 104
CO/BR REPORT HEADER (3 LINES) ................................................................................................................ 186
COIN SYMBOL ............................................................................................................................................. 132, 196
COLUMN ............................................................................................................................................................... 189
COLUMN 01 .......................................................................................................................................................... 193
COLUMN HEADING ............................................................................................................................................. 177
COLUMN POSITION ............................................................................................................................................ 176
COLUMN WIDTH.................................................................................................................................................. 192
COMMISSION PAYABLE FROM ......................................................................................................................... 149
COMMISSION PAYABLE TO ............................................................................................................................... 149
COMMON CATEGORY INPUT/MAINTENANCE ................................................................................................ 233
COMPANY # ................................................................................................................................................. 107, 109
COMPANY ACCESS ............................................................................................................................................ 214
COMPANY FILE ENQUIRY .................................................................................................................................. 239
COMPANY NAME................................................................................................................................................. 107
COMPANY REGISTRATION # ............................................................................................................................ 108
COMPANY TAX REGISTRATION # 1 ................................................................................................................. 108
COMPANY TAX REGISTRATION # 2 ................................................................................................................. 108
COMPANY/BRANCH .................................................................................................................................... 239, 256
COMPANY/BRANCH OPTIONS ............................................................................................................................ 28
COMPUTER MEMORY .......................................................................................................................................... 11
COMPUTER MEMORY ...................................................................................................................................... 9, 10
CONCEPTS AND FUNCTIONS ............................................................................................................................. 15
COPY....................................................................................................................................................................... 35
COPY PROGRAMS? (Y/N) .............................................................................................................................. 87, 89
COPY SUPPLIED OR USER HELP ....................................................................................................................... 85
COPY SYSTEMS? (Y/N) .................................................................................................................................. 86, 88
COPYING SCANS ................................................................................................................................................ 179
COUNT .................................................................................................................................................................. 257
CREATE A NEW JOB .......................................................................................................................................... 220
CREATE FILES FOR SYSTEM .............................................................................................................................. 58
CREATE SYSTEM FILES....................................................................................................................................... 57
CREATING NEW SCAN ....................................................................................................................................... 172
CREDIT NOTE # ................................................................................................................................................... 162
CURRENCY CODE .............................................................................................................................................. 196
CURRENCY CONVERSION - CY ................................................................................................................ 131, 132
CURRENCY FILE MAINTENANCE ..................................................................................................................... 196
CURRENCY LONG DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................................ 132, 196
CURRENCY SHORT DESCRIPTION .......................................................................................................... 132, 196
CURRENCY SIGN ........................................................................................................................................ 132, 196
CURRENT EXCHANGE RATE # ......................................................................................................................... 197
CURRENT LOGINS .............................................................................................................................................. 206
CURRENT QUICK ACCESS LOGINS ................................................................................................................. 206
CURSOR KEYS ...................................................................................................................................................... 18
CUSTOMER SPECIAL CODES P1 TO P4 .......................................................................................................... 147
CUSTOMER TERMS - DT.................................................................................................................................... 137
CUSTOMISED FORM MAINTENANCE .............................................................................................................. 180
CUSTOMISED TERMINOLOGY .......................................................................................................................... 194
CUSTOMIZED FILE LAYOUT MAINTENANCE .................................................................................................. 235
CYCLES ON RECORD LOCKING ....................................................................................................................... 101
D
DATA FIELDS ......................................................................................................................................................... 26
DATA FILE UTILITIES .......................................................................................................................................... 281
DATE ............................................................................................................................................................. 104, 256


Index 288
DATE - INTERNATIONAL ...................................................................................................................................... 28
DATE FORMAT .................................................................................................................................................... 106
DECIMALS ............................................................................................................................................................ 176
DEFAULT BRANCH # .................................................................................................................................. 108, 212
DEFAULT COMPANY .......................................................................................................................................... 100
DEFAULT COMPANY # ....................................................................................................................................... 212
DEFAULT HELP LEVEL ....................................................................................................................................... 106
DEFAULT WAREHOUSE............................................................................................................................. 110, 213
DELETE ALL REPORTS ...................................................................................................................................... 277
DELETE PROGRAMS? (Y/N) ................................................................................................................................ 94
DELETE SUPPLIED OR USER HELP ................................................................................................................... 92
DELETE SYSTEMS? (Y/N) .................................................................................................................................... 93
DELETE VARIABLES? (Y/N).................................................................................................................................. 95
DELETING A RANGE OF REPORTS .................................................................................................................. 272
DELETING A SINGLE REPORT .......................................................................................................................... 259
DELETING REPORTS.................................................................................................................................. 272, 273
DELETING REPORTS.......................................................................................................................................... 273
DELETING SCANS ............................................................................................................................................... 179
DENOMINATIONS (c) .......................................................................................................................................... 197
DENOMINATIONS (R).......................................................................................................................................... 197
DENOMINATIONS COINS ................................................................................................................................... 133
DENOMINATIONS NOTES .................................................................................................................................. 133
DESCRIPTION ....... 23, 74, 133, 134, 135, 137, 142, 143, 145, 146, 147, 148, 151, 152, 154, 156, 157, 162, 164,
  166, 168, 184, 200, 232
DESCRIPTION .............................................................................................................................................. 140, 141
DESCRIPTION CODE ................ 133, 140, 141, 142, 143, 145, 146, 147, 148, 150, 151, 152, 154, 156, 157, 164
DESCRIPTION CODE .......................................................................................................... 127, 134, 135, 137, 139
DESCRIPTION FILE PRINT ................................................................................................................................. 252
DESCRIPTION TYPE 134, 135, 137, 139, 140, 141, 142, 143, 145, 146, 147, 148, 150, 151, 152, 154, 156, 157,
  164
DESCRIPTION TYPE ........................................................................................................................................... 127
DESCRIPTIONS FILE MAINTENANCE............................................................................................................... 123
DESCRIPTIONS FILE SCAN ............................................................................................................................... 240
DESTINATION OF COPY ...................................................................................................................................... 63
DEVICE DIRECTORY .......................................................................................................................................... 105
DISC/SURCHARGE # .......................................................................................................................................... 155
DISK DRIVES/TAPE STREAMER ............................................................................................................... 9, 10, 11
DISPLAY CO/BR/DATE? ...................................................................................................................................... 103
DISPLAY MENU BAR ............................................................................................................................................. 67
DISPLAY STATION ID .......................................................................................................................................... 105
DISPLAY VERSION NUMBERS .......................................................................................................................... 243
DISPLAY WIDTH .................................................................................................................................................. 172
DISPLAYING A RANGE OF REPORTS ON A SCREEN .................................................................................... 274
DISPLAYING A REPORT ON A SCREEN........................................................................................................... 256
DISPLAYING REPORTS .............................................................................................................................. 274, 275
DIVISION BY ZERO ACTION............................................................................................................................... 200
DO YOU WISH TO CONTINUE? ..................................................................................................................... 62, 63
DOCUMENT TITLES ............................................................................................................................................ 190
DOCUMENT TRAILER ......................................................................................................................................... 191
E
ELECTRONIC MAIL................................................................................................................................................ 32
ENABLE CALCULATOR FUNCTIONS ................................................................................................................ 105
ENABLE THIS PRINTER ? ..................................................................................................................................... 76
END ....................................................................................................................................................................... 175
END KEY ................................................................................................................................................................. 61
END OF BODY...................................................................................................................................................... 185
ENQUIRY & SCAN MODULE MENU ................................................................................................................... 238
ENTER ESCAPE SEQUENCES TO ...................................................................................................................... 67
ENTER FONT ESCAPE SEQUENCES FOR ........................................................................................................ 71
ENTER HEXADECIMAL VALUES FOR EACH OF THESE GRAPHICS CHARACTERS ................................... 68


                                                                                                                                                            Index 289
ENTER IMPORT PROGRAM NAME ................................................................................................................... 235
ENTER LAYOUT #................................................................................................................................................ 235
ENTER SELECTION ............................................................................................................................................ 255
ENTER TERMINAL PARAMETERS ...................................................................................................................... 67
ENTER THE FORMULA ....................................................................................................................................... 201
ENTER THE UNIQUE NAME FOR THIS PRINTER TYPE................................................................................... 70
ENTER THE UNIQUE NAME FOR THIS TERMINAL TYPE ................................................................................ 65
ENTERING FORM TYPES ................................................................................................................................... 181
ERROR MESSAGES .............................................................................................................................................. 31
EXCHANGE RATE ............................................................................................................................................... 133
EXCHANGE RATE # ............................................................................................................................................ 197
EXPAND THE FORMULA .................................................................................................................................... 202
EXPIRY DATE................................................................................................................................................. 99, 112
EXTRACT CURRENT VERSIONS .............................................................................................................. 242, 244
F
FACTOR ........................................................................................................................................................ 133, 196
FAX # ............................................................................................................................................................. 108, 109
FIELD NAME ................................................................................................................................................. 173, 178
FIELD TYPE .................................................................................................................................................... 23, 178
FILE NAME............................................................................................................................................................ 172
FILE SECURITY.................................................................................................................................................... 171
FILE TO VERIFY ..................................................................................................................................................... 59
FINANCE CHARGE RATE ................................................................................................................................... 140
FONT HEX ESC SEQUENCE .............................................................................................................................. 139
FONTS - FN .......................................................................................................................................................... 139
FOR ....................................................................................................................................................................... 137
FOR ACCOUNT NO ............................................................................................................................................. 232
FORCE PASSWORD AFTER TIMES .................................................................................................................. 205
FORCE PASSWORD CHANGE .......................................................................................................................... 205
FOREIGN CURRENCIES..................................................................................................................................... 133
FORM .................................................................................................................................................................... 257
FORM LENGTH (Lines) ........................................................................................................................................ 184
FORM WIDTH (Columns)..................................................................................................................................... 184
FORMAT ....................................................................................................................................................... 174, 175
FORMULA NAME ................................................................................................................................................. 200
FROM DOC OR M/E DATE .................................................................................................................................. 138
FROM PAGE ......................................................................................................................................................... 260
FUNCTION KEYS ................................................................................................................................................... 17
G
GENERAL CROSS REFERENCE ENQUIRY...................................................................................................... 249
GENERAL CROSS REFERENCE MAINTENANCE ........................................................................................... 237
GROUP (4) / DESCRIPTION................................................................................................................................ 204
H
HEADER.................................................................................................................................................................. 23
HEADER DETAILS ............................................................................................................................................... 186
HEADING .............................................................................................................................................................. 173
HELP ....................................................................................................................................................................... 19
HELP EDIT LEVEL ............................................................................................................................................... 106
HELP SYSTEM NAME............................................................................................................................................ 84
HOTKEY .................................................................................................................................................................. 20
I
IMPORT FILE NAME ............................................................................................................................................ 235
IMPORT FILE TYPE ............................................................................................................................................. 235
IMPORT PROGRAM DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................................. 235
INCLUDE IN USAGE ............................................................................................................................................ 163
INCLUSIVE OF TAX ............................................................................................................................................. 153
INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE .......................................................................................................................... 98


Index 290
INSTALLATION #.................................................................................................................................................... 99
INSTALLATION NAME ........................................................................................................................................... 99
INSTALLATION REGISTRATION FORM ............................................................................................................ 280
INSTALLATION TERMINOLOGY ........................................................................................................................ 104
INSTALLING THE SYSTEMS UTILITIES MODULE ............................................................................................. 46
INSTALMENT SALES ARREAR INTEREST - IS ................................................................................................ 140
INTEGERS ............................................................................................................................................................ 176
INTERNAL SYSTEM # ......................................................................................................................................... 111
INVENTORY CATEGORY % MARK UP ............................................................................................................ 146
INVOICE # ............................................................................................................................................................. 162
IS THIS A DEDICATED PRINTER? ....................................................................................................................... 76
IV MESSAGE 1 ..................................................................................................................................................... 156
IV MESSAGE 2 ..................................................................................................................................................... 156
J
JOB DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................................................................. 218
JOB MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................................................................ 224
JOB NAME ............................................................................................................................................................ 218
K
KEY SEQ ................................................................................................................................................................. 23
KEYBOARD................................................................................................................................................... 9, 10, 11
L
LAYOUT DESCRIPTION ...................................................................................................................................... 235
LEFT JUSTIFY LEADING ZEROS? ..................................................................................................................... 105
LENGTH ................................................................................................................................................................ 176
LENGTH ................................................................................................................................................................ 159
LENGTH ........................................................................................................................................................ 174, 175
LEVEL.............................................................................................................................................................. 23, 205
LINE ....................................................................................................................................................................... 189
LINES FOR SPOOLER DISPLAY ......................................................................................................................... 67
LINES/PAGE ........................................................................................................................................................... 75
LINK PROGRAM NAME ......................................................................................................................................... 91
LOAD NEW VERSION NUMBER FILE................................................................................................................ 243
LOAD SUPPLIED HELP (ASCII) ............................................................................................................................ 83
LOADING ON MS-DOS SYSTEMS ....................................................................................................................... 38
LOADING ON UNIX SYSTEMS ............................................................................................................................. 41
LOADING THE SYSTEM ........................................................................................................................................ 37
LOCAL AREA NETWORKS ..................................................................................................................................... 9
LOG DATA BASE NOT IN USE ........................................................................................................................... 101
LOG DATABASE IN USE ..................................................................................................................................... 101
LOGFILE OPERATIONAL? .................................................................................................................................. 100
LOGGING LEVEL ................................................................................................................................................. 100
LOGGING MAINTENANCE .................................................................................................................................. 278
LONG DESCRIPTION .......................................................................................................................................... 128
LOOKUP FILE NAME ........................................................................................................................................... 178
M
MAIN MENU DESCRIPTION................................................................................................................................ 103
MAINTENANCE MODULE MENU ......................................................................................................................... 97
MANAGEMENT REPORT MAINTENANCE ........................................................................................................ 276
MANY LINES IN BODY (Y/N/C) ........................................................................................................................... 191
MATCH STRING ................................................................................................................................................... 160
MATRIX ................................................................................................................................................................. 188
MATRIX COLUMN DETAILS ............................................................................................................................... 193
MATRIX PRINT DETAILS .................................................................................................................................... 191
MAXIMUM LOGINS .............................................................................................................................................. 206
MAXIMUM NO OF RECORDS TO COPY ............................................................................................................. 61
MAXIMUM QUICK ACCESS LOGINS ................................................................................................................. 206
MAXIMUM RANGE ............................................................................................................................................... 215


                                                                                                                                                             Index 291
MAXIMUM USERS ......................................................................................................................................... 99, 112
MEMORANDUM ................................................................................................................................................... 205
MEMORY RANKING............................................................................................................................................. 106
MEMORY/SPEED OPTIMISATION ..................................................................................................................... 227
MENU OPERATOR PROMPT ............................................................................................................................. 103
MENU RESTRICTIONS ......................................................................................................................................... 16
MENU SEQUENCE # ........................................................................................................................................... 114
MENUS USING ....................................................................................................................................................... 15
MERGE THE TWO FILES? .................................................................................................................................... 61
MINIMUM RANGE ................................................................................................................................................ 215
MISCELLANEOUS MODULE MENU ................................................................................................................... 226
MODULE DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................................................... 117
MODULE NAME ................................................................................................................................................... 117
MOUSE ............................................................................................................................................................... 9, 11
MULTIPLY BY ....................................................................................................................................................... 152
N
N2 .......................................................................................................................................................................... 164
NARRATIVE CODE .............................................................................................................................................. 168
NARRATIVE FILE MAINTENANCE ..................................................................................................................... 168
NET FOR ............................................................................................................................................................... 137
NEW NAME ............................................................................................................................................................ 96
NEW PASSWORD ............................................................................................................................................... 207
NEXT AVAILABLE # ............................................................................................................................................. 167
NEXT COLUMN ON CHANGE OF ...................................................................................................................... 192
NEXT HEADING ON CHANGE OF...................................................................................................................... 191
NEXT HORZ. LINE ON CHANGE OF .................................................................................................................. 191
NUMBER OF COPIES TO BE PRINTED ............................................................................................................ 261
NUMBER OF TEST PRINT PAGES .................................................................................................................... 261
NUMBER OF USERS LOGGED IN ............................................................................................................. 102, 115
NUMBERING ........................................................................................................................................................ 159
NUMBERS FILE MAINTENANCE ........................................................................................................................ 165
NUMBERS FILE SCAN ........................................................................................................................................ 241
NUMBERS VALUE ............................................................................................................................................... 166
O
O/S ACCESS (Y/N)? ............................................................................................................................................. 206
OBJECT VERSION NUMBER MAINTENANCE .................................................................................................. 242
OCCUPATION DESCRIPTION - OC ................................................................................................................... 141
ON-LINE HELP MODULE MENU........................................................................................................................... 82
OPERATING SYSTEM ................................................................................................................................. 9, 10, 11
OPERATING SYSTEM UTILITIES ......................................................................................................................... 81
OPTIONS FOR PASSWORD CONTROL ........................................................................................................... 208
OTHER OPERATING SYSTEMS .......................................................................................................................... 14
OVERALL DISCOUNT #....................................................................................................................................... 155
OVERSCORE TOTALS ........................................................................................................................................ 192
OVERWRITE USER TERMINOLOGY................................................................................................................. 122
P
PAGE # .................................................................................................................................................................. 104
PAGES .................................................................................................................................................................. 257
PASTE ..................................................................................................................................................................... 35
PATTERSON GRADE NUMBER ......................................................................................................................... 141
PAYMENT METHOD - PM ................................................................................................................................... 143
PERIOD ................................................................................................................................................................. 104
PGM....................................................................................................................................................................... 256
PLACING A REPORT RANGE ON HOLD ........................................................................................................... 266
POSITION ..................................................................................................................................................... 175, 177
POSTAL CODE............................................................................................................................................. 107, 109
PRE-LOADED FIELDS ........................................................................................................................................... 27
PRICE # ................................................................................................................................................................. 154


Index 292
PRINT DENSITY ............................................................................................................................................. 75, 264
PRINT EVEN, ODD OR ALL (E,O,A) ................................................................................................................... 261
PRINT FONT ........................................................................................................................................................... 75
PRINT FONTS ...................................................................................................................................................... 264
PRINT MODE .......................................................................................................................................................... 75
PRINT MODES ..................................................................................................................................................... 264
PRINT MODULE MENU ....................................................................................................................................... 251
PRINT VERSION NUMBER REPORT ................................................................................................................. 243
PRINTER ....................................................................................................................................................... 9, 10, 11
PRINTER # ............................................................................................................................................................ 263
PRINTER DESTINATION ..................................................................................................................................... 262
PRINTER FORM ? .................................................................................................................................................. 76
PRINTER SYNONYM ..................................................................................................................................... 74, 264
PRINTER TYPE ...................................................................................................................................................... 73
PRINTING A RANGE OF REPORTS................................................................................................................... 269
PRINTING A SINGLE REPORT ........................................................................................................................... 260
PRINTING OPTIONS.............................................................................................................................................. 34
PRINTING REPORTS .......................................................................................................................................... 270
PRINTING REPORTS .......................................................................................................................... 269, 270, 271
PRINTING REPORTS .......................................................................................................................................... 270
PRODUCT GROUP DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................................... 142
PROGRAM ........................................................................................................................................................ 87, 89
PROGRAM DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................................................. 118
PROGRAM NAME .................................................................................................................................... 91, 94, 118
PRT........................................................................................................................................................................ 256
PURCHASE CHARGES DETAIL - PD ................................................................................................................. 142
PURCHASE ORDER AUTOMATIC SELLING PRICE MARKUP ....................................................................... 146
Q
QUEUE STATUS .................................................................................................................................................. 225
QUICK ACCESS ..................................................................................................................................................... 25
R
RANGE SIZE DESCRIPTIONS - RS.................................................................................................................... 150
RANGE SIZE DESCRIPTIONS - RT .................................................................................................................... 151
RANGE TYPE ....................................................................................................................................................... 215
RECORD LENGTH ................................................................................................................................................. 23
RECOVER OPTION ............................................................................................................................................... 60
REFERENCE ........................................................................................................................................................ 134
REFERENCE CODE ............................................................................................................................................ 166
REFERENCE CODE ............................................................................................................................................ 232
REFERENCE FILE MAINTENANCE ................................................................................................................... 230
REFERENCE TYPE.............................................................................................................................................. 230
RELEASING A RANGE OF REPORTS FROM HOLD ........................................................................................ 268
REMAP FUNCTION KEYS ..................................................................................................................................... 67
RENAME HELP VARIABLE NAMES ..................................................................................................................... 96
REPORT ACCESS GROUP ................................................................................................................................. 119
REPORT DEFAULTS ........................................................................................................................... 101, 113, 119
REPORT DESTINATION...................................................................................................................................... 205
REPORT MANAGEMENT AND LOGGING SYSTEM MENU ............................................................................. 254
REPORT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM .................................................................................................................... 255
REPORT NAME .................................................................................................................................................... 187
REPORT NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................. 256
REPORT SECURITY ............................................................................................................................................ 170
REPS COMMISSION RATE ................................................................................................................................. 148
RESET TO DEFAULT CO/BR ...................................................................................................................... 104, 213
RESTORING - UNIX SYSTEMS ............................................................................................................................ 56
RESTORING FROM BACKUP - MS-DOS SYSTEMS .......................................................................................... 54
ROUND DOWN TO NEAREST ............................................................................................................................ 144
ROUTE ACCOUNT NUMBER.............................................................................................................................. 147
ROUTE CODE ...................................................................................................................................................... 147


                                                                                                                                                            Index 293
RUN REPORT MAINTENANCE? (Y/N) ............................................................................................................... 276
RUN STATUS ....................................................................................................................................................... 219
RUN USER-DEFINED SCANS............................................................................................................................. 248
RUNNING A JOB .................................................................................................................................................. 222
RUNNING IN THE BACKGROUND ..................................................................................................................... 223
RUNNING IN THE FOREGROUND ..................................................................................................................... 223
S
SALES ANALYSIS CODE 1 - S1 .......................................................................................................................... 154
SALES TARGET ................................................................................................................................................... 142
SALESMEN'S NAMES AND COMMISSION RATES .......................................................................................... 148
SAVE LATEST VERSION NUMBERS TO SAVE FILE ....................................................................................... 243
SCAN DESCRIPTION .......................................................................................................................................... 172
SCAN FACILITY.................................................................................................................................................... 169
SCAN NAME ................................................................................................................................................. 172, 179
SCAN NAME ......................................................................................................................................................... 169
SCAN NAME TO COPY TO ................................................................................................................................. 179
SCANNING ............................................................................................................................................................. 29
SCREEN.................................................................................................................................................................... 9
SCREEN NUMBERS .............................................................................................................................................. 28
SCREEN SAVER AFTER ....................................................................................................................................... 67
SECURITY LEVEL .................................................................................................................................................. 23
SECURITY LEVELS ............................................................................................................................................. 170
SELECT ACCESS PERMISSIONS ...................................................................................................................... 209
SELECT COMPANY/BRANCH/WAREHOUSE AND RANGE ACCESS............................................................ 214
SELECT FILE TO RECOVER ................................................................................................................................ 60
SELECT FUNCTION ........................................................................................................................ 64, 98, 122, 217
SELECT OPTION ............................................................................................................................... 81, 85, 92, 278
SELECT REPORT RANGE FROM/TO ........................................................................................................ 266, 268
SELECT REPORTS TO BE DELETED BY.......................................................................................................... 272
SELECT REPORTS TO BE DISPLAYED BY ...................................................................................................... 274
SELECT REPORTS TO BE PLACED ON HOLD BY .......................................................................................... 266
SELECT REPORTS TO BE PRINTED BY .......................................................................................................... 269
SELECT TYPE ........................................................................................................................................................ 85
SELECT USER DEFAULTS ................................................................................................................................. 212
SELECTING A SCAN ........................................................................................................................................... 169
SELECTING THE FORMULA VARIABLES ......................................................................................................... 201
SET PASSWORD? ............................................................................................................................................... 207
SET PRINTER ASSIGNMENTS............................................................................................................................. 73
SET PRINTER CAPABILITIES ............................................................................................................................... 70
SET SYSTEM COMMANDS................................................................................................................................... 77
SET TERMINAL ASSIGNMENTS .......................................................................................................................... 69
SET TERMINAL CAPABILITIES ............................................................................................................................ 65
SET UP PARAMETERS FOR PRINTER ............................................................................................................... 73
SETTING UP THE FORMULA ............................................................................................................................. 200
SET-UP SEQUENCE.............................................................................................................................................. 49
SHORT DESCRIPTION........................................................................................................................................ 232
SHOULD A BANNER PAGE BE PRINTED? ......................................................................................................... 76
SHOW ON MENU? ............................................................................................................................... 114, 117, 119
SIGN ...................................................................................................................................................................... 176
SIGN (+/-) .............................................................................................................................................................. 158
SINGLE USER ONLY? ......................................................................................................................................... 218
SIZES .................................................................................................................................................................... 150
SKIP LINES AT END OF PAGE ............................................................................................................................. 75
SKIP LINES AT TOP OF PAGE ............................................................................................................................. 75
SKIP PAGES AFTER PRINT.................................................................................................................................. 75
SKIP PAGES BEFORE PRINT............................................................................................................................... 74
SP DATE ON IV/AR TRS...................................................................................................................................... 136
SPECIAL FIELD TYPES ....................................................................................................................................... 178
SPECIAL FUNCTION MODE ............................................................................................................................... 106
SPECIAL KEYS ....................................................................................................................................................... 19


Index 294
START KEY ............................................................................................................................................................ 61
START OF BODY ................................................................................................................................................. 184
START POS .......................................................................................................................................................... 158
START POSITION .................................................................................................................................................. 23
START POSITION ................................................................................................................................................ 173
STARTING RECORD TYPE ................................................................................................................................ 240
STATUS ................................................................................................................................................................ 257
STATUS MESSAGES............................................................................................................................................. 31
STOCK ISSUE VOUCHER NUMBER.................................................................................................................. 163
SU00 ........................................................................................................................................................................ 57
SU01 ........................................................................................................................................................................ 64
SU10 ........................................................................................................................................................................ 83
SU11 ........................................................................................................................................................................ 85
SU12 ........................................................................................................................................................................ 91
SU13 ........................................................................................................................................................................ 92
SU14 ........................................................................................................................................................................ 96
SU30 ........................................................................................................................................................................ 98
SU31 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 123
SU32 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 165
SU32 REFERENCE CODE .................................................................................................................................. 144
SU32 REFERNCE CODE ..................................................................................................................................... 145
SU33 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 168
SU34 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 169
SU35 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 180
SU36 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 196
SU37 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 198
SU38 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 203
SU39 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 216
SU40 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 227
SU41 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 230
SU42 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 233
SU44 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 235
SU45 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 237
SU50 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 239
SU51 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 240
SU52 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 241
SU53 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 242
SU54 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 248
SU55 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 249
SU58 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 250
SU60 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 255
CLEARING OF SU61 ............................................................................................................................................ 213
SU61 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 276
SU62 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 278
SU71 ...................................................................................................................................................................... 252
SU90 ........................................................................................................................................................................ 81
SUNDRY CHARGE............................................................................................................................................... 152
SUNDRY CHARGE % .......................................................................................................................................... 153
SUNDRY CHARGES - SC .................................................................................................................................... 152
SUPERVISOR ....................................................................................................................................................... 205
SUPPRESS CO/BR SCREEN? .................................................................................................................... 104, 213
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION...................................................................................................................................... 112
SYSTEM FORMULA MAINTENANCE ................................................................................................................. 198
SYSTEM NAME .................................................................................................................................. 86, 88, 93, 111
SYSTEM NAME .................................................................................................................................................... 209
SYSTEM PARAMETER FILE ................................................................................................................................. 64
SYSTEM PASSWORD ENQUIRY ....................................................................................................................... 250
SYSTEM PASSWORD MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................................. 203
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS ..................................................................................................................................... 9
SYSTEM SECURITY ............................................................................................................................................ 170
SYSTEM TERMINOLOGY ................................................................................................................................... 113


                                                                                                                                                             Index 295
SYSTEM TO LOAD................................................................................................................................................. 83
SYSTEMS UTILITIES MODULE OVERVIEW ......................................................................................................... 6
T
TARGET GP% ...................................................................................................................................................... 142
TAX RATE ..................................................................................................................................................... 153, 154
TELEPHONE #.............................................................................................................................................. 107, 109
TEMPLATE? (Y/N) ................................................................................................................................................ 205
TERMS % .............................................................................................................................................................. 137
TEST PRINT ......................................................................................................................................................... 261
THE MAIN MENU ................................................................................................................................................... 47
THE UTILITIES SYSTEM MENU ........................................................................................................................... 48
THEN ..................................................................................................................................................................... 167
TIME ...................................................................................................................................................................... 256
TITAN SYSTEM PROFILE ....................................................................................................................................... 2
TO .......................................................................................................................................................................... 167
TO PAGE............................................................................................................................................................... 260
TOTAL FOR MONTH ........................................................................................................................................... 159
TRANSACTION TYPE .................................................................................................................................. 135, 157
TRANSACTION TYPES - TT ............................................................................................................................... 157
TYPE ............................................................................................................................................................. 168, 175
TYPE ..................................................................................................................................................................... 174
TYPE FROM-TO ................................................................................................................................................... 252
U
UNDERSCORE TOTALS ..................................................................................................................................... 192
UNIX ........................................................................................................................................................................ 10
UPDATE (Y/N) ...................................................................................................................................................... 192
UPDATING BRANCH DETAILS ........................................................................................................................... 110
UPDATING FORM TYPES ................................................................................................................................... 193
UPDATING/DELETING BRANCH DETAILS ....................................................................................................... 110
USER ..................................................................................................................................................................... 119
USER DEFINED TYPES - X, Y, Z ........................................................................................................................ 164
USER DESIGNED FORM FORMATS ................................................................................................................. 183
USER HELP LINK MAINTENANCE ....................................................................................................................... 91
USER NAME ................................................................................................................................................. 204, 256
USER NAME ......................................................................................................................................................... 172
USER NAME TO COPY TO ................................................................................................................................. 179
USER/TEMPLATE NAME .................................................................................................................................... 204
USER-DEFINED FIELD - D1 to D7 ...................................................................................................................... 134
V
VARIABLE NAME ............................................................................................................................................. 95, 96
VAX VMS................................................................................................................................................................. 11
VDU's ................................................................................................................................................................. 10, 11
VERTICAL COLM TOTALS .................................................................................................................................. 192
VIEW ACCESS ..................................................................................................................................................... 206
VIEWKEY ................................................................................................................................................................ 21
W
WAREHOUSE # ................................................................................................................................................... 162
WAREHOUSE ACCESS ...................................................................................................................................... 214
WAREHOUSES - WH .......................................................................................................................................... 162
WINDOWS .............................................................................................................................................................. 45
X
XFERS OUT .......................................................................................................................................................... 163




Index 296
                                                                               TITAN



     Address this reply to your Dealer




                       YOUR COMMENTS PLEASE
                                 (On a copy of this page)


Information from our users is important to the ongoing improvement of this product. Please
take the time to tell us what enhancements would be of benefit to yourselves and they will
be carefully reviewed, and if applicable, incorporated in future releases.

  Program         Details
  Number




       Company
       Address




       Contact

				
DOCUMENT INFO
Shared By:
Categories:
Tags:
Stats:
views:9
posted:10/8/2012
language:English
pages:303